Nissan Automobile 2010 Altima User Manual
2010  
ALTIMA  
OWNER'S MANUAL  
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FOREWORD  
READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY  
Before driving your vehicle, please read this  
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-  
iarity with controls and maintenance require-  
ments, assisting you in the safe operation of your  
vehicle.  
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN  
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with  
confidence. It was produced using the latest  
techniques and strict quality control.  
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE  
This vehicle should not be modified.  
Modification  
performance, safety or durability, and  
may even violate governmental  
could  
affect  
its  
This manual was prepared to help you under-  
stand the operation and maintenance of your  
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-  
ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this  
manual before operating your vehicle.  
WARNING  
regulations. In addition, damage or per-  
formance problems resulting from modi-  
fications may not be covered under  
NISSAN warranties.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-  
MINDERS FOR SAFETY!  
Follow these important driving rules to  
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip  
for you and your passengers!  
A separate Warranty Information Booklet  
explains details about the warranties cov-  
ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service  
and Maintenance Guide” explains details  
about maintaining and servicing your ve-  
hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer  
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will  
explain how to resolve any concerns you  
may have with your vehicle, as well as  
clarify your rights under your state’s lemon  
law.  
● NEVER drive under the influence of al-  
cohol or drugs.  
● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits  
and never drive too fast for conditions.  
●
●
ALWAYS give your full attention to driving  
and avoid using vehicle features or taking  
other actions that could distract you.  
Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle  
best. When you require any service or have any  
questions, they will be glad to assist you with the  
extensive resources available to them.  
ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-  
priate child restraint systems. Preteen  
children should be seated in the rear seat.  
● ALWAYS provide information about the  
proper use of vehicle safety features to  
all occupants of the vehicle.  
● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual  
for important safety information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHEN READING THE MANUAL  
This manual includes information for all options  
available on this model. Therefore, you may find  
some information that does not apply to your  
vehicle.  
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65  
WARNING  
WARNING  
All information, specifications and illustrations in  
this manual are those in effect at the time of  
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change  
specifications or design without notice and with-  
out obligation.  
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,  
and certain vehicle components contain  
or emit chemicals known to the State of  
California to cause cancer and birth de-  
fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-  
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles  
and certain products of component wear  
contain or emit chemicals known to the  
State of California to cause cancer and  
birth defects or other reproductive harm.  
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT  
THIS MANUAL  
You will see various symbols in this manual. They  
are used in the following ways:  
APD1005  
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”  
or “Do not let this happen.”  
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE  
ADVISORY  
WARNING  
This is used to indicate the presence of a  
hazard that could cause death or serious  
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the  
risk, the procedures must be followed  
precisely.  
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-  
ies, may contain perchlorate material. The  
following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate  
Material – special handling may apply, See  
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”  
If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-  
tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the  
vehicle.  
CAUTION  
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these  
indicate movement or action.  
This is used to indicate the presence of a  
hazard that could cause minor or moder-  
ate personal injury or damage to your ve-  
hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-  
cedures must be followed carefully.  
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these  
call attention to an item in the illustration.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BLUETOOTH௡ is a  
trademark owned by  
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,  
U.S.A. and licensed  
to Visteon and  
Clarion.  
XM Radio௡ requires  
subscription, sold  
separately after first  
90 days. Not available  
in Alaska, Hawaii or  
Guam. For more  
information, visit  
www.xmradio.com.  
© 2009 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.  
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s  
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval  
system, or transmitted in any form, or by any  
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,  
recording or otherwise, without the prior written  
permission of Nissan North America, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM  
NISSAN CARES . . .  
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are  
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.  
However, if there is something that your NISSAN  
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to  
provide NISSAN directly with comments or  
questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-  
sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free  
number:  
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the  
following information:  
You can write to NISSAN with the information at:  
For U.S. customers  
– Your name, address, and telephone number  
Nissan North America, Inc.  
Consumer Affairs Department  
P.O. Box 685003  
– Vehicle identification number (attached to the  
top of the instrument panel on the driver’s  
side)  
Franklin, TN 37068-5003  
For U.S. customers  
1-800-NISSAN-1  
(1-800-647-7261)  
For Canadian customers  
Nissan Canada Inc.  
5290 Orbitor Drive  
– Date of purchase  
– Current odometer reading  
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name  
– Your comments or questions  
OR  
For Canadian customers  
1-800-387-0122  
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5  
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of  
Contents  
Illustrated table of contents  
0
1
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Instruments and controls  
2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Starting and driving  
3
4
5
In case of emergency  
6
Appearance and care  
7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Technical and consumer information  
8
9
Index  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0 Illustrated table of contents  
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2  
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3  
Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5  
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-7  
Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8  
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-10  
Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD  
RESTRAINTS  
1. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-28)  
2. Rear seat belts (P. 1-15)  
3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact  
supplemental air bag (P. 1-42)  
4. Front seat-mounted side-impact  
supplemental air bag (P. 1-42)  
5. Head Restraints (P. 1-11 )  
6. Front seat belts (P. 1-15)  
7. Supplemental front-impact air bags  
(P. 1-42)  
8. Seats (P. 1-2)  
9. Occupant classification sensor  
(pattern sensor) (P. 1-50)  
10. Seat belt with pretensioner (P. 1-55)  
11. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for  
CHildren) system (P. 1-26)  
See the page number indicated in paren-  
theses for operating details.  
WII0100  
0-2 Illustrated table of contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EXTERIOR FRONT  
Coupe  
1. Power windows (P. 2-42)  
2. Windshield (P. 8-20)  
3. Windshield wiper and washer switch  
(P. 2-26)  
4. Engine hood (P. 3-23)  
5. Tie down (P. 6-14)  
6. Fog light switch (if so equipped)  
(P. 2-32)  
7. Headlight and turn signal switch  
(P. 2-28)  
8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)  
9. Tire pressure (P. 8-34)  
10. Flat tire (P. 6-2)  
11. Tire chains (P. 8-42)  
12. Mirrors (P. 3-28)  
13. Door locks, NISSAN Intelligent Key ™ ,  
keys (P. 3-4, 3-6, 3-2)  
LII0114  
Illustrated table of contents 0-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sedan  
1. Power windows (P. 2-42)  
2. Windshield (P. 8-20)  
3. Windshield wiper and washer switch  
(P. 2-26)  
4. Engine hood (P. 3-23)  
5. Tie down (P. 6-14)  
6. Fog light switch (if so equipped)  
(P. 2-32)  
7. Headlight and turn signal switch  
(P. 2-28)  
8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)  
9. Tire pressure (P. 8-34)  
10. Flat tire (P. 6-2)  
11. Tire chains (P. 8-42)  
12. Mirrors (P. 3-28)  
13. Door locks, NISSAN Intelligent Key ™ ,  
keys (P. 3-4, 3-6, 3-2)  
See the page number indicated in paren-  
theses for operating details.  
LII0094  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0-4 Illustrated table of contents  
EXTERIOR REAR  
Coupe  
1. Rear window and outside mirror  
(if so equipped) defroster switch  
(P. 2-27)  
2. Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-24)  
3. Trunk lid (P. 3-23)  
4. Vehicle loading (P. 9-13)  
5. Opener operation (P. 3-23)  
6. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)  
7. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation  
(P. 3-25, P. 9-3)  
8. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-25)  
WII0125  
Illustrated table of contents 0-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sedan  
1. Rear window and outside mirror  
(if so equipped) defroster switch  
(P. 2-27)  
2. Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-24)  
3. Trunk lid (P. 3-23)  
4. Vehicle loading (P. 9-13)  
5. Opener operation (P. 3-23)  
6. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)  
7. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation  
(P. 3-25, P. 9-3)  
8. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-25)  
9. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-6)  
LII0095  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0-6 Illustrated table of contents  
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT  
1. Interior trunk access (P. 1-9)  
2. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-44)  
3. Sun visors (P. 3-27)  
4. Interior lights, illuminated entry (P. 2-46)  
5. HomeLinkா universal transceiver  
(if so equipped) (P. 2-49)  
6. Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror  
(if so equipped) (P. 3-28)  
7. Glove box (P. 2-39)  
8. Front cup holders (P. 2-38)  
9. Front console (P. 2-39)  
10. Front seat (P. 1-2)  
11. Rear seat (P. 1-9)  
See the page number indicated in paren-  
theses for operating details.  
WII0126  
Illustrated table of contents 0-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
5.  
6.  
7.  
Driver supplemental air bag/horn  
(P. 1-42, P. 2-33)  
Cruise control main/set switch  
(P. 5-20)  
Windshield wiper and washer switch  
(P. 2-26)  
8.  
9.  
Ignition switch (P. 5-7)  
Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-33)  
10. Front passenger air bag status light  
(P. 1-51)  
11. Front passenger supplemental air bag  
(P. 1-42)  
12. Glove box (P. 2-39)  
13. Navigation system* (if so equipped)  
(P. 4-2)  
14. Covered storage box (P. 2-40)  
15. Heater and air conditioner (automatic)  
(P. 4-26)  
16. Heater and air conditioner (manual)  
(P. 4-19)  
17. Shift selector (P. 5-11)  
18. Audio system controls (if so equipped)/  
Storage (if so equipped) (P. 4-28,  
P.2-40)  
WIC1598  
1.  
2.  
Vents (P. 4-18)  
Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn  
signal switch (P. 2-28)  
3.  
4.  
Steering wheel switch for audio control  
(if so equipped)/Bluetoothா Hands-free  
Phone System (if so equipped)  
(P. 4-95, P. 4-91, P. 4-105)  
19. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls  
(P. 3-27)  
Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)  
0-8 Illustrated table of contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
20. Vehicle information display controls  
(P. 2-17)  
21. Hood release (P. 3-23)  
22. Trunk opener (P. 3-23)  
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF  
switch (P. 2-34)  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ port (P. 5-7)  
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-  
er’s Manual (if so equipped).  
See the page number indicated in paren-  
theses for operating details.  
Illustrated table of contents 0-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK  
LOCATIONS  
QR25DE engine  
1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)  
2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)  
3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid  
reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-14, 8-14)  
4. Air cleaner (P. 8-19)  
5. Fuse block (P. 8-22)  
6. Battery (P. 8-15)  
7. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-22)  
8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)  
9. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)  
10. Drive belt location (P. 8-18)  
11. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)  
12. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir  
(P. 8-15)  
See the page number indicated in paren-  
theses for operating details.  
LDI0553  
0-10 Illustrated table of contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VQ35DE engine  
1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)  
2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)  
3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid  
reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-14, 8-14)  
4. Air cleaner (P. 8-19)  
5. Fuse block (P. 8-22)  
6. Battery (P. 8-15)  
7. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-22)  
8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)  
9. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)  
10. Drive belt location (P. 8-18)  
11. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)  
12. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir  
(P. 8-15)  
See the page number indicated in paren-  
theses for operating details.  
LDI0552  
Illustrated table of contents 0-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS  
Warning  
light  
Name  
Page  
2-11  
Warning  
light  
Name  
Page  
2-12  
Indicator  
light  
Name  
Page  
2-14  
2-14  
Anti-lock Braking  
System (ABS) warn-  
ing light  
Low tire pressure  
warning light  
Cruise set switch  
indicator light  
or  
or  
Front passenger air  
bag status light  
Master warning light  
2-13  
High beam indicator  
light (blue)  
2-15  
2-15  
2-26  
Seat belt warning  
light and chime  
2-13  
1-57  
Brake warning light  
2-11  
Malfunction Indica-  
tor Light (MIL)  
Supplemental air  
bag warning light  
Security indicator  
light  
Indicator  
light  
Name  
Page  
2-14  
Charge warning  
light  
2-11  
2-12  
Continuously Vari-  
able Transmission  
(CVT) position indi-  
cator light (if so  
equipped)  
Slip indicator light  
2-15  
2-16  
Continuously Vari-  
able Transmission  
(CVT) check warn-  
ing light (if so  
Turn signal/hazard  
indicator lights  
equipped)  
Cruise main switch  
indicator light  
2-14  
Vehicle Dynamic  
Control (VDC) OFF  
indicator light  
2-16  
Engine oil pressure  
warning light  
2-12  
0-12 Illustrated table of contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and  
supplemental restraint system  
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
Front power seat adjustment  
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24  
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for  
CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26  
(if so equipped for driver’s seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9  
Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11  
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15  
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15  
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18  
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18  
Three-point type seat belt with retractor. . . . . . . . . .1-18  
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21  
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21  
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22  
Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23  
Small children. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23  
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23  
Child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24  
Rear-facing child restraint installation using  
LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28  
Rear-facing child restraint installation using  
the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30  
Forward-facing child restraint installation  
using LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33  
Forward-facing child restraint installation  
using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-35  
Installing top tether strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39  
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39  
Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42  
Precautions on supplemental restraint  
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42  
Supplemental air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . . .1-56  
Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SEATS  
● The seatback should not be reclined  
any more than needed for comfort. Seat  
belts are most effective when the pas-  
senger sits well back and straight up in  
the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the  
risk of sliding under the lap belt and  
being injured is increased.  
CAUTION  
When adjusting the seat positions, be  
sure not to contact any moving parts to  
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.  
FRONT MANUAL SEAT  
ADJUSTMENT  
ARS1152  
● For the most effective protection when  
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should  
be upright. Always sit well back in the  
seat with both feet on the floor and  
adjust the seat properly. See “Precau-  
tions on seat belt usage” later in this  
section.  
WARNING  
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when  
the seatback is reclined. This can be  
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not  
be against your body. In an accident,  
you could be thrown into it and receive  
neck or other serious injuries. You  
could also slide under the lap belt and  
receive serious internal injuries.  
● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat  
to make sure it is securely locked.  
● Do not leave children unattended inside  
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-  
tivate switches or controls. Unattended  
children could become involved in seri-  
ous accidents.  
1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WRS0738  
WRS0739  
WRS0740  
Forward and backward  
Reclining  
Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s  
seat)  
Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you  
slide the seat forward or backward to the desired  
position. Release the bar to lock the seat in  
position.  
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean  
back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever  
up and lean your body forward. Release the lever  
to lock the seatback in position.  
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust  
the seat height until the desired position is  
achieved.  
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the  
seatback for occupants of different sizes for  
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat  
belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage”later  
in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined  
to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is  
stopped and the transmission is in P (Park) or N  
(Neutral) position with the parking brake fully  
applied.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WRS0841  
Coupe  
Operating tips  
FRONT POWER SEAT  
ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped for  
driver’s seat)  
CAUTION  
● Do not operate the power recline switch  
when the seatback has been manually  
released using the upper seatback re-  
1
WARNING  
Before driving the vehicle, return the seat-  
back to an upright seating position after  
manually releasing it. Also, make sure the  
seat is locked in place. Failure to do so  
may cause the seat to move in a collision  
or sudden stop. This may result in damage  
to the seat or personal injury.  
lease lever  
the seat.  
. Doing so can damage  
᭺
● Do not pull on the upper seatback re-  
lease lever or the trim to return the  
seatback to a normal seating position.  
Doing so may damage the seat.  
1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reclining  
Move the recline switch backward until the de-  
sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback  
forward again, move the switch forward and  
move your body forward. The seatback will move  
forward.  
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the  
seatback for occupants of different sizes for  
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat  
belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage”later  
in this section). Also, the seatback can be re-  
clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-  
hicle is stopped and the transmission is in P  
(Park) or N (Neutral) position with the parking  
brake fully applied.  
WRS0751  
Sedan  
●
Pull up on the upper seatback release lever  
to release the seatback only. Push the seat-  
back forward to allow for access to items  
behind the front seat. Push the seatback to  
the rear of the vehicle to return the seatback  
to the upright and locked position. The up-  
per seatback release lever does not need to  
be used.  
●
●
The power seat motor has an auto-reset  
overload protection circuit. If the motor  
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,  
then reactivate the switch.  
Do not operate the power seat switch for a  
long period of time when the engine is off.  
This will discharge the battery.  
Forward and backward  
Moving the switch forward or backward will slide  
the seat forward or backward to the desired  
position.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WRS0842  
WRS0743  
WRS0843  
Type A  
Coupe shown, Sedan similar  
Type B  
Lumbar support (if so equipped for  
driver’s seat)  
Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s  
seat)  
The lumbar support feature provides lower back  
support to the driver. Push the switch (Type A)  
forward or backward or move the lever (Type B)  
up or down to adjust the seat lumbar area.  
Pull the lever up or push down to adjust the angle  
and height of the seat cushion.  
1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To return the seat to a locked position:  
Push the upper seatback rearward until the seat-  
back and track are locked.  
Operating tips:  
●
●
●
The seatback and track will not lock until the  
seatback is returned rearward.  
The seat track will not lock until it reaches  
the first position memory point.  
The seatback will return to the first locking  
notch when using the seat recliner lever.  
WRS0789  
WRS0791  
Entry to the rear seat from outside of  
the vehicle on the front passenger side  
(if so equipped for Coupe models)  
Entry to the rear seat from outside of  
the vehicle on the driver’s side using  
the upper seatback release lever (if so  
equipped for Coupe models)  
1
Pull the seat recliner lever  
to the uppermost  
᭺
2
position folding the seatback forward , releas-  
᭺
1
The use of the upper seatback release lever  
᭺
,
ing the seat track.  
on the inboard side of the passenger seat, allows  
for the driver to:  
Slide the entire seat forward for access to the  
rear seat.  
●
allow passenger entry to the rear seat from  
outside of the vehicle.  
●
access items located behind the front pas-  
senger seat.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Pull the upper seatback release lever  
to the  
Operating tips:  
᭺
uppermost position, folding the seatback forward  
●
●
●
The seatback and track will not lock until the  
seatback is returned rearward.  
2
, releasing the seat track.  
᭺
Slide the entire seat forward for access to the  
rear seat.  
The seat track will not lock until it reaches  
the first position memory point.  
To return the seat to a locked position:  
The seatback will return to an upright seating  
position if the lower seatback release lever is  
pushed to the uppermost position.  
Push the upper seatback rearward until the seat-  
back and track are locked.  
Operating tips:  
●
●
●
The seatback and track will not lock until the  
seatback is returned rearward.  
The seat track will not lock until it reaches  
the first position memory point.  
WRS0790  
Exiting from the rear seat on the front  
passenger side, using the lower  
seatback release lever (if so equipped  
for Coupe models)  
The seatback will return to an upright seating  
position if the upper seatback release lever  
is pulled to the uppermost position.  
1
Press on the lower seatback release lever  
᭺
until it reaches the lowermost position. Fold the  
2
seatback forward , releasing the seat track.  
᭺
Slide the entire seat forward for access from the  
rear seat.  
To return the seat to a locked position:  
Push the upper seatback rearward until the seat-  
back and track are locked.  
1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating tips:  
●
●
●
The seatback and track will not lock until the  
seat back is returned rearward.  
The seat track will not lock until it reaches  
the first position memory point.  
The seatback will return to an upright seating  
position if the upper seatback release lever  
is pulled to the uppermost position.  
WRS0791  
Exiting from the rear seat on the  
driver’s side, using the upper seatback  
release lever (if so equipped for  
Coupe models)  
1
Pull the upper seatback release lever  
to the  
᭺
uppermost position, folding the seatback forward  
2
WRS0794  
, releasing the seat track.  
᭺
FOLDING REAR SEAT  
Interior trunk access  
Slide the entire seat forward to exit from the rear  
seat.  
To return the seat to a locked position:  
The trunk can be accessed from the passenger  
side of the rear seat for loading and unloading, as  
shown.  
Push the upper seatback rearward until the seat-  
back and track are locked.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Open the access cover on the rear parcel  
shelf.  
● Closely supervise children when they  
are around cars to prevent them from  
playing and becoming locked in the  
trunk where they could be seriously in-  
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear  
seatback and trunk lid securely latched  
when not in use, and prevent children’s  
access to car keys.  
2. Push down on the button on the rear parcel  
shelf.  
3. Fold down the passenger’s side seatback.  
WARNING  
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo  
area or on the rear seat when it is in the  
fold-down position. Use of these areas  
by passengers without proper restraints  
could result in serious injury in an acci-  
dent or sudden stop.  
WRS0745  
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or  
straps to help prevent it from sliding or  
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than  
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-  
lision, unsecured cargo could cause  
personal injury.  
To fold down the driver’s side of the rear seat,  
reach through the opening and pull on the strap  
᭺
The rear seats can be locked using the mechani-  
cal key to prevent unauthorized access. For more  
information on keys, refer to “Keys” in the “Pre-  
driving checks and adjustments” section of this  
manual.  
1
located behind the seat.  
● When returning the seatbacks to the  
upright position, be certain they are  
completely secured in the latched posi-  
tion. If they are not completely secured,  
passengers may be injured in an acci-  
dent or sudden stop.  
1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HEAD RESTRAINTS  
WARNING  
Head restraints supplement the other ve-  
hicle safety systems. They may provide  
additional protection against injury in cer-  
tain rear end collisions. Adjust the head  
restraints properly, as specified in this  
section. Check the adjustment after  
someone else uses the seat. Do not attach  
anything to the head restraint stalks or  
remove the head restraint. Do not use the  
seat if the head restraint has been re-  
moved. If the head restraint was removed,  
reinstall and properly adjust the head re-  
straint before an occupant uses the seat-  
ing position. Failure to follow these in-  
structions can reduce the effectiveness of  
the head restraints. This may increase the  
WRS0167  
LRS0893  
The illustration shows the seating positions  
equipped with head restraints. All of the head  
restraints are adjustable.  
Center armrest (if so equipped)  
Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal.  
᭡ Indicates the seating position is equipped with  
risk of serious injury or death in  
collision.  
a
a head restraint.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WRS0921  
WRS0134  
LRS0888  
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.  
Components  
1. Head restraint  
2. Adjustment notches  
3. Lock knob  
Adjustment  
Adjust the head restraint so the center is level  
with the center of the seat occupant’s ears.  
4. Stalks  
5. Release knob  
1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head re-  
straint before an occupant uses the seating  
position.  
LRS0889  
WRS0922  
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push  
the head restraint down.  
Removal  
Use the following procedure to remove the ad-  
justable head restraints.  
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest  
position.  
2. Push and hold the lock knob and release  
knob.  
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.  
4. Store the head restraint properly so it is not  
loose in the vehicle.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as  
described in this section.  
LRS0891  
SPA1025  
Install  
Front-seat Active Head Restraints  
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes  
in the seat. Make sure the head restraint is  
facing the correct direction. The stalk with  
1
The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-  
ing the force that the seatback receives from the  
occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement  
of the head restraint helps support the occu-  
pant’s head by reducing its backward movement  
and helping absorb some of the forces that may  
lead to whiplash-type injuries.  
the adjustment notches  
must be installed  
᭺
2
in the hole with the lock knob  
.
᭺
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the  
head restraint down.  
Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions  
at low to medium speeds in which it is said that  
whiplash injury occurs most.  
3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an  
occupant uses the seating position.  
Active Head Restraints operate only in certain  
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head  
restraints return to their original position.  
1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SEAT BELTS  
SSS0136  
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT  
USAGE  
If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-  
justed and you are sitting upright and well back in  
your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances  
of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the  
severity of injury may be greatly reduced.  
NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your  
passengers to buckle up every time you drive,  
even if your seating position includes a supple-  
mental air bag.  
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces  
or territories specify that seat belts be worn  
at all times when a vehicle is being driven.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SSS0134  
SSS0016  
WARNING  
WARNING  
● Every person who drives or rides in this  
vehicle should use a seat belt at all  
times. Children should be properly re-  
strained in the rear seat and, if appro-  
priate, in a child restraint.  
● The seat belt should be properly ad-  
justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may  
reduce the effectiveness of the entire  
restraint system and increase the  
chance or severity of injury in an acci-  
dent. Serious injury or death can occur  
if the seat belt is not worn properly.  
1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely  
fastened to the proper buckle.  
● Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-  
vated, it cannot be reused and must be  
replaced together with the retractor.  
See your NISSAN dealer.  
● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or  
twisted. Doing so may reduce its  
effectiveness.  
● Removal and installation of preten-  
sioner system components should be  
done by a NISSAN dealer.  
● Do not allow more than one person to  
use the same seat belt.  
● All seat belt assemblies, including re-  
tractors and attaching hardware,  
should be inspected after any collision  
by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-  
mends that all seat belt assemblies in  
use during a collision be replaced un-  
less the collision was minor and the  
belts show no damage and continue to  
operate properly. Seat belt assemblies  
not in use during a collision should also  
be inspected and replaced if either  
damage or improper operation is noted.  
● Never carry more people in the vehicle  
than there are seat belts.  
● If the seat belt warning light glows con-  
tinuously while the ignition is turned  
ON with all doors closed and all seat  
belts fastened, it may indicate a mal-  
function in the system. Have the system  
checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
SSS0014  
WARNING  
● Always route the shoulder belt over  
your shoulder and across your chest.  
Never put the belt behind your back,  
under your arm or across your neck. The  
belt should be away from your face and  
neck, but not falling off your shoulder.  
● No changes should be made to the seat  
belt system. For example, do not modify  
the seat belt, add material, or install  
devices that may change the seat belt  
routing or tension. Doing so may affect  
the operation of the seat belt system.  
Modifying or tampering with the seat  
belt system may result in serious per-  
sonal injury.  
● All child restraints and attaching hard-  
ware should be inspected after any col-  
lision. Always follow the restraint  
manufacturer’s inspection instructions  
and replacement recommendations.  
The child restraints should be replaced  
if they are damaged.  
● Position the lap belt as low and snug as  
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE  
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could  
increase the risk of internal injuries in  
an accident.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREGNANT WOMEN  
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT  
WITH RETRACTOR  
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use  
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and  
always position the lap belt as low as possible  
around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder  
belt over your shoulder and across your chest.  
Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-  
dominal area. Contact your doctor for specific  
recommendations.  
WARNING  
● Every person who drives or rides in this  
vehicle should use a seat belt at all  
times.  
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when  
the seatback is reclined. This can be  
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not  
be against your body. In an accident,  
you could be thrown into it and receive  
neck or other serious injuries. You  
could also slide under the lap belt and  
receive serious internal injuries.  
INJURED PERSONS  
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use  
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific  
recommendations.  
WRS0738  
Manual front seat shown  
Fastening the seat belts  
● For the most effective protection when  
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should  
be upright. Always sit well back in the  
seat with both feet on the floor and  
adjust the seat belt properly.  
1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this  
section.  
1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode  
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow  
the driver and passengers some freedom of  
movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt  
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during  
certain impacts.  
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode  
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child  
restraint installation.  
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt  
cannot be extended again until the seat belt  
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully  
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode  
after the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-  
straints” later in this section for more information.  
LRS0594  
LRS0595  
2
3
Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor  
and insert the tongue into the buckle until  
you hear and feel the latch engage.  
Position the lap belt portion low and snug  
᭺
᭺
on the hips as shown.  
The ALR mode should be used only for  
child restraint installation. During normal  
seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode  
should not be activated. If it is activated, it  
may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-  
sion.  
4
Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the  
retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the  
shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder  
and across your chest.  
᭺
●
●
The retractor is designed to lock during  
a sudden stop or on impact. A slow  
pulling motion permits the seat belt to  
move, and allows you some freedom of  
movement in the seat.  
The front passenger seat and the rear seating  
positions three-point seat belts have two modes  
of operation:  
WARNING  
If the seat belt cannot be pulled from  
its fully retracted position, firmly pull  
the belt and release it. Then smoothly  
pull the belt out of the retractor.  
When fastening the seat belts, be certain  
that the seatbacks are completely se-  
cured in the latched position. If they are  
not completely secured, passengers may  
be injured in an accident or sudden stop.  
●
●
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)  
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To increase your confidence in the seat belts,  
check the operation as follows:  
●
Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward  
quickly. The retractor should lock and re-  
strict further belt movement.  
If the retractor does not lock during this check or  
if you have any questions about seat belt opera-  
tion, see a NISSAN dealer.  
WRS0139  
LRS0242  
Unfastening the seat belts  
Shoulder belt height adjustment  
(Sedan, front seats)  
1
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on  
the buckle. The seat belt automatically re-  
tracts.  
᭺
The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-  
justed to the position best for you. See “Precau-  
tions on seat belt usage”earlier in this section. To  
1
Checking seat belt operation  
adjust, pull out the adjustment button  
and  
᭺
move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired  
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt  
movement by two separate methods:  
2
position , so the belt passes over the center of  
᭺
the shoulder. The belt should be away from your  
face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.  
Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul-  
der belt anchor into position.  
●
When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the  
retractor.  
●
When the vehicle slows down rapidly.  
1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The shoulder belt comfort assist arm can be  
adjusted to the position best for you. See “Pre-  
cautions on seat belt usage” earlier in this sec-  
tion. To adjust, move the arm up as indicated.  
See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur-  
chasing an extender if an extender is required.  
WARNING  
● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made  
by the same company which made the  
original equipment seat belts, should  
be used with NISSAN seat belts.  
WARNING  
● After adjustment, release the adjust-  
ment button and try to move the shoul-  
der belt anchor up and down to make  
sure it is securely fixed in position.  
● Adults and children who can use the  
standard seat belt should not use an  
extender. Such unnecessary use could  
result in serious personal injury in the  
event of an accident.  
● The shoulder belt anchor height should  
be adjusted to the position best for you.  
Failure to do so may reduce the effec-  
tiveness of the entire restraint system  
and increase the chance or severity of  
injury in an accident.  
LRS0821  
● Never use seat belt extenders to install  
child restraints. If the child restraint is  
not secured properly, the child could be  
seriously injured in a collision or a sud-  
den stop.  
Shoulder belt guide (Coupe)  
The shoulder arm can be adjusted to allow easier  
access to the shoulder belt. The arm can also be  
folded down to allow rear seat passengers easier  
access.  
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE  
●
To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a  
mild soap solution or any solution recom-  
mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.  
Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat  
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the  
seat belts to retract until they are completely  
dry.  
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS  
If, because of body size or driving position, it is  
not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt  
and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with  
the installed seat belts is available that can be  
purchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in  
(200 mm) of length and may be used for either  
the driver or front passenger seating position.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CHILD SAFETY  
●
●
If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt  
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat  
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder  
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.  
Children need adults to help protect them.  
They need to be properly restrained.  
WARNING  
Infants and children need special protec-  
tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit  
them properly. The shoulder belt may  
come too close to the face or neck. The  
lap belt may not fit over their small hip  
bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-  
ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal  
injury. Always use appropriate child  
restraints.  
In addition to the general information in this  
manual, child safety information is available from  
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,  
government traffic safety offices, and community  
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure  
to learn the best way to transport your child.  
Periodically check to see that the seat  
belt and the metal components, such as  
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires  
and anchors work properly. If loose parts,  
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the  
webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-  
sembly should be replaced.  
There are three basic types of child restraint  
systems:  
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-  
tories require the use of approved child restraints  
for infants and small children. See “Child Re-  
straints” later in this section.  
●
●
●
Rear-facing child restraint  
Forward-facing child restraint  
Booster seat  
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by  
using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Teth-  
ers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat  
belt. See “Child Restraints” section for more in-  
formation.  
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.  
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less  
than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing  
child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints  
are available for children who outgrow rear-  
facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.  
Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle  
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer  
use a forward-facing child restraint.  
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens  
and children be restrained in the rear seat.  
Studies show that children are safer when  
properly restrained in the rear seat than in  
the front seat.  
1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This is especially important because your  
vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-  
tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-  
ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”  
later in this section.  
LARGER CHILDREN  
WARNING  
Children who are too large for child restraints  
should be seated and restrained by the seat belts  
which are provided. The seat belt may not fit  
properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5  
cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and  
80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to  
obtain proper seat belt fit.  
Never let a child stand or kneel on any  
seat and do not allow a child in the cargo  
area. The child could be seriously injured  
or killed in a sudden stop or collision.  
INFANTS  
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed  
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-  
mends that infants be placed in child restraints  
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standards. You should choose a child restraint  
that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-  
facturer’s instructions for installation and use.  
NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a  
commercially available booster seat if the shoul-  
der belt fits close to the face or neck or if the lap  
portion of the seat belt goes across the abdo-  
men. The booster seat should raise the child so  
that the shoulder belt is properly positioned  
across the top, middle portion of the shoulder  
and the lap belt is low on the hips. A booster seat  
can only be used in seating positions that have a  
three-point type seat belt. The booster seat  
should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certi-  
fying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so  
the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face  
and neck, use the shoulder belt without the  
booster seat.  
SMALL CHILDREN  
Children that are over one year old and weigh at  
least 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward-  
facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s  
instructions for minimum and maximum weight  
and height recommendations. NISSAN recom-  
mends that small children be placed in child  
restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standards. You should choose a child  
restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow  
the manufacturer’s instructions for installation  
and use.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CHILD RESTRAINTS  
– Infants and children should never be  
held on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-  
gest adult cannot resist the forces of  
a collision.  
– Do not put a seat belt around both a  
child and another passenger.  
– NISSAN recommends that all child  
restraints be installed in the rear  
seat. Studies show that children are  
safer when properly restrained in the  
rear seat than in the front seat. If you  
must install a forward-facing child  
restraint in the front seat, see  
“Forward-facing child restraint in-  
stallation using the seat belts” later  
in this section.  
ARS1098  
WRS0256  
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD  
RESTRAINTS  
WARNING  
● Failure to follow the warnings and in-  
structions for proper use and installa-  
tion of child restraints could result in  
serious injury or death of a child or  
other passengers in a sudden stop or  
collision:  
– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air  
Bag System, never install a rear-  
facing child restraint in the front  
seat. An inflating air bag could seri-  
ously injure or kill a child. A rear-  
facing child restraint must only be  
used in the rear seat.  
– The child restraint must be used and  
installed properly. Always follow all  
of the child restraint manufacturer’s  
instructions for installation and use.  
– Be sure to purchase a child restraint  
that will fit the child and vehicle.  
Some child restraints may not fit  
properly in your vehicle.  
1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child  
restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH  
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-  
tem. Some child restraints include rigid or  
webbing-mounted attachments that can be con-  
nected to these anchors. For details, see “LATCH  
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-  
tem” later in this section.  
●
If the child restraint is compatible with your  
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint  
and check the various adjustments to be  
sure the child restraint is compatible with  
your child. Choose a child restraint that is  
designed for your child’s height and weight.  
Always follow all recommended procedures.  
– Child restraint anchor points are de-  
signed to withstand loads from child  
restraints that are properly fitted.  
– Never use the anchor points for adult  
seat belts or harnesses.  
– A child restraint with a top tether  
strap should not be used in the front  
passenger seat.  
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or  
territories require that infants and small  
children be restrained in an approved child  
restraint at all times while the vehicle is  
being operated. Canadian law requires the  
top tether strap on forward-facing child  
restraints be secured to the designated an-  
chor point on the vehicle.  
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child  
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.  
– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-  
sible after fitting the child restraint.  
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for  
infants and children of various sizes. When se-  
lecting any child restraint, keep the following  
points in mind:  
– Infants and children should always  
be placed in an appropriate child re-  
straint while in the vehicle.  
● When the child restraint is not in use,  
keep it secured with the LATCH system  
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-  
sion, loose objects can injure occu-  
pants or damage the vehicle.  
●
Choose only a restraint with a label certifying  
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor  
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.  
●
Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be  
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat  
and seat belt system.  
CAUTION  
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can  
become very hot. Check the seating sur-  
face and buckles before placing a child in  
the child restraint.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LATCH lower anchor  
WARNING  
Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-  
tions for proper use and installation of  
child restraints could result in serious in-  
jury or death of a child or other passen-  
gers in a sudden stop or collision:  
– Attach LATCH system compatible  
child restraints only at the locations  
shown in the illustration.  
– Do not secure a child restraint in the  
center rear seating position using  
the LATCH lower anchors. The child  
restraint will not be secured properly.  
WRS0795  
WRS0700  
LATCH system lower anchor locations  
LATCH lower anchor location  
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers  
for CHildren) SYSTEM  
LATCH lower anchor location  
– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-  
ing your fingers into the lower anchor  
area. Feel to make sure there are no  
obstructions over the anchors such  
as seat belt webbing or seat cushion  
material. The child restraint will not  
be secured properly if the lower an-  
chors are obstructed.  
The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear  
of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is  
attached to the seatback to help you locate the  
LATCH lower anchors.  
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor  
points that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchors  
and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible  
child restraints. This system may also be referred  
to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.  
With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle  
seat belt to secure the child restraint.  
1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WRS0829  
LRS0661  
LRS0662  
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment  
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment  
(if so equipped)  
The child restraint top tether strap must be used  
when installing the child restraint with the LATCH  
lower anchor attachments or seat belts. See “Top  
tether anchor” for installation instructions.  
Installing child restraint LATCH lower  
anchor attachments  
LATCH compatible child restraints include two  
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can  
be connected to two anchors located at certain  
seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-  
tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to  
secure the child restraint. Check your child re-  
straint for a label stating that it is compatible with  
LATCH. This information may also be in the in-  
structions provided by the child restraint manu-  
facturer.  
When installing a child restraint, carefully read  
and follow the instructions in this manual and  
those supplied with the child restraint.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Top tether anchor  
WARNING  
Do not allow cargo to contact the top  
tether strap when it is attached to the top  
tether anchor. Properly secure the cargo  
so it does not contact the top tether strap.  
Cargo that is not properly secured or  
cargo that contacts the top tether strap  
may damage it during a collision. A child  
could be seriously injured or killed in a  
collision if the top tether strap is  
damaged.  
LRS0824  
WRS0797  
(if so equipped)  
Top tether anchor point locations  
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT  
INSTALLATION USING LATCH  
1
Anchor points  
shelf.  
are located on the rear parcel  
᭺
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child  
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-  
stalling a child restraint.  
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child  
restraint using the LATCH system:  
1
1. If the rear seat cushion has a flap , pull the  
᭺
2
flap down to allow access to the anchors  
.
᭺
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-  
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-  
er’s instructions.  
1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WRS0801  
WRS0802  
LRS0673  
Rear-facing web-mounted – step 3  
Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 3  
Rear-facing – step 4  
3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-  
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check  
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-  
erly attached to the lower anchors.  
4. For child restraints that are equipped with  
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any  
additional slack from the anchor attach-  
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly  
in the center of the child restraint with your  
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion  
and seatback while tightening the webbing  
of the anchor attachments.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Check to make sure the child restraint is  
properly secured prior to each use. If the  
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2  
through 5.  
LRS0674  
WRS0256  
Rear-facing – step 5  
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT  
5. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-  
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side  
to side while holding the child restraint near  
the LATCH attachment path. The child re-  
straint should not move more than 1 inch (25  
mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward  
and check to see if the LATCH attachment  
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is  
not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment  
as necessary, or put the restraint in another  
seat and test it again. You may need to try a  
different child restraint or try installing by  
using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable).  
Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve-  
hicles.  
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT  
BELTS  
1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WARNING  
The three-point seat belt with Automatic  
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used  
when installing a child restraint. Failure to  
use the ALR mode will result in the child  
restraint not being properly secured. The  
restraint could tip over or be loose and  
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or  
collision. Also, it can change the opera-  
tion of the front passenger air bag. See  
“Front passenger air bag and status light”  
later in this section.  
WRS0256  
WRS0761  
Rear-facing – step 1  
Rear-facing – step 2  
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child  
safety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-  
stalling a child restraint.  
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child  
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you  
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to  
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-  
structions for belt routing.  
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child  
restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear  
seats:  
1. Child restraints for infants must be  
used in the rear-facing direction and  
therefore must not be used in the front  
seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.  
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s  
instructions.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LRS0669  
LRS0670  
WRS0762  
Rear-facing – step 3  
Rear-facing – step 4  
Rear-facing – step 5  
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully  
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor  
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)  
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the  
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode  
when the seat belt is fully retracted.  
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the  
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.  
5. Remove any additional slack from the seat  
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in  
the center of the child restraint to compress  
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while  
pulling up on the seat belt.  
1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is  
properly secured prior to each use. If the  
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1  
through 6.  
After the child restraint is removed and the seat  
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint  
mode) is canceled.  
WRS0763  
LRS0824  
Rear-facing – step 6  
(if so equipped)  
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-  
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side  
to side while holding the child restraint near  
the seat belt path. The child restraint should  
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from  
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check  
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.  
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat  
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in  
another seat and test it again. You may need  
to try a different child restraint. Not all child  
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.  
FORWARD-FACING CHILD  
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING  
LATCH  
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child  
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-  
stalling a child restraint.  
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing  
child restraint using the LATCH system:  
1
1. If the rear seat cushion has a flap , pull the  
᭺
2
flap down to allow access to the anchors  
.
᭺
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-  
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-  
er’s instructions.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. The back of the child restraint should be  
secured against the vehicle seatback.  
If the seating position does not have an  
adjustable headrest and it is interfering with  
the proper child restraint fit, try another seat-  
ing position or a different child restraint.  
WRS0799  
WRS0800  
Forward-facing web-mounted – step 3  
Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 3  
3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-  
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check  
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-  
erly attached to the lower anchors.  
If the child restraint is equipped with a top  
tether strap, route the top tether strap and  
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor  
point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this  
section. Do not install child restraints that  
require the use of a top tether strap in seat-  
ing positions that do not have a top tether  
anchor.  
1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Check to make sure the child restraint is  
properly secured prior to each use. If the  
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2  
through 7.  
FORWARD-FACING CHILD  
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING  
THE SEAT BELTS  
WARNING  
The three-point seat belt with Automatic  
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used  
when installing a child restraint. Failure to  
use the ALR mode will result in the child  
restraint not being properly secured. The  
restraint could tip over or be loose and  
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or  
collision. Also, it can change the opera-  
tion of the front passenger air bag. See  
“Front passenger air bag and status light”  
later in this section.  
LRS0671  
WRS0697  
Forward-facing – step 5  
Forward-facing – step 7  
5. For child restraints that are equipped with  
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any  
additional slack from the anchor attach-  
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly  
in the center of the child restraint with your  
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion  
and seatback while tightening the webbing  
of the anchor attachments.  
7. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-  
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side  
to side while holding the child restraint near  
the LATCH attachment path. The child re-  
straint should not move more than 1 inch (25  
mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward  
and check to see if the LATCH attachment  
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is  
not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment  
as necessary, or put the restraint in another  
seat and test it again. You may need to try a  
different child restraint. Not all child re-  
straints fit in all types of vehicles.  
6. Tighten the tether strap according to the  
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any  
slack.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-  
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-  
er’s instructions.  
The back of the child restraint should be  
secured against the vehicle seatback.  
If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-  
straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit.  
If the head restraint is removed, store it in a  
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the  
head restraint when the child restraint  
is removed. See “Head restraints” in this  
section for head restraint adjustment, re-  
moval and installation information.  
WRS0699  
WRS0680  
If the seating position does not have an  
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering  
with the proper child restraint fit, try another  
seating position or a different child restraint.  
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –  
step 1  
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child  
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-  
stalling a child restraint.  
Forward-facing – step 3  
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child  
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you  
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to  
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-  
structions for belt routing.  
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing  
child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the  
rear seats or in the front passenger seat:  
If the child restraint is equipped with a top  
tether strap, route the top tether strap and  
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor  
point (rear seat installation only). See “In-  
stalling top tether strap” in this section. Do  
not install child restraints that require the use  
of a top tether strap in seating positions that  
do not have a top tether anchor.  
1. If you must install a child restraint in  
the front seat, it should be placed in a  
forward-facing direction only. Move  
the seat to the rearmost position. Child  
restraints for infants must be used in  
the rear-facing direction and therefore  
must not be used in the front seat.  
1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LRS0667  
LRS0668  
WRS0681  
Forward-facing – step 4  
Forward-facing – step 5  
Forward-facing – step 6  
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully  
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor  
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)  
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to  
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode  
when the seat belt is fully retracted.  
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the  
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.  
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat  
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in  
the center of the child restraint with your  
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion  
and seatback while pulling up on the seat  
belt.  
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the  
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any  
slack.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Check to make sure the child restraint is  
properly secured prior to each use. If the  
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2  
through 8.  
WRS0698  
WRS0475  
Forward-facing – step 8  
Forward-facing – step 10  
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-  
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side  
to side while holding the child restraint near  
the seat belt path. The child restraint should  
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from  
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check  
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.  
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat  
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in  
another seat and test it again. You may need  
to try a different child restraint. Not all child  
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.  
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front  
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in  
the ON position. The front passenger air bag  
status light  
should illuminate. If this  
light is not illuminated see ЉFront passenger  
air bag and status lightЉ in this section.  
Move the child restraint to another  
seating position. Have the system  
checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
After the child restraint is removed and the seat  
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-  
straint mode) is canceled.  
1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Refer to the appropriate child restraint in-  
stallation procedure steps in this section  
before tightening the tether strap.  
If you have any questions when installing a  
top tether strap, consult your NISSAN  
dealer for details.  
BOOSTER SEATS  
Precautions on booster seats  
WARNING  
If a booster seat and seat belt are not used  
properly, the risk of a child being injured  
in a sudden stop or collision greatly  
increases:  
LRS0798  
LRS0455  
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by  
several manufacturers. When selecting any  
booster seat, keep the following points in mind:  
INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP  
– Make sure the shoulder portion of  
the belt is away from the child’s face  
and neck and the lap portion of the  
belt does not cross the stomach.  
First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH  
lower anchors (rear outboard seat positions only)  
or the seat belt, as applicable.  
●
Choose only a booster seat with a label  
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor  
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian  
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.  
1
1. Flip up the anchor cover  
from the anchor  
point which is located directly behind the  
child seat.  
᭺
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not  
behind the child or under the child’s  
arm.  
●
Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be  
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat  
and seat belt system.  
2. Position the top tether strap over the top of  
– A booster seat must only be installed  
in a seating position that has a  
lap/shoulder belt.  
2
the seatback  
.
᭺
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor  
3
point on the rear parcel shelf  
.
᭺
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Booster seat installation  
CAUTION  
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the  
Automatic Locking Retractor mode when  
using a booster seat with the seat belts.  
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child  
Safety”, “Child Restraint” and “Booster Seats”  
sections before installing a child restraint.  
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the  
rear seat or in the front passenger seat:  
LRS0453  
LRS0464  
●
Make sure the child’s head will be properly  
supported by the booster seat or vehicle  
seat. The seatback must be at or above the  
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a  
1
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or  
territories require that infants and small  
children be restrained in an approved child  
restraint at all times while the vehicle is  
being operated.  
low back booster seat  
is chosen, the  
᭺
vehicle seatback must be at or above the  
center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is  
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a  
2
The instructions in this section apply to booster  
seat installation in the rear seats or the front  
passenger seat.  
high back booster seat  
should be used.  
᭺
●
If the booster seat is compatible with your  
vehicle, place the child in the booster seat  
and check the various adjustments to be  
sure the booster seat is compatible with the  
child. Always follow all recommended pro-  
cedures.  
1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the seating position does not have an  
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering  
with the proper booster seat fit, try another  
seating position or a different booster seat.  
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low  
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to  
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-  
structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.  
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt  
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.  
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned  
across the top, middle portion of the child’s  
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat  
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the  
seat belt routing.  
LRS0454  
WRS0699  
Front passenger position  
1. If you must install a booster seat in the  
front seat, move the seat to the rear-  
most position.  
3. The booster seat should be positioned on  
the vehicle seat so that it is stable.  
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-  
tions for properly fastening a seat belt  
shown in “Three-point type seat belt with  
retractor” earlier in this section.  
If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-  
straint to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If  
the head restraint is removed, store it in a  
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the  
head restraint when the booster seat is  
removed. See “Head restraints”in this sec-  
tion for head restraint adjustment, removal  
and installation information.  
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only  
place it in a front-facing direction. Always  
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-  
structions.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT  
SYSTEM  
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-  
mental air bag system: This system can help  
cushion the impact force to the head of occu-  
pants in front and rear outboard seating positions  
in certain side-impact collisions. The curtain air  
bags are designed to inflate on the side where  
the vehicle is impacted.  
PRECAUTIONS ON  
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT  
SYSTEM  
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-  
tion contains important information concerning  
the following systems:  
These supplemental restraint systems are de-  
signed to supplement the crash protection pro-  
vided by the driver and front passenger seat belts  
and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts  
should always be correctly worn and the occu-  
pant seated a suitable distance away from the  
steering wheel, instrument panel and door finish-  
ers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this section for  
instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)  
●
Driver and passenger supplemental front-  
impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag  
System)  
●
●
●
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-  
mental air bag  
WRS0475  
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-  
mental air bag  
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front  
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in  
the ON position. The front passenger air bag  
Seat belt with pretensioner  
The supplemental air bags operate only  
when the ignition switch is placed in the  
ON position.  
Supplemental front-impact air bag system:  
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help  
cushion the impact force to the head and chest of  
the driver and front passenger in certain frontal  
collisions.  
status light  
may or may not illuminate,  
depending on the size of the child and the  
type of booster seat being used. See “Front  
passenger air bag and status light” later in  
this section.  
After placing the ignition switch in the ON  
position, the supplemental air bag warning  
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag  
warning light will turn off after about 7  
seconds if the system is operational.  
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-  
mental air bag system: This system can help  
cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvic  
area of the driver and front passenger in certain  
side-impact collisions. The side air bags are de-  
signed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is  
impacted.  
1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● The driver and front passenger seat belt  
buckles are equipped with sensors that  
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The  
Advanced Air Bag System monitors the  
severity of a collision and seat belt us-  
age then inflates the air bags. Failure to  
properly wear seat belts can increase  
the risk or severity of injury in an  
accident.  
● The front passenger seat is equipped  
with an occupant classification sensor  
(pattern sensor) that turns the front  
passenger air bag OFF under some  
conditions. This sensor is only used in  
this seat. Failure to be properly seated  
and wearing the seat belt can increase  
the risk or severity of injury in an acci-  
dent. See “Front passenger air bag and  
status light” later in this section.  
WRS0031  
● The seat belts and the front air bags are  
most effective when you are sitting well  
back and upright in the seat. The front  
air bags inflate with great force. Even  
with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-  
tem, if you are unrestrained, leaning  
forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-  
tion in any way, you are at greater risk of  
injury or death in a crash. You may also  
receive serious or fatal injuries from the  
front air bag if you are up against it  
when it inflates. Always sit back against  
the seatback and as far away as practi-  
cal from the steering wheel or instru-  
ment panel. Always use the seat belts.  
WARNING  
● The front air bags ordinarily will not  
inflate in the event of a side impact, rear  
impact, rollover, or lower severity fron-  
tal collision. Always wear your seat  
belts to help reduce the risk or severity  
of injury in various kinds of accidents.  
● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-  
ing wheel. Placing them inside the  
steering wheel rim could increase the  
risk that they are injured when the front  
air bag inflates.  
● The front passenger air bag will not  
inflate if the passenger air bag status  
light is lit or if the front passenger seat  
is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air  
bag and status light” later in this  
section.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ARS1133  
ARS1041  
WARNING  
● Never let children ride unrestrained or  
extend their hands or face out of the  
window. Do not attempt to hold them in  
your lap or arms. Some examples of  
dangerous riding positions are shown  
in the illustrations.  
1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ARS1042  
ARS1043  
ARS1044  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ARS1045  
ARS1046  
SSS0101  
WARNING  
WARNING  
● Children may be severely injured or  
killed when the front air bags, side air  
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they  
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens  
and children should be properly re-  
strained in the rear seat, if possible.  
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-  
mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain  
side-impact supplemental air bags:  
● The side air bags and curtain air bags  
ordinarily will not inflate in the event of  
a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or  
lower severity side collision. Always  
wear your seat belts to help reduce the  
risk or severity of injury in various kinds  
of accidents.  
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air  
Bag System, never install a rear-facing  
child restraint in the front seat. An in-  
flating front air bag could seriously in-  
jure or kill your child. See “Child re-  
straints” earlier in this section for  
details.  
1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING  
● The seat belts, the side air bags and  
curtain air bags are most effective when  
you are sitting well back and upright in  
the seat with both feet on the floor. The  
side air bag and curtain air bag inflate  
with great force. Do not allow anyone to  
place their hand, leg or face near the  
side air bag on the side of the seatback  
of the front seat or near the side roof  
rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the  
front seats or rear outboard seats to  
extend their hand out of the window or  
lean against the door. Some examples  
of dangerous riding positions are  
shown in the previous illustrations.  
WRS0032  
SSS0159  
WARNING  
● When sitting in the rear seat, do not  
hold onto the seatback of the front seat.  
If the side air bag inflates, you may be  
seriously injured. Be especially careful  
with children, who should always be  
properly restrained. Some examples of  
dangerous riding positions are shown  
in the illustrations.  
● Do not use seat covers on the front  
seatbacks. They may interfere with side  
air bag inflation.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SSS0162  
WRS0908  
Coupe  
1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact  
supplemental air bag inflators  
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact  
supplemental air bags  
3. Front seat-mounted side-impact  
supplemental air bag modules  
4. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)  
5. Supplemental front-impact air bag  
modules  
6. Crash zone sensor  
7. Seat belt buckle switches on driver’s  
and passenger’s side  
8. Occupant classification sensor  
(pattern sensor)  
9. Occupant classification system control  
unit  
10. Seat belt with pretensioner  
11. Side satellite sensor  
WRS0909  
Sedan  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
the front passenger, the occupant classification  
sensor is also monitored. Based on information  
from the sensors, only one front air bag may  
inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity  
and whether the front occupants are belted or  
unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air  
bag may be automatically turned OFF under  
some conditions, depending on the information  
provided by the occupant classification sensor. If  
the front passenger air bag is OFF, the passenger  
air bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat is  
unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but  
the air bag will be off). See “Front passenger air  
bag and status light” later in this section for  
further details. One front air bag inflating does not  
indicate improper performance of the system.  
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,  
help to cushion the impact force on the face and  
chest of the front occupants. They can help save  
lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an  
inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions  
or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide  
restraint to the lower body.  
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System  
(front seats)  
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-  
vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front  
passenger seats. This system is designed to  
meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-  
lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,  
all of the information, cautions and warn-  
ings in this manual still apply and must be  
followed.  
Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts  
should be correctly worn and the driver and pas-  
senger seated upright as far as practical away  
from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The  
front air bags inflate quickly in order to help  
protect the front occupants. Because of this, the  
force of the front air bag inflating can increase the  
risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is  
against, the front air bag module during inflation.  
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is  
located in the center of the steering wheel. The  
passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is  
mounted in the dashboard above the glove box.  
The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher  
severity frontal collisions, although they may in-  
flate if the forces in another type of collision are  
similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.  
They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.  
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an  
indication of proper front air bag system opera-  
tion.  
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.  
If you have any questions about your air bag  
system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN  
dealer. If you are considering modification of your  
vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact  
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the  
front of this Owner’s Manual.  
The front air bags operate only when the  
ignition switch is in the ON position.  
After placing the ignition switch in the ON  
position, the supplemental air bag warning  
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag  
warning light will turn off after about 7  
seconds if the system is operational.  
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise  
may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.  
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a  
fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may  
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history  
of a breathing condition should get fresh air  
promptly.  
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual  
stage air bag inflators. It also monitors informa-  
tion from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag  
Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors and  
the occupant classification sensor (pattern sen-  
sor). Inflator operation is based on the severity of  
a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For  
1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status light  
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce  
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag  
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such  
as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-  
matically turned OFF.  
The front passenger air bag status light  
located on the instrument panel above the radio  
controls. The light operates as follows:  
is  
●
●
Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The  
OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF  
and will not inflate in a crash.  
is  
The occupant classification sensor (pattern sen-  
sor) is in the front passenger seat cushion and is  
designed to detect an occupant and objects on  
the seat. For example, if a child is in the front  
passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag System is  
designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in  
accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child  
restraint of the type specified in the regulations is  
on the seat, the occupant classification sensor  
can detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF.  
Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,  
child or child restraint as outlined in this  
section: The  
illuminates to indicate  
that the front passenger air bag is OFF and  
will not inflate in a crash.  
WRS0475  
●
Occupied passenger seat and the passen-  
ger meets the conditions outlined in this  
Front passenger air bag and status light  
section: The light  
that the front passenger air bag is opera-  
tional.  
is OFF to indicate  
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are  
properly seated and using the seat belt as out-  
lined in this manual should not cause the passen-  
ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For  
small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the  
occupant does not sit in the seat properly (for  
example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an  
edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of  
position), this could cause the sensor to turn the  
air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and  
wearing the seat belt properly for the most effec-  
tive protection by the seat belt and supplemental  
air bag.  
WARNING  
The front passenger air bag is designed to  
automatically turn OFF under some con-  
ditions. Read this section carefully to  
learn how it operates. Proper use of the  
seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-  
essary for most effective protection. Fail-  
ure to follow all instructions in this  
manual concerning the use of seats, seat  
belts and child restraints can increase the  
risk or severity of injury in an accident.  
Front passenger air bag  
The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-  
matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated  
under some conditions as described below in  
accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front  
passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a  
crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your  
vehicle are not part of this system.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-  
dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.  
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child  
restraints and booster seats be properly installed  
in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant  
classification sensor is designed to operate as  
described above to turn the front passenger air  
bag OFF for specified child restraints as required  
by the regulations. Failing to properly secure  
child restraints and to use the ALR mode (child  
restraint mode) may allow the restraint to tip or  
move in an accident or sudden stop. This can  
also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a  
crash instead of being OFF. See “Child re-  
straints” earlier in this section for proper use and  
installation.  
The light will not illuminate when the front pas-  
senger seat is unoccupied.  
The air bag system and passenger air bag status  
light will take a few seconds to register a change  
in the passenger seat status. However, if the seat  
becomes unoccupied, the air bag status light will  
remain off.  
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-  
ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating  
that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the  
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat  
properly.  
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air  
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning  
, located in the meter and gauges area  
light  
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,  
the passenger air bag status light may or may not  
be illuminated, depending on the size of the child  
and the type of child restraint being used. If the air  
bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that  
the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be  
that the child restraint or seat belt is not being  
used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is  
installed properly, the seat belt is used properly  
and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air  
bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the  
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.  
in the center of the instrument panel, will blink.  
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
Other supplemental front-impact air bag  
precautions  
WARNING  
● Do not place any objects on the steer-  
ing wheel pad or on the instrument  
panel. Also, do not place any objects  
between any occupant and the steering  
wheel or instrument panel. Such ob-  
jects may become dangerous projec-  
tiles and cause injury if the front air  
bags inflate.  
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the  
passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a  
crash. However, heavy objects placed on the  
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of  
the object being detected by the occupant clas-  
sification sensor. Other conditions could also  
result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is  
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the  
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.  
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants  
are seated and restrained properly.  
If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-  
minate even though you believe that the child  
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are  
properly positioned, the system may be sensing  
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is  
OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the  
system is OFF by using a special tool. However,  
until you have confirmed with your dealer that  
your air bag is working properly, reposition the  
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.  
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can  
monitor when the front passenger air bag is au-  
tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.  
1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
● Do not place objects with sharp edges  
on the seat. Also, do not place heavy  
objects on the seat that will leave per-  
manent impressions in the seat. Such  
objects can damage the seat or occu-  
pant classification sensor (pattern sen-  
sor). This can affect the operation of the  
air bag system and result in serious  
personal injury.  
● Tampering with the front air bag system  
may result in serious personal injury.  
Tampering includes changes to the  
steering wheel and the instrument  
panel assembly by placing material  
over the steering wheel pad and above  
the instrument panel or by installing  
additional trim material around the air  
bag system.  
● Work on and around the front air bag  
system should be done by a NISSAN  
dealer. Installation of electrical equip-  
ment should also be done by a NISSAN  
dealer. The Supplemental Restraint  
System (SRS) wiring should not be  
modified or disconnected. Unautho-  
rized electrical test equipment and  
probing devices should not be used on  
the air bag system.  
● Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot  
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can  
damage the seat or occupant classifica-  
tion sensor. This can also affect the  
operation of the air bag system and  
result in serious personal injury.  
● Modifying or tampering with the front  
passenger seat may result in serious  
personal injury. For example, do not  
change the front seats by placing mate-  
rial on the seat cushion or by installing  
additional trim material, such as seat  
covers, on the seat that are not specifi-  
cally designed to assure proper air bag  
operation. Additionally, do not stow any  
objects under the front passenger seat  
or the seat cushion and seatback. Such  
objects may interfere with the proper  
operation of the occupant classifica-  
tion sensor.  
● A cracked windshield should be re-  
placed immediately by a qualified re-  
pair facility. A cracked windshield could  
affect the function of the supplemental  
air bag system.  
● Immediately after inflation, several  
front air bag system components will be  
hot. Do not touch them; you may se-  
verely burn yourself.  
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are  
yellow and orange for easy identification.  
When selling your vehicle, we request that you  
inform the buyer about the front air bag system  
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections  
in this Owner’s Manual.  
● No unauthorized changes should be  
made to any components or wiring of  
the supplemental air bag system. This is  
to prevent accidental inflation of the  
supplemental air bag or damage to the  
supplemental air bag system.  
● No unauthorized changes should be  
made to any components or wiring of  
the seat belt system. This may affect the  
front air bag system. Tampering with  
the seat belt system may result in seri-  
ous personal injury.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
inflate if the forces in another type of collision are  
similar to those of a higher severity side impact.  
They are designed to inflate on the side where the  
vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in cer-  
tain side collisions.  
practical from the door finishers and side roof  
rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate  
quickly in order to help protect the front occu-  
pants. Because of this, the force of the side air  
bag and curtain air bag inflating can increase the  
risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is  
against, these air bag modules during inflation.  
The side air bags and curtain air bag will deflate  
quickly after the collision is over.  
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an  
indication of proper side air bag and curtain air  
bag operation.  
When the side air bags and curtain air bags  
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed  
by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful  
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken  
not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and  
choking. Those with a history of a breathing con-  
dition should get fresh air promptly.  
The side air bags and curtain air bags op-  
erate only when the ignition switch is  
placed in the ON position.  
After placing the ignition switch in the ON  
position, the supplemental air bag warning  
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag  
warning light will turn off after about 7  
seconds if the system is operational.  
WRS0816  
Front seat-mounted side-impact  
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,  
help to cushion the impact force on the chest and  
pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain air  
bags help to cushion the impact force to the head  
of occupants in the front and rear outboard seat-  
ing positions. They can help save lives and re-  
duce serious injuries. However, an inflating side  
air bag and curtain air bag may cause abrasions  
or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air  
bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.  
supplemental air bag and roof-  
mounted curtain side-impact  
supplemental air bag systems  
WARNING  
The side air bags are located in the outside of the  
seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags  
are located in the side roof rails. These systems  
are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help  
reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occu-  
pants. However, all of the information, cau-  
tions and warnings in this manual still ap-  
ply and must be followed. The side air bags  
and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in  
higher severity side collisions, although they may  
● Do not place any objects near the seat-  
back of the front seats. Also, do not  
place any objects (an umbrella, bag,  
etc.) between the front door finisher  
and the front seat. Such objects may  
become dangerous projectiles and  
cause injury if a side air bag inflates.  
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the  
driver and passenger seated upright as far as  
practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat  
passengers should be seated as far away as  
1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
● Right after inflation, several side air bag  
and curtain air bag system components  
will be hot. Do not touch them; you may  
severely burn yourself.  
● Work around and on the side air bag  
and curtain air bag system should be  
done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation  
of electrical equipment should also be  
done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wir-  
ing harnesses* should not be modified  
or disconnected. Unauthorized electri-  
cal test equipment and probing devices  
should not be used on the side air bag  
or curtain air bag system.  
● If the vehicle becomes involved in a  
frontal collision but a pretensioner is  
not activated, be sure to have the pre-  
tensioner system checked and, if nec-  
essary, replaced by your NISSAN  
dealer.  
● No unauthorized changes should be  
made to any components or wiring of  
the side air bag and curtain air bag  
systems. This is to prevent damage to or  
accidental inflation of the side air bag  
and curtain air bag or damage to the  
side air bag and curtain air bag systems.  
● No unauthorized changes should be  
made to any components or wiring of  
the pretensioner system. This is to pre-  
vent damage to or accidental activation  
of the pretensioners. Tampering with  
the pretensioner system may result in  
serious personal injury.  
* The SRS wiring harness connectors are  
yellow and orange for easy identification.  
● Do not make unauthorized changes to  
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-  
pension system or side panel. This  
could affect proper operation of the  
side air bag and curtain air bag systems.  
When selling your vehicle, we request that you  
inform the buyer about the side air bag and  
curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to  
the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.  
● Work around and on the pretensioner  
system should be done by a NISSAN  
dealer. Installation of electrical equip-  
ment should also be done by a NISSAN  
dealer. Unauthorized electrical test  
equipment and probing devices should  
not be used on the pretensioner system.  
● Tampering with the side air bag system  
may result in serious personal injury.  
For example, do not change the front  
seats by placing material near the seat-  
backs or by installing additional trim  
material, such as seat covers, around  
the side air bag.  
Seat belts with pretensioners (Front  
seats)  
● If you need to dispose of a pretensioner  
or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN  
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures  
could cause personal injury.  
WARNING  
● The pretensioners cannot be reused af-  
ter activation. They must be replaced  
together with the retractor and buckle  
as a unit.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The pretensioner system activates in conjunction  
with the front air bag system. Working with the  
seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt  
when the vehicle becomes involved in certain  
types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat  
occupants.  
When selling your vehicle, we request that you  
inform the buyer about the pretensioner system  
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections  
in this Owner’s Manual.  
The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt  
retractor. These seat belts are used the same way  
as conventional seat belts.  
When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-  
leased and a loud noise may be heard. This  
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.  
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may  
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history  
of a breathing condition should get fresh air  
promptly.  
WRS0895  
1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (located  
on the sun visors)  
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG  
WARNING LABELS  
After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow  
the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to  
reduce forces against the chest.  
Warning labels about the supplemental front-  
impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as  
shown in the illustration.  
If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner sys-  
tem, the supplemental air bag warning  
light  
will not come on, will flash intermit-  
tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on  
after the ignition switch has been placed in the  
ON or START position. In this case, the preten-  
sioner system may not function properly. It must  
be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the  
nearest NISSAN dealer.  
1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When the ignition is placed in the ON position,  
the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates  
for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This  
means the system is operational.  
Repair and replacement procedure  
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags  
and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a  
one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is  
damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light  
remains illuminated after inflation has occurred.  
Repair and replacement of these supplemental  
air bag systems should be done only by a  
NISSAN dealer.  
If any of the following conditions occur, the front  
air bag, side air bag and curtain air bag and  
pretensioner systems need servicing:  
●
●
●
The supplemental air bag warning light re-  
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.  
When maintenance work is required on the ve-  
hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air  
bags, pretensioners and related parts should be  
pointed out to the person performing the mainte-  
nance. The ignition should always be in the LOCK  
position when working under the hood or inside  
the vehicle.  
The supplemental air bag warning light  
flashes intermittently.  
The supplemental air bag warning light does  
not come on at all.  
LRS0100  
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG  
WARNING LIGHT  
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air  
bag and curtain air bag or pretensioner systems  
may not operate properly. They must be checked  
and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest  
NISSAN dealer.  
The supplemental air bag warning light,  
displaying in the instrument panel, moni-  
WARNING  
● Once a front air bag, side air bag, or  
curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag  
module will not function again and  
must be replaced. Additionally, if any of  
the front air bags inflate, the activated  
pretensioners must also be replaced.  
The air bag module and pretensioners  
should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.  
The air bag module and pretensioners  
cannot be repaired.  
tors the circuits of the supplemental front-impact  
air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supple-  
mental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact  
supplemental air bag and seat belt pretensioner  
systems. The monitored circuits include the Air  
bag Control Unit (ACU), crash zone sensor, sat-  
ellite sensors, occupant classification system,  
front air bag modules, side air bag modules,  
curtain air bag modules, pretensioners and all  
related wiring.  
WARNING  
If the supplemental air bag warning light  
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,  
side air bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-  
sioner systems will not operate in an ac-  
cident. To help avoid injury to yourself or  
others, have your vehicle checked by a  
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● The front air bag, side air bag, curtain  
air bag systems and the pretensioner  
system should be inspected by  
a
NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to  
the front end or side portion of the  
vehicle.  
● If you need to dispose of a supplemen-  
tal air bag or pretensioners or scrap the  
vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Incor-  
rect disposal procedures could cause  
personal injury.  
1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Instruments and controls  
Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3  
Speedometer and Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4  
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7  
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . .2-10  
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10  
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11  
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14  
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16  
Vehicle information display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17  
How to use the Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . .2-17  
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24  
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24  
Xenon headlights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28  
Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29  
Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . .2-31  
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32  
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32  
Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32  
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33  
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33  
Heated seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34  
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch . . . . . . . . .2-34  
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35  
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36  
Map pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36  
Seatback pockets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36  
Storage pouch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36  
Sunglasses holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37  
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38  
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39  
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39  
Storage box (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40  
Covered storage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40  
Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41  
Cargo net (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41  
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25  
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26  
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26  
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)  
defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27  
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42  
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42  
Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44  
Automatic moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44  
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46  
Console light (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47  
Personal Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48  
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48  
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48  
HomeLinkா universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . .2-49  
Programming HomeLinkா. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49  
Programming HomeLinkா for Canadian  
customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50  
Operating the HomeLinkா universal  
transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51  
Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51  
Clearing the programmed information. . . . . . . . . . . .2-51  
Rolling code programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51  
Reprogramming a single HomeLinkா button . . . . . .2-52  
If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
5.  
6.  
7.  
Driver supplemental air bag/horn  
(P. 1-42, P. 2-33)  
Cruise control main/set switch  
(P. 5-20)  
Windshield wiper and washer switch  
(P. 2-26)  
8.  
9.  
Ignition switch (P. 5-7)  
Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-33)  
10. Front passenger air bag status light  
(P. 1-51)  
11. Front passenger supplemental air bag  
(P. 1-42)  
12. Glove box (P. 2-39)  
13. Navigation system* (if so equipped)  
(P. 4-2)  
14. Covered storage box (P. 2-40)  
15. Heater and air conditioner (automatic)  
(P. 4-26)  
16. Heater and air conditioner (manual)  
(P. 4-19)  
17. Shift selector (P. 5-11)  
18. Audio system controls (if so equipped)/  
Storage (if so equipped)  
(P. 4-28, P.2-40)  
WIC1598  
1.  
2.  
Vents (P. 4-18)  
Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn  
signal switch (P. 2-28)  
3.  
4.  
Steering wheel switch for audio control  
(if so equipped)/Bluetoothா Hands-free  
Phone System (if so equipped)  
(P. 4-95, P. 4-91, P. 4-105)  
19. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls  
(P. 3-27)  
Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)  
2-2 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
METERS AND GAUGES  
20. Vehicle information display controls  
(P. 2-17)  
21. Hood release (P. 3-23)  
22. Trunk opener (P. 3-23)  
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF  
switch (P. 2-34)  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ port (P. 5-7)  
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-  
er’s Manual (if so equipped).  
See the page number indicated in paren-  
theses for operating details.  
WIC1259  
1. Tachometer  
2. Speedometer  
7. Vehicle information display  
8. Instrument brightness control  
3. Fuel gauge  
4. Engine coolant temperature gauge  
5. Odometer/twin trip odometer  
6. Twin trip odometer change button  
Instruments and controls 2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Odometer/Twin trip odometer  
The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed  
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position.  
The odometer records the total distance the ve-  
hicle has been driven.  
The twin trip odometer records the distance of  
individual trips.  
WIC1418  
WIC1261  
Changing the display:  
1. Speedometer  
2. Change button  
3. Odometer/twin trip odometer  
Pushing the change button changes the display  
as follows:  
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER  
Trip  
→ Trip  
→ Trip  
Speedometer  
Resetting the trip odometer:  
1
The speedometer  
indicates vehicle speed in  
᭺
Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec-  
ond resets the currently displayed trip odometer  
to zero.  
miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour  
(km/h).  
2-4 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION  
If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-  
ture near the hot (H) end of the normal  
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease  
temperature. If the gauge is over the nor-  
mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as  
safely possible. If the engine is over-  
heated, continued operation of the ve-  
hicle may seriously damage the engine.  
See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In  
case of emergency”section for immediate  
action required.  
LIC1058  
LIC1059  
TACHOMETER  
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE  
GAUGE  
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-  
lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into  
The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-  
ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the  
1
the red zone  
.
᭺
1
normal range  
when the gauge needle points  
᭺
CAUTION  
within the zone shown in the illustration.  
When engine speed approaches the red  
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-  
gine speed. Operating the engine in the  
red zone may cause serious engine  
damage.  
The engine coolant temperature varies with the  
outside air temperature and driving conditions.  
Instruments and controls 2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)  
This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in-  
dicates the direction of the vehicle’s heading.  
The  
indicates that the fuel-filler door is  
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.  
With the ignition switch placed in the ON posi-  
CAUTION  
tion, press the  
button as described in the  
chart below to activate various features of the  
automatic anti-glare rearview mirror.  
● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,  
the  
(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as  
possible. After few driving trips,  
the light should turn off. If the  
Malfunction Indicator Light  
Push and hold  
Feature:  
the  
a
(Push button again for about 1 sec-  
ond to change settings)  
button for about:  
light remains on after a few driving  
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a  
NISSAN dealer.  
1 second  
5 seconds  
9 seconds  
Compass display toggles on/off  
Compass zone can be changed to  
correct false compass readings  
LIC1060  
Compass enters calibration mode  
● For additional information, see “Mal-  
function Indicator Light (MIL)” later in  
this section.  
FUEL GAUGE  
For information about the automatic anti-glare  
feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview  
mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-  
ments” section.  
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level  
in the tank.  
The gauge may move slightly during braking,  
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.  
The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the  
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.  
The low fuel warning light comes on when the  
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.  
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-  
ters E (Empty).  
2-6 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
You can also calibrate the compass by driving  
your vehicle on your everyday route. The com-  
pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three  
complete circles.  
Once the desired zone number is displayed, stop  
pressing the button and the display will  
show compass direction within a few seconds.  
NOTE:  
COMPASS DISPLAY  
Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.  
Push the  
button when the ignition switch is  
placed in the ON position. The direction will be  
displayed.  
Zone variation change procedure  
The difference between magnetic north and geo-  
graphical north is known as variance. In some  
areas, this difference can sometimes be great  
enough to cause false compass readings. Follow  
these instructions to set the variance for your  
particular location if this happens:  
LIC1487  
Push the  
button for about 1 second when  
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position to  
on or off. The  
display will indicate the direction of the vehicle’s  
heading.  
1
toggle the compass display  
᭺
1. Establish your location on the zone map.  
Refer to the illustration. Record your zone  
number.  
N: North  
E: East  
S: South  
W: West  
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.  
3. Push the  
button in for 5 seconds until  
the current zone entry number is displayed.  
If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by  
driving the vehicle in three complete circles at  
less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).  
4. Press the  
button repeatedly until the  
desired zone entry number is displayed.  
Instruments and controls 2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
If a magnet is located near the com-  
pass or the vehicle is driven where the  
terrestrial magnetism is disturbed, the  
compass display may not indicate the  
correct direction.  
In places where the terrestrial magne-  
tism is disturbed, the correction of the  
direction starts automatically.  
Inaccurate compass direction:  
The compass display is equipped with automatic  
correction function. If the correct direction is not  
shown, follow this procedure.  
1. With the display turned on, press and hold  
the  
switch for about 9 seconds. The  
display will read “C.”  
2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle  
in three complete circles at a maximum  
speed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).  
3. After completing the circles the display  
should return to normal.  
●
If the compass deviates from the correct  
indication soon after repeated adjustment,  
have the compass checked at an authorized  
NISSAN dealer.  
WIC0355  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-8 Instruments and controls  
●
The compass may not indicate the correct  
compass point in tunnels or while driving up  
or down a steep hill. (The compass returns  
to the correct compass point when the ve-  
hicle moves to an area where the geomag-  
netism is stabilized.)  
CAUTION  
● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,  
which are attached to the vehicle by  
means of a magnet. They affect the op-  
eration of the compass.  
● When cleaning the mirror, use a paper  
towel or similar material dampened  
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass  
cleaner directly on the mirror as it may  
cause the liquid cleaner to enter the  
mirror housing.  
Instruments and controls 2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND  
AUDIBLE REMINDERS  
Seat belt warning light and chime  
Supplemental air bag warning light  
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)  
or  
or  
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)  
warning light  
Security indicator light  
Slip indicator light  
Brake warning light  
Charge warning light  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) po-  
sition indicator light (if so equipped)  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)  
check warning light (if so equipped)  
Cruise main switch indicator light  
Cruise set switch indicator light  
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights  
Engine oil pressure warning light  
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator  
light  
Low tire pressure warning light  
Master warning light  
Front passenger air bag status light  
High beam indicator light (blue)  
The following lights come on briefly and then go  
off:  
If any light fails to come on, it may indicate  
a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the  
electrical system. Have the system repaired  
promptly.  
CHECKING BULBS  
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake  
and place the ignition switch in the ON position  
without starting the engine. The following lights  
will come on:  
or  
,
,
,
,
,
or  
,
,
,
,
2-10 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Low brake fluid warning light  
WARNING LIGHTS  
or Anti-lock Braking  
● If the brake fluid level is below the  
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake  
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the  
brake system has been checked at a  
NISSAN dealer.  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.  
If the light comes on while the engine is running  
with the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-  
hicle and perform the following:  
System (ABS)  
warning light  
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning  
indicator  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)  
warning light illuminates and then turns off. This  
indicates the ABS is operational.  
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid  
as necessary. See “Brake fluid”in the “Main-  
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this  
manual.  
When the parking brake is released and the  
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake  
warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System  
(ABS) waning light illuminate, it may indicate the  
ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake  
system checked, and if necessary, repaired by a  
NISSAN dealer promptly. Avoid high-speed driv-  
ing and abrupt braking. (See “Anti-lock Braking  
System (ABS) warning light” in this section.)  
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the  
engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate  
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the  
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the  
warning system checked by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-  
tion is turned off. The brake system then operates  
normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See  
ЉBrake systemЉ in the ЉStarting and drivingЉ sec-  
tion.  
WARNING  
● Your brake system may not be working  
properly if the warning light is on. Driv-  
ing could be dangerous. If you judge it  
to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest  
service station for repairs. Otherwise,  
have your vehicle towed because driv-  
ing it could be dangerous.  
Charge warning light  
If this light comes on while the engine is running,  
it may indicate the charging system is not func-  
tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check  
the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,  
missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN  
dealer immediately.  
or  
Brake warning light  
This light functions for both the parking brake and  
the foot brake systems.  
● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-  
gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid  
level may increase your stopping dis-  
tance and braking will require greater  
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.  
Parking brake indicator  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, the light comes on when the parking  
brake is applied.  
Instruments and controls 2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low  
tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not  
functioning properly.  
Engine oil pressure warning  
light  
CAUTION  
● Do not ground electrical accessories  
directly to the battery terminal. Doing  
so will bypass the variable control sys-  
tem and the vehicle battery may not  
charge completely. Refer to “Variable  
voltage control system” in the “Mainte-  
nance and do-it-yourself” section later  
in this manual.  
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the  
light flickers or comes on during normal driving,  
pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine  
immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other  
authorized repair shop.  
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, this light illuminates for about 1 second  
and turns off.  
Low tire pressure warning:  
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire  
pressure, the warning light will illuminate.  
The engine oil pressure warning light is not  
designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the  
dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in  
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of  
this manual.  
● Do not continue driving if the generator  
belt is loose, broken or missing.  
When the low tire pressure warning light  
illuminates, you should stop and adjust the  
tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom-  
mended COLD tire pressure shown on the  
Tire and Loading Information label located  
in the driver’s door opening. The low tire  
pressure warning light does not automati-  
cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-  
justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-  
ommended pressure, the vehicle must be  
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)  
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low  
tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres-  
sure gauge to check the tire pressure.  
Continuously Variable  
Transmission (CVT) check  
warning light (if so equipped)  
CAUTION  
Running the engine with the engine oil  
pressure warning light on could cause se-  
rious damage to the engine almost imme-  
diately. Such damage is not covered by  
warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it  
is safe to do so.  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, the light comes on for about 2 seconds.  
If the light comes on at any other time, it may  
indicate the CVT system is not functioning prop-  
erly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
Low tire pressure warning light  
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure  
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire  
pressure of all tires except the spare.  
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure  
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and  
driving”section and in the “In case of emergency”  
section.  
2-12 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TPMS malfunction:  
●
If the light illuminates while driving,  
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or  
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,  
pull off the road to a safe location and  
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.  
Driving with under-inflated tires may per-  
manently damage the tires and increase  
the likelihood of tire failure. Serious ve-  
hicle damage could occur and may lead  
to an accident and could result in serious  
personal injury. Check the tire pressure  
for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure  
to the recommended COLD tire pressure  
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-  
tion label located in the driver’s door  
opening to turn the low tire pressure  
warning light OFF. If the light still illumi-  
nates while driving after adjusting the  
tire pressure, a tire may be flat. If you  
have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire  
as soon as possible.  
● Replacing tires with those not originally  
specified by NISSAN could affect the  
proper operation of the TPMS.  
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low  
tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-  
mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is  
placed in the ON position. The light will remain on  
after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a  
NISSAN dealer.  
CAUTION  
● The TPMS is not a substitute for the  
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to  
check the tire pressure regularly.  
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure  
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and  
driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main-  
tenance and do-it-yourself” section.  
● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds  
of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the  
TPMS may not operate correctly.  
● Be sure to install the specified size of  
tires to the 4 wheels correctly.  
WARNING  
● If the light does not illuminate with the  
ignition switch placed in the ON posi-  
tion, have the vehicle checked by a  
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.  
Master warning light  
This light comes on when various vehicle infor-  
mation display warnings appear.  
Seat belt warning light and  
chime  
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel  
is replaced tire pressure will not be in-  
dicated, the TPMS will not function and  
the low tire pressure warning light will  
flash for approximately 1 minute. The  
light will remain on after 1 minute. Con-  
tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible for tire replacement and/or  
system resetting.  
The light and chime remind you to fasten your  
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the  
ignition switch is placed in the ON or START  
position and remains illuminated until the driver’s  
seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime  
sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s  
seat belt is securely fastened.  
Instruments and controls 2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if  
the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened  
when the front passenger’s seat is occupied. For  
7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in  
the ON position, the system does not activate the  
warning light for the front passenger.  
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental  
restraint system (air bag system) and/or the preten-  
sioners may not function properly. For additional  
details, see “Supplemental restraint system” in the  
“Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental re-  
straint system” section of this manual.  
Cruise main switch indicator  
light  
The light comes on when the cruise control main  
switch is pushed. The light goes out when the  
main switch is pushed again. When the cruise  
main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise  
control system is operational.  
Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat  
belts and supplemental restraint system” section  
for precautions on seat belt usage.  
WARNING  
If the supplemental air bag warning light  
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,  
side air bag, curtain air bag systems  
and/or pretensioner systems will not op-  
erate in an accident. To help avoid injury  
to yourself or others, have your vehicle  
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible.  
Cruise set switch indicator  
light  
Supplemental air bag warning  
light  
The light comes on while the vehicle speed is  
controlled by the cruise control system. If the light  
blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate  
the cruise control system is not functioning prop-  
erly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or  
START position, the supplemental air bag warn-  
ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then  
turns off. This means the system is operational.  
INDICATOR LIGHTS  
If any of the following conditions occur, the front  
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and preten-  
sioner systems need servicing and your vehicle  
must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:  
For additional information on warnings and indi-  
cators, see “Vehicle information display” later in  
this section.  
Front passenger air bag status  
light  
The front passenger air bag status light (  
)
Continuously Variable  
Transmission (CVT) position  
indicator light (if so equipped)  
●
●
●
The supplemental air bag warning light re-  
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.  
will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be  
OFF depending on how the front passenger seat  
is being used.  
The supplemental air bag warning light  
flashes intermittently.  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, this indicator light shows the shift selec-  
tor position. See “Driving the vehicle” in the  
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.  
For front passenger air bag status light operation,  
see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in  
the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental  
restraint system” section of this manual.  
The supplemental air bag warning light does  
not come on at all.  
2-14 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
inspection/maintenance (I/M) test”in the “Technical  
and consumer information” section of this manual.  
The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking  
and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected  
by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have  
your vehicle towed to the dealer.  
High beam indicator light  
(blue)  
Operation  
This blue light comes on when the headlight high  
beams are on and goes out when the low beams  
are selected.  
The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in  
one of two ways:  
CAUTION  
Continued vehicle operation without hav-  
ing the emission control system checked  
and repaired as necessary could lead to  
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,  
and possible damage to the emission con-  
trol system.  
●
Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — An  
emission control system malfunction has been  
detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If the fuel-  
filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install  
the cap and continue to drive the vehicle.  
The high beam indicator light also comes on  
when the passing signal is activated.  
Malfunction Indicator Light  
(MIL)  
The  
light should turn off after a few  
If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks  
while the engine is running, it may indicate a  
potential emission control malfunction.  
driving trips. If the  
light does not turn off  
Security indicator light  
after a few driving trips, have the vehicle in-  
spected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need  
to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.  
This light blinks when the ignition switch is  
placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position.  
The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come  
on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,  
or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make  
sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed  
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons  
(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.  
●
Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — An  
engine misfire has been detected which may  
damage the emission control system. To re-  
duce or avoid emission control system dam-  
age:  
The blinking security indicator light indicates that  
the security systems equipped on the vehicle are  
operational.  
For additional information, see “Security sys-  
tems” later in this section.  
After a few driving trips, the  
light should  
– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH  
(72 km/h).  
turn off if no other potential emission control  
system malfunction exists.  
Slip indicator light  
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.  
– avoid steep uphill grades.  
If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 sec-  
onds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the  
engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is  
not ready for an emission control system  
inspection/maintenance test. See “Readiness for  
This indicator will blink when the VDC system is  
operating, thus alerting the driver to the fact that  
the road surface is slippery and the vehicle is  
nearing its traction limits.  
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo  
being hauled or towed.  
Instruments and controls 2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You may feel or hear the system working; this is  
normal.  
Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch  
again or restart the engine and the system will  
operate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control  
(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-  
tion of this manual.  
Key reminder chime  
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened  
while the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or  
OFF position or placed in the OFF or LOCK  
position with the Intelligent Key left in the Intelli-  
gent Key port. Make sure the ignition switch is  
placed in the LOCK position, and take the Intel-  
ligent Key with you when leaving the vehicle.  
The light will blink for a few seconds after the  
VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.  
The  
indicator light also comes on when  
The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on  
when you push the push-button ignition switch to  
the ON position. The light will turn off after about  
2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light  
stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indica-  
tor light while you are driving, have the Vehicle  
Dynamic Control system checked by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
you place the ignition switch in the ON position.  
The light will turn off after approximately 2 sec-  
onds if the system is operational. If the light does  
not come on have the system checked by a  
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.  
Light reminder chime  
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-  
tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is  
opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.  
Turn signal/hazard indicator  
lights  
Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-  
ing the vehicle.  
While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is  
operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear  
the system working when starting the vehicle or  
accelerating, but this is normal.  
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal  
switch is activated.  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ door buzzer  
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned  
on.  
The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if the  
Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when  
locking the doors. When the buzzer sounds, be  
sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent  
Key. See “NISSAN Intelligent Key™ ” in the “Pre-  
driving checks and adjustments” section.  
AUDIBLE REMINDERS  
Brake pad wear warning  
Vehicle Dynamic Control  
(VDC) OFF indicator light  
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.  
When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it  
makes a high pitched scraping sound when the  
vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake  
pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as  
soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.  
This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle  
Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF.  
This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control has  
been turned off.  
2-16 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY  
WIC1102  
LIC1103  
LIC1093  
1
The vehicle information display  
is located on  
Fuel Economy mode  
᭺
HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE  
INFORMATION DISPLAY  
the bottom of the speedometer. It displays such  
items as:  
The fuel economy mode can be selected to dis-  
play the instant fuel economy since the last reset.  
Press the  
button, located on the instru-  
●
●
●
Intelligent Key operation information  
some indicators and warnings  
other information  
ment panel just behind the steering wheel, to  
display the following modes:  
MPG→ MPG/MPH → Time/Miles → Range →  
Exterior Temperature → Setting → Warning  
For details about the Intelligent Key, see  
“NISSAN Intelligent Key™” in the “Pre-driving  
checks and adjustments” section.  
Instruments and controls 2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LIC1097  
WIC1266  
LIC1095  
Average speed mode  
Time/Miles (km) mode  
Range mode  
The average speed mode can be selected to  
display the average miles per gallon and miles per  
hour since the last reset.  
The time/miles (km) mode can be selected to  
show the time and distance driven since the last  
reset.  
The range mode can be selected to give you an  
estimation of the distance that can be driven  
before refueling. The range is constantly calcu-  
lated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank  
and the actual fuel consumption.  
2-18 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LIC1096  
LIC1541  
LIC1544  
Exterior Temperature mode  
Setting mode  
Alert mode  
The exterior temperature mode can be selected  
to provide you with the temperature outside of  
your vehicle.  
The setting mode allows you to set reminders or  
preferences for alerts, maintenance intervals or  
language displays.  
The alert mode allows you to set alerts notifying  
you of time to rest or icy conditions.  
The time to rest alert lets you know when you  
have been traveling for a long time and may need  
a break.  
In the setting mode screen press  
to:  
to move  
The icy alert notifies you that icy driving condi-  
tions may exist.  
●
●
●
Alert  
Maintenance  
Options  
and press  
to select the menu.  
Instruments and controls 2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LIC1046  
LIC1545  
LIC1546  
Reset mode  
Maintenance mode  
Options mode  
The reset mode can be selected in any screen  
that allows for preferences to be programmed.  
Once the screen is selected, you have the option  
to reset the selected distances or time to a new  
setting.  
The maintenance mode allows you to set alerts  
for the reminding of maintenance intervals for the  
following:  
The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when  
selecting the “Language/Unit” key and  
pressing  
.
●
●
●
●
tires  
oil  
Language: English or French  
Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG  
Metric — km, °C, l/km  
filter  
other  
You can select the language and unit using  
the  
button and pressing  
.
Set a desired interval by pushing  
to high-  
The settings are automatically saved when you  
exit the menu by pressing the BACK button or  
any other mode button.  
light the maintenance field and pressing  
.
The reset mode will open up and allow you to  
enter the desired distance.  
2-20 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LIC1098  
Warning mode  
The warning mode can be selected to view any  
warnings that may be present. Once the screen is  
selected you have the option of skipping the  
warning or viewing it in detail.  
Warnings can be present for issues such as an  
open door or low fuel. For more information about  
potential warnings see “Vehicle information dis-  
play warnings and indicators”later in this section.  
Instruments and controls 2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WIC1547  
4. Low windshield-washer fluid warning  
5. No key warning  
8. Engine start operation indicator  
(CVT models)  
Vehicle information display warnings  
and indicators  
9. Engine start operation indicator  
(M/T models)  
1. Door and trunk open warning  
2. Push warning (CVT models)  
6. Parking brake warning  
7. Shift P warning (CVT models)  
10. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ insertion indicator  
3. Low fuel warning  
2-22 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ removal indicator  
Low windshield-washer fluid warning  
2. When the door is closed with the Intelligent  
Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition  
switch is placed in the ACC or ON position.  
A chime will also sound.  
This warning illuminates when the windshield-  
washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-  
washer fluid as necessary. See “Windshield-  
washer fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-  
yourself” section of this manual.  
12. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ battery discharge  
indicator  
Door and trunk open warning  
Parking brake warning  
This warning illuminates when a door or the trunk  
has been opened when the engine is running.  
This warning illuminates when the parking brake  
is set and the vehicle is driven.  
No key warning  
Push warning (CVT models)  
This warning illuminates following two condi-  
tions:  
SHIFT P warning (CVT models)  
After the Shift P warning illuminates, the Push  
warning will illuminate if the ignition switch is  
placed in the ACC position when the shift selec-  
tor is moved to the P (Park) position.  
This warning illuminates when the ignition switch  
is pushed to stop the engine with the shift selec-  
tor in any position except in the P (Park) position.  
1. When the ignition switch is pushed and the  
Intelligent Key cannot be recognized by the  
system. If this warning illuminates, you can-  
not start the engine.  
If this warning illuminates, the ignition switch is  
placed in the OFF position. Move the shift selec-  
tor to the P (Park) position or place the ignition  
switch in the ON position.  
See “Shift P warning (CVT models)” in this sec-  
tion for additional information.  
Check for the following causes and perform  
the assigned remedies:  
To turn off the Push warning, place the ignition  
switch in the ON position and then in the LOCK  
position.  
– The battery of the Intelligent Key carried  
with you is discharged completely. Re-  
place the battery with a new one.  
An inside warning chime will also sound.  
If the shift selector is moved to the P (Park)  
position, the Push warning will appear. Refer to  
“Push warning (CVT models)” in this section.  
Low fuel warning  
– The Intelligent Key carried with you is not  
registered to the system. Use the regis-  
tered Intelligent Key.  
This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the  
fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is  
convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge  
reaches E (Empty). There will be a small re-  
serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel  
gauge needle reaches E (Empty).  
For additional information about Intelligent Key,  
see “NISSAN Intelligent Key™ ” in the “Pre-  
driving checks and adjustments” section.  
– You do not have an Intelligent Key with  
you. Carry an Intelligent Key with you.  
Instruments and controls 2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECURITY SYSTEMS  
Engine start operation indicator (CVT  
models)  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ removal indica-  
tor  
This indicator illuminates when the driver’s door  
is opened with the ignition switch placed in the  
OFF position and the Intelligent Key placed in the  
Intelligent Key port. A key reminder chime also  
sounds.  
This indicator illuminates when the ignition switch  
is placed in the LOCK, OFF, ACC or ON position  
with the shift selector in the P (Park) position.  
This indicator means that the engine will start by  
pushing the push-button ignition switch with the  
brake pedal depressed.  
If this indicator illuminates, remove the Intelligent  
Key from the Intelligent Key port and take it with  
you when leaving the vehicle.  
Engine start operation indicator (M/T  
models)  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ battery dis-  
charge indicator  
This indicator illuminates when the ignition switch  
is placed in the LOCK, OFF, ACC or ON position  
with the shift selector in neutral and the parking  
brake on.  
This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key  
battery is running out of power.  
LIC0301  
Your vehicle may have two types of security sys-  
tems:  
If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery  
with a new one. See “NISSAN Intelligent Key™”in  
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.  
This indicator means that the engine will start by  
pushing the ignition switch with the clutch and  
the brake pedal depressed.  
●
●
Vehicle security system  
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ insertion indica-  
tor  
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM  
This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key  
needs to be inserted into the Intelligent Key port.  
(For example, the Intelligent Key battery is dis-  
charged.)  
The vehicle security system provides visual and  
audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors  
or trunk lid when the system is armed. It is not,  
however, a motion detection type system that  
activates when a vehicle is moved or when a  
vibration occurs.  
If this indicator illuminates, insert the Intelligent  
Key into the Intelligent Key port in the correct  
direction. See “Push-button ignition switch” in  
the “Starting and driving” section.  
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot  
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or  
2-24 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-  
ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a  
brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key in  
the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when  
unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and  
park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.  
onds the vehicle security system automati-  
cally shifts into the armed phase. The  
security light begins to flash once every 3  
seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-arm  
time period, the driver’s door is unlocked by  
the key or the keyfob, or the ignition switch is  
placed in the ACC or ON position, the sys-  
tem will not arm.  
The alarm is activated by:  
●
opening the door or trunk lid without using  
the key or Intelligent Key (even if the door is  
unlocked by releasing the door inside lock  
switch).  
How to stop an activated alarm  
Many devices offering additional protection, such  
as component locks, identification markers, and  
tracking systems, are available at auto supply  
stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer  
may also offer such equipment. Check with your  
insurance company to see if you may be eligible  
for discounts for various theft protection features.  
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s  
door or the trunk lid with the key, pressing  
●
Even when the driver and/or passen-  
gers are in the vehicle, the system will  
activate with all the doors, hood and  
trunk lid locked with the ignition  
switch placed in the LOCK position.  
When placing the ignition switch in the  
ACC or ON position, the system will be  
released.  
the  
button on the Intelligent Key, or press-  
ing the request switch (if so equipped) on the  
driver’s or passenger’s door with the Intelligent  
Key in range of the door handle.  
How to arm the vehicle security  
system  
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER  
SYSTEM  
Vehicle security system activation  
1. Close all windows. (The system can be  
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not  
allow the engine to start without the use of a  
registered key.  
armed even if the windows are open.)  
The vehicle security system will give the following  
alarm:  
2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.  
●
The headlights blink and the horn sounds  
intermittently.  
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.  
3. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock all  
doors. The doors can be locked with the  
Intelligent Key, door handle request switch  
(if so equipped), power door lock switch or  
mechanical key.  
Statement related to Section 15 of FCC  
Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-  
tem  
●
The alarm automatically turns off after ap-  
proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm  
reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with  
again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking  
the driver’s door or trunk lid with the key, or  
This device complies with part 15 of the  
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry  
Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-  
ing two conditions;  
4. Confirm that the security indicator light  
comes on. The security light stays on for  
about 30 seconds. The vehicle security sys-  
tem is now pre-armed. After about 30 sec-  
by pressing the  
gent Key.  
button on the Intelli-  
Instruments and controls 2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER  
SWITCH  
(1) This device may not cause harmful in-  
terference, and (2) this device must accept  
any interference received, including inter-  
ference that may cause undesired opera-  
tion of the device.  
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-  
PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-  
SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD  
VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-  
ATE THE EQUIPMENT.  
LIC0474  
LIC1061  
Security indicator light  
SWITCH OPERATION  
The security indicator light blinks whenever the  
ignition switch is placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC  
position. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve-  
hicle Immobilizer System is operational.  
The windshield wiper and washer switch oper-  
ates when the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position.  
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the  
following speed:  
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-  
functioning, the light will remain on while the  
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.  
1
Intermittent — intermittent operation can be  
᭺
A
adjusted by turning the switch toward  
᭺
B
If the light still remains on and/or the en-  
gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for  
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-  
vice as soon as possible. Please bring all  
registered keys that you have when visiting  
your NISSAN dealer for service.  
(Slower) or  
(Faster). Also, for vehicles  
᭺
equipped with speed dependent wipers, the  
intermittent operation speed varies in accor-  
dance with the vehicle speed. (For example,  
when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-  
tent operation speed will be faster.)  
2-26 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE  
MIRROR (if so equipped)  
DEFROSTER SWITCH  
2
Low — continuous low speed operation  
᭺
● Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-  
centrates with water to the manufactur-  
er’s recommended levels before pour-  
ing the fluid into the windshield-washer  
reservoir tank. Do not use the  
windshield-washer reservoir tank to  
mix the washer fluid concentrate and  
water.  
3
High — continuous high speed operation  
᭺
4
Push the lever up  
tion of the wiper.  
to have one sweep opera-  
᭺
5
Pull the lever toward you  
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.  
to operate the  
᭺
WARNING  
In freezing temperatures the washer solu-  
tion may freeze on the windshield and  
obscure your vision which may lead to an  
accident. Warm the windshield with the  
defroster before you wash the windshield.  
WIC1554  
Type A  
To defrost the rear window glass and outside  
mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and  
push the rear window defroster switch on. The  
rear window defroster indicator light on the  
switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn  
the defroster off.  
CAUTION  
● Do not operate the washer continu-  
ously for more than 30 seconds.  
● Do not operate the washer if the reser-  
voir tank is empty.  
● Do not fill the window washer reservoir  
tank with washer fluid concentrates at  
full strength. Some methyl alcohol  
based washer fluid concentrates may  
permanently stain the grille if spilled  
while filling the window washer reser-  
voir tank.  
The rear window defroster automatically turns off  
after approximately 15 minutes.  
CAUTION  
When cleaning the inner side of the rear  
window, be careful not to scratch or dam-  
age the rear window defroster.  
Instruments and controls 2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL  
SWITCH  
●
The life of xenon headlights will be  
shortened by frequent on-off opera-  
tion. It is generally desirable not to turn  
off the headlights for short intervals  
(for example, when the vehicle stops at  
a traffic signal). Even when the daytime  
running lights are active (Canada only),  
the xenon headlights do not turn on.  
This way the life of the xenon head-  
lights is not reduced.  
XENON HEADLIGHTS (if so  
equipped)  
WARNING  
HIGH VOLTAGE  
Ꮨ
● When xenon headlights are on, they  
produce a high voltage. To prevent an  
electric shock, never attempt to modify  
or disassemble. Always have your xe-  
non headlights replaced at a NISSAN  
dealer.  
●
If the xenon headlight bulb is close to  
burning out, the brightness will drasti-  
cally decrease, the light will start blink-  
ing, or the color of the light will be-  
come reddish. If one or more of the  
above signs appear, contact a NISSAN  
dealer.  
● Xenon headlights provide considerably  
more light than conventional head-  
lights. If they are not correctly aimed,  
they might temporarily blind an oncom-  
ing driver or the driver ahead of you and  
cause a serious accident. If headlights  
are not aimed correctly, immediately  
take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer  
and have the headlights adjusted  
correctly.  
WIC1460  
Type B  
NOTE:  
The top and bottom few rows of wires on  
the rear window are not part of the rear  
window defroster system. These wires  
make up the antenna for the audio system.  
When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its  
brightness or color varies slightly. However, the  
color and brightness will soon stabilize.  
2-28 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LIC1085  
LIC1064  
LIC1063  
Type A  
Type B  
Type C  
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH  
Lighting  
CAUTION  
Use the headlights with the engine run-  
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle  
battery.  
1
When turning the switch to the  
posi-  
᭺
tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and  
instrument panel lights come on.  
2
When turning the switch to the  
tion, the headlights come on and all the other  
lights remain on.  
posi-  
᭺
Instruments and controls 2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To turn on the autolight system:  
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-  
1
tion  
.
᭺
2. Push the push-button ignition switch to the  
ON position.  
3. The autolight system automatically turns the  
headlights on and off.  
Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF  
position and a door is opened and left open, the  
headlights remain ON for 5 minutes. If another  
door is opened during the 5 minutes, then the 5  
minute timer is reset.  
LIC1086  
LIC1068  
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to  
Be sure you do not put anything on top of  
the autolight sensor located on the top side  
of the instrument panel. The autolight sen-  
sor controls the autolight; if it is covered,  
the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark  
out and the headlights will illuminate. If  
this occurs while parked with the engine  
off and the ignition switch placed in the ON  
position, your vehicle’s battery could be-  
come discharged.  
Autolight system (if so equipped)  
the OFF,  
, or  
position.  
The autolight system allows the headlights to be  
set so they turn on and off automatically. The  
autolight system can:  
●
Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,  
license plate and instrument panel lights au-  
tomatically when it is dark.  
●
●
Turn off all the lights when it is light.  
Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after  
you place the ignition switch in the OFF  
position and all doors are closed.  
2-30 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
Even though the battery saver feature au-  
tomatically turns off the headlights after a  
period of time, you should turn the head-  
light switch to the OFF position when the  
engine is not running to avoid discharging  
the vehicle battery.  
When the daytime running light system is  
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not  
on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your  
headlights. Failure to do so could cause  
an accident injuring yourself and others.  
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM  
(Canada only)  
The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-  
duced intensity when the engine is started with  
the parking brake released. The daytime running  
lights operate with the headlight switch in the  
LIC1087  
Headlight beam select  
OFF position or in the  
headlight switch to the  
position. Turn the  
position for full  
1
To select the high beam function, push the  
lever forward. The high beam lights come on  
᭺
illumination when driving at night.  
and the  
light illuminates.  
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is  
started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-  
nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when  
the parking brake is released. The daytime run-  
ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch  
is placed in the OFF position.  
2
Pull the lever back to select the low beam.  
᭺
3
Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the  
headlight high beams on and off.  
᭺
Battery saver system  
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position  
while the headlight switch is in the  
or  
position, the headlights will turn off after  
5 minutes.  
Instruments and controls 2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LIC1066  
LIC1088  
LIC1089  
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)  
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch  
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS  
CONTROL  
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH  
Turn signal  
The instrument cluster illuminates when the igni-  
tion switch is placed in the ON position.  
to the  
switch to the  
position, then turn the fog light  
position.  
1
Move the lever up or down to signal the  
turning direction. When the turn is com-  
pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.  
᭺
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch  
in the AUTO position (if so equipped), the head-  
lights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to  
The instrument brightness control operates when  
the headlight control switch is in the  
Lane change signal  
AUTO,  
or  
position.  
the  
position.  
2
To signal a lane change, move the lever up or  
down to the point where the indicator light  
begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.  
᭺
Turn the control left or right to adjust the bright-  
ness of the instrument panel lights when driving  
at night.  
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch  
to the OFF position.  
The headlights must be on and the low beams  
selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog  
lights automatically turn off when the high beam  
headlights are selected.  
2-32 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER  
SWITCH  
HORN  
The flashers will operate with the ignition switch  
placed in any position.  
Some state laws may prohibit the use of  
the hazard warning flasher switch while  
driving.  
LIC0394  
LIC1069  
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when  
you must stop or park under emergency condi-  
tions. All turn signal lights flash.  
To sound the horn, push the center pad area of  
the steering wheel.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so  
could affect proper operation of the  
supplemental front air bag system. Tam-  
pering with the supplemental front air bag  
system may result in serious personal  
injury.  
● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to  
move the vehicle well off the road.  
● Do not use the hazard warning flashers  
while moving on the highway unless  
unusual circumstances force you to  
drive so slowly that your vehicle might  
become a hazard to other traffic.  
● Turn signals do not work when the haz-  
ard warning flasher lights are on.  
Instruments and controls 2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)  
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)  
OFF SWITCH  
CAUTION  
● Do not use the seat heater for extended  
periods or when no one is using the  
seat.  
● Do not put anything on the seat which  
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-  
ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat  
may become overheated.  
● Do not place anything hard or heavy on  
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar  
object. This may result in damage to the  
heater.  
LIC1543  
WIC0534  
● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat  
should be removed immediately with a  
dry cloth.  
The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle  
Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-  
ing conditions.  
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC  
system reduces the engine output to reduce  
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced  
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If  
maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck  
vehicle, turn the VDC system off.  
The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.  
1. Start the engine.  
● When cleaning the seat, never use  
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-  
lar materials.  
2. Push the low or high position of the switch,  
as desired, depending on the temperature.  
The indicator light in the switch will illumi-  
nate.  
● If any abnormalities are found or the  
heated seat does not operate, turn the  
switch off and have the system checked  
by your NISSAN dealer.  
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,  
automatically turning the heater on and off.  
The indicator light will remain on as long as  
the switch is on.  
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF  
● The battery could run down if the seat  
heater is operated while the engine is  
not running.  
switch. The  
indicator will come on.  
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the  
engine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dy-  
namic Control (VDC) system”in the “Starting and  
driving” section.  
3. When the seat is warmed or before you  
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch  
off.  
2-34 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
POWER OUTLET  
CAUTION  
● The outlet and plug may be hot during  
or immediately after use.  
● Only certain power outlets are designed  
for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do  
not use any other power outlet for an  
accessory lighter. See your NISSAN  
dealer for additional information.  
● Do not use with accessories that ex-  
ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.  
Do not use double adapters or more  
than one electrical accessory.  
● Use power outlets with the engine run-  
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle  
battery.  
LIC1070  
WIC1262  
Instrument panel  
Console box  
The power outlets are for powering electrical  
accessories such as cellular telephones. They  
are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum. The  
console outlet is powered directly by the vehi-  
cle’s battery.  
Open the lower half of the console box to access  
the power outlet. Refer to “Console box” in this  
section.  
● Avoid using power outlets when the air  
conditioner, headlights or rear window  
defroster is on.  
● Before inserting or disconnecting a  
plug, be sure the electrical accessory  
being used is turned OFF.  
● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If  
good contact is not made, the plug may  
overheat or the internal temperature  
fuse may open.  
● When not in use, be sure to close the  
cap. Do not allow water to contact the  
outlet.  
Instruments and controls 2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STORAGE  
WIC1263  
LIC0016  
LIC1242  
MAP POCKETS  
SEATBACK POCKETS (if so  
equipped)  
STORAGE POUCH (if so equipped)  
A storage pouch is located on the front of the  
driver’s and passenger’s seats.  
The seatback pockets are located on the back of  
the driver’s and passenger’s seats. The pockets  
can be used to store maps.  
WARNING  
Do not store angular, sharp, heavy objects  
or objects that cannot fully fit inside the  
pouch because they might increase the  
likelihood of an injury in a crash.  
2-36 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION  
● Do not use for anything other than  
sunglasses.  
● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-  
glasses holder while parking in direct  
sunlight. The heat may damage the  
sunglasses.  
LIC1075  
WIC1551  
Front - Type A  
SUNGLASSES HOLDER  
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.  
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.  
WARNING  
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while  
driving to prevent an accident.  
Instruments and controls 2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LIC1105  
WRS0167  
LIC1219  
Front - Type B  
Rear (sedan)  
Rear (coupe)  
CAUTION  
CUP HOLDERS  
● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when  
the cup holder is being used to prevent  
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it  
can scald you or your passenger.  
To open the front cup holders, push the cup  
holder lid. To close, lower the cup holder lid and  
push down until it clicks in place.  
The plastic insert (if so equipped) may be re-  
moved to accommodate a larger cup size or for  
cleaning.  
● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.  
Hard objects can injure you in an  
accident.  
The rear center cup holders are located in the  
rear fold-down armrest (sedan) or in the rear arm  
rest (coupe).  
2-38 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WIC1216  
WIC1076  
WIC1120  
Soft bottle holder  
GLOVE BOX  
CONSOLE BOX  
Upper half  
Soft bottle holder  
Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use the  
master key when locking  
glove box.  
1
2
or unlocking  
the  
᭺
᭺
CAUTION  
Pull up on the driver’s side latch to open the  
upper half of the console box. The mat (if so  
equipped) may be removed for cleaning.  
● Do not use bottle holder for any other  
objects that could be thrown about in  
the vehicle and possibly injure people  
during sudden braking or an accident.  
WARNING  
The upper half of the console box may be used for  
storage of cellular phones. An access hole is  
provided at the front of the upper half of the  
console box for phone cord routing to the power  
outlet.  
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to  
help prevent injury in an accident or a  
sudden stop.  
● Do not use bottle holder for open liquid  
containers.  
Instruments and controls 2-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WIC1121  
LIC1477  
LIC1597  
Lower half  
STORAGE BOX (if so equipped)  
COVERED STORAGE BOX  
Pull up on the passenger’s side latch to open the  
lower half of the console box. A power outlet is  
located inside the console box. The mat (if so  
equipped) may be removed for cleaning.  
Push the center of the lid to open.  
2-40 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LIC0748  
WIC1264  
LIC0802  
To install the cargo net, attach the net to the  
retainers.  
GROCERY HOOKS  
CARGO NET (if so equipped)  
The grocery hooks are located in the trunk and  
can be used to hang a standard size plastic  
grocery bag.  
WARNING  
To remove the cargo net, detach the net from the  
cargo net retainers.  
Properly secure all cargo with ropes or  
straps to help prevent it from sliding or  
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, un-  
secured cargo could cause personal  
injury.  
CAUTION  
Do not apply a total load of more than 20  
lbs (9 kg) to a single grocery hook.  
The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo  
area from moving around while the vehicle is in  
motion.  
Instruments and controls 2-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WINDOWS  
POWER WINDOWS  
Driver’s side power window switch  
The driver’s side control panel is equipped with  
switches to open or close all of the windows.  
WARNING  
● Make sure that all passengers have  
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while  
it is in motion and before closing the  
windows. Use the window lock switch  
to prevent unexpected use of the power  
windows.  
To open a window, push the switch to the first  
detent and continue to hold down until the de-  
sired window position is reached. To close a  
window, pull the switch to the first detent and  
continue to hold down until the desired window  
position is reached.  
● Do not leave children unattended inside  
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-  
tivate switches or controls and become  
trapped in a window. Unattended chil-  
dren could become involved in serious  
accidents.  
WIC1124  
1. Window lock button  
2. Power door lock switch  
3. Front passenger side (automatic switch,  
The power windows operate when the ignition  
switch is placed in the ON position, or for about  
45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in  
the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s  
door is opened during this period of about 45  
seconds, power to the windows is canceled.  
if so equipped)  
4. Right rear passenger side (sedan only)  
5. Left rear passenger side (sedan only)  
6. Driver side automatic switch  
2-42 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WIC1265  
LIC0718  
LIC0410  
Front passenger’s power window  
Rear power window switch (sedan  
Automatic operation  
switch  
only)  
To fully open a window equipped with automatic  
operation, press the window switch down (only  
driver’s side shown) to the second detent and  
release it; it need not be held. The window auto-  
matically opens all the way. To stop the window,  
lift the switch up while the window is opening.  
The passenger’s window switch operates only  
the corresponding passenger’s window. To open  
the window, push the switch to the first detent  
and continue to hold it down until the desired  
1
The rear power window switches open or close  
only the corresponding windows. To open the  
1
window, push the switch and hold it down . To  
᭺
2
close the window, pull the switch up  
.
᭺
window position is reached  
. To close the  
window, pull the switch to the first detent and  
᭺
Locking passengers’ windows  
To fully close a window equipped with automatic  
operation, pull the switch up to the second detent  
and release it; it need not be held. To stop the  
window, press the switch down while the window  
is closing.  
continue to hold it up until the desired window  
When the window lock button is depressed, only  
the driver’s side window can be opened or  
closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock  
function.  
2
position is reached  
.
᭺
Instruments and controls 2-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MOONROOF (if so equipped)  
Auto-reverse function  
When power window switch does not  
operate  
If the control unit detects something caught in the  
window as it is closing, the window will be imme-  
diately lowered.  
If the power window automatic function (closing  
only) does not operate properly, perform the fol-  
lowing procedure to initialize the power window  
system:  
The auto-reverse function can be activated when  
the window is closed by automatic operation  
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position or for 45 seconds after the ignition  
switch is placed in the OFF position.  
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.  
2. Open the window more than halfway by  
operating the power window switch.  
Depending on the environment or driving  
conditions, the auto-reverse function may  
be activated if an impact or load similar to  
something being caught in the window oc-  
curs.  
3. Pull the power window switch and hold it to  
close the window, and then hold the switch  
more than 3 seconds after the window is  
closed.  
WIC1559  
AUTOMATIC MOONROOF  
4. Release the power window switch. Operate  
the window by the automatic function to  
confirm the initialization is complete. The  
power window automatically opens or  
closes depending on if the automatic down  
or up function is selected.  
WARNING  
The moonroof will only operate when the ignition  
switch is placed in the ON position. The auto-  
matic moonroof is operational for about 45 sec-  
onds, even if the ignition switch is placed in the  
ACC or OFF position. If the driver’s door or the  
front passenger’s door is opened during this  
period of about 45 seconds, power to the moon-  
roof is canceled.  
There are some small distances immedi-  
ately before the closed position which  
cannot be detected. Make sure that all  
passengers have their hands, etc., inside  
the vehicle before closing the window.  
5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for other  
windows.  
If the power window function does not operate  
properly after performing the above procedure,  
see a NISSAN dealer for assistance.  
Sliding the moonroof  
To fully open the moonroof, push the switch  
1
toward  
.
᭺
2-44 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To fully close the moonroof, push the switch  
2
the  
position again. After a delay of  
᭺
CAUTION  
2
toward  
.
four seconds, the moonroof will make a small  
movement and backup.  
᭺
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand  
from the moonroof before opening.  
To open or close the moonroof part way, push the  
switch in any direction while the moonroof is  
sliding to stop it in the desired position.  
3. Release the switch.  
● Do not place heavy objects on the  
moonroof or surrounding area.  
4. Within 5 seconds of releasing the switch,  
push and continuously hold the switch  
Tilting the moonroof  
Resetting the moonroof switch  
2
toward  
. The moonroof will move  
᭺
Close the moonroof by pushing the switch  
from the tilt position to the open position and  
back to the close position.  
The moonroof switch may not operate properly  
and need to be reset if any of the following  
conditions have occurred:  
2
toward  
. Release the switch, then push  
᭺
2
the switch toward  
moonroof up.  
again to tilt the  
᭺
NOTE:  
●
●
the moonroof has been manually moved,  
If the switch is released at any time during  
Step 4, the procedure must be restarted.  
To tilt the moonroof down, push the switch  
the moonroof motor has been removed and  
reinstalled after the moonroof has been re-  
positioned or adjusted,  
1
toward  
.
᭺
5. Release the switch. Do not place the ignition  
switch in the OFF position for at least 2  
seconds. The moonroof is now reset.  
WARNING  
●
●
the moonroof glass panel has been adjusted  
or changed, or  
● In an accident you could be thrown from  
the vehicle through an open moonroof.  
Always use seat belts and child  
restraints.  
If the moonroof still does not operate properly,  
have the moonroof system checked by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
the electrical supply interrupted and/or  
some malfunction has been detected.  
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or  
extend any portion of their body out of  
the moonroof opening while the vehicle  
is in motion or while the moonroof is  
closing.  
Auto-reverse function (when closing or  
tilting down the moonroof)  
Use the following reset procedure to return the  
moonroof operation to normal.  
The auto-reverse function can be activated when  
the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto-  
matic operation when the ignition switch is  
placed in the ON position or for about 45 sec-  
onds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF  
position.  
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.  
2. Push and hold the moonroof switch  
2
toward  
. Once the moonroof has  
᭺
reached the full tilt position, release the  
switch. Push and hold the switch toward  
Instruments and controls 2-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INTERIOR LIGHT  
Depending on the environment or driving  
conditions, the auto-reverse function may  
be activated if an impact or load similar to  
something being caught in the moonroof  
occurs.  
WARNING  
● In an accident you could be thrown from  
the vehicle through an open moonroof.  
Always use seat belts and child  
restraints.  
WARNING  
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or  
extend any portion of their body out of  
the moonroof opening while the vehicle  
is in motion or while the moonroof is  
closing.  
There are some small distances immedi-  
ately before the closed position which  
cannot be detected. Make sure that all  
passengers have their hands, etc., inside  
the vehicle before closing the moonroof.  
CAUTION  
When closing:  
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand  
WIC1550  
If the control unit detects something caught in the  
moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof  
will immediately open backward.  
from the moonroof before opening.  
Type A  
● Do not place heavy objects on the  
moonroof or surrounding area.  
The interior light has a three-position switch and  
operates regardless of ignition switch position.  
When tilting down:  
Sunshade  
1
●
When the switch is in the ON position  
,
᭺
If the control unit detects something caught in the  
moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-  
mediately tilt up.  
Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for-  
ward or backward.  
the interior light illuminates, regardless of  
door position. The light will go off after 30  
minutes unless the ignition switch is placed  
in the ACC or ON position.  
If the moonroof does not close  
If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re-  
peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep  
pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds  
after it happens; the moonroof will fully close  
gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the  
moonroof.  
Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the  
moonroof.  
●
When the switch is in the center DOOR  
2
position  
, the front and rear personal  
᭺
lights will illuminate when the driver’s door is  
opened. Lights remain on for a maximum of  
30 seconds after driver’s door is closed.  
2-46 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTE:  
The doorstep lights illuminate when the  
driver and passenger doors are opened re-  
gardless of the interior light switch posi-  
tion. These lights will turn off automatically  
after 30 minutes while doors are open to  
prevent the battery from becoming dis-  
charged.  
CAUTION  
Do not use for extended periods of time  
with the engine stopped. This could result  
in a discharged battery.  
WIC1267  
WIC1476  
Type B  
CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)  
The lights will go off when the ignition switch is  
placed in the ON position, or the driver’s door is  
closed and locked.  
The console light will turn on whenever the park-  
ing lights or headlights are illuminated.  
The console light brightness can be adjusted  
with the instrument brightness control.  
The lights will also go off after 30 minutes when  
the doors are open.  
3
●
When the switch is in the OFF position  
,
᭺
the interior light does not illuminate, regard-  
less of door position.  
Instruments and controls 2-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PERSONAL LIGHTS  
MAP LIGHTS  
TRUNK LIGHT  
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.  
When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.  
The light will go off after about 30 minutes if the  
trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition switch is  
placed in the ACC or ON position.  
For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Exte-  
rior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance and  
do-it-yourself” section of this manual.  
LIC1083  
WIC1494  
Rear personal lights (sedan only)  
Front map lights  
To turn the rear personal lights on, press the  
switch. To turn them off, press the switch again.  
To turn the map lights on, press the light lens. To  
turn them off, press the lens again.  
CAUTION  
Do not use for extended periods of time  
with the engine stopped. This could result  
in a discharged battery.  
2-48 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HOMELINKா UNIVERSAL  
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)  
The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver provides a  
convenient way to consolidate the functions of up  
to three individual hand-held transmitters into  
one built-in device.  
WARNING  
● Do not use the HomeLinkா Universal  
Transceiver with any garage door  
opener that lacks safety stop and re-  
verse features as required by federal  
safety standards. (These standards be-  
came effective for opener models  
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-  
rage door opener which cannot detect  
an object in the path of a closing garage  
door and then automatically stop and  
reverse, does not meet current federal  
safety standards. Using a garage door  
opener without these features in-  
creases the risk of serious injury or  
death.  
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver:  
●
Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)  
devices such as garage doors, gates, home  
and office lighting, entry door locks and se-  
curity systems.  
●
Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No  
separate batteries are required. If the vehi-  
cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-  
nected, HomeLinkா will retain all program-  
ming.  
WIC0986  
PROGRAMMING HOMELINKா  
Once the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver  
is programmed, retain the original trans-  
mitter for future programming procedures  
(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon  
sale of the vehicle, the programmed  
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver buttons  
should be erased for security purposes. For  
additional information, refer to “Program-  
ming HomeLinkா” later in this section.  
1. To begin, press and hold the two outer  
● During the programming procedure  
your garage door or security gate will  
open and close (if the transmitter is  
within range). Make sure that people or  
objects are clear of the garage door,  
gate, etc. that you are programming.  
HomeLinkா buttons (to clear the memory)  
1
until the indicator light  
blinks (after 20  
᭺
seconds). Release both buttons.  
2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter  
1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the  
HomeLinkா surface.  
● Your vehicle’s engine should be turned  
off while programming the HomeLinkா  
Universal Transceiver.  
Instruments and controls 2-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
grammed device, press and hold the pro-  
grammed HomeLinkா button — releasing  
when the device begins to activate.  
ton, quickly and firmly press and release the  
HomeLinkா button you’ve just programmed.  
Press and release the HomeLinkா button up  
to 3 times to complete the training.  
5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkா blinks  
rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid,  
HomeLinkா has picked up a “rolling code”  
garage door opener signal. You will need to  
proceed with the next steps to train the  
HomeLinkா to complete the programming  
which may require a ladder and another per-  
son for convenience.  
8. Your HomeLinkா button should now be pro-  
grammed. (To program the remaining  
HomeLinkா buttons for additional door or  
gate openers, follow steps 2-4 only.)  
NOTE:  
Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to  
6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro-  
gram button located on the garage door  
opener’s motor to activate the “training  
mode”. This button is usually located near  
the antenna wire that hangs down from the  
motor. If the wire originates from under a  
light lens, you will need to remove the lens to  
access the program button.  
“clear”  
HomeLinkா buttons.  
all  
previously  
programmed  
WIC0987  
If you have any questions or are having difficulty  
programming your HomeLinkா buttons, refer to  
the HomeLinkா web site at: www.homelink.com  
or call 1-800-355-3515.  
3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and  
hold both the HomeLinkா button you want to  
program and the hand-held transmitter but-  
ton.  
PROGRAMMING HOMELINKா FOR  
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS  
DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has  
been completed.  
NOTE:  
Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-  
held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec-  
onds. To program your hand-held transmitter to  
HomeLinkா, continue to press and hold the  
HomeLinkா button (see steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-  
gramming HomeLinkா”) while you press and re-  
press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every  
2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly  
(indicating successful programming).  
4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator  
light on the HomeLinkா flashes, changing  
from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing  
blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.  
When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both  
buttons may be released. The rapidly flash-  
ing light indicates successful programming.  
To activate the garage door or other pro-  
Once you have pressed and released the  
program button on the garage door open-  
er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you  
have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.  
Use the help of a second person for conve-  
nience to assist when performing this step.  
7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas-  
ing the garage door opener’s program but-  
2-50 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTE:  
●
position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3  
inches (26 76 mm) away from the  
●
●
The hand-held transmitter appears to pro-  
gram the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver  
but does not activate the garage door.  
-
When programming a garage door opener,  
etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-  
ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-  
sible damage to the garage door opener  
components.  
HomeLinkா surface. Hold the transmitter in  
that position for up to 15 seconds. If  
HomeLinkா is not programmed within that  
time, try holding the transmitter in another  
position – keeping the indicator light in view  
at all times.  
Press and hold the trained HomeLinkா but-  
ton. If the garage door opener has the rolling  
code feature, the HomeLinkா indicator light  
will flash rapidly, then remain on after 2 sec-  
onds.  
OPERATING THE HOMELINKா  
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER  
If you continue to have programming difficulties,  
please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs  
Department. The phone numbers are located in  
the Foreword of this manual.  
To program the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver  
to a garage door opener with the rolling code  
feature, follow these instructions after completing  
the “Programming HomeLinkா” (the aid of a sec-  
ond person may make the following procedures  
quicker and easier).  
The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver (once pro-  
grammed) may now be used to activate the ga-  
rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap-  
propriate programmed HomeLinkா Universal  
Transceiver button. The red indicator light will  
illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.  
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED  
INFORMATION  
1. Locate the training button on the garage  
door opener motor unit. Exact location and  
color of the button may vary by garage door  
opener brand. If there is difficulty locating  
the training button, reference the garage  
door opener Owner’s Manual.  
Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However,  
to clear all programming, press and hold the two  
outside buttons and release when the indicator  
light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).  
PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-  
DIAGNOSIS  
If the HomeLinkா does not quickly learn the hand-  
held transmitter information:  
ROLLING CODE PROGRAMMING  
●
●
replace the hand-held transmitter batteries  
with new batteries.  
2. Press the training button on the garage door  
opener motor unit (which may activate a  
training light).  
Rolling code garage door openers (or other roll-  
ing code devices) which are “code protected”  
and manufactured after 1996, may be deter-  
mined by the following:  
position the hand-held transmitter with its  
battery area facing away from the  
HomeLinkா surface.  
●
Reference the garage door opener Owner’s  
Manual for verification.  
●
press and hold both the HomeLinkா and  
hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-  
ruption.  
Instruments and controls 2-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTE:  
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter  
button.  
FCC Notice:  
This device complies with FCC rules part 15  
and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera-  
tion is subject to the following two condi-  
tions:  
Following step 2, there are 30 seconds in  
which to initiate step 3.  
4. The HomeLinkா indicator light will flash, first  
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator  
light begins to flash rapidly, release both  
buttons.  
3. Firmly press and release the programmed  
HomeLinkா button a second time to com-  
plete the training process. (Some garage  
door openers may require you to do this  
procedure a third time to complete the train-  
ing.)  
(1) This device may not cause harmful in-  
terference and (2) This device must accept  
any interference that may be received, in-  
cluding interference that may cause undes-  
ired operation.  
The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver button has  
now been reprogrammed. The new device can  
be activated by pushing the HomeLinkா button  
that was just programmed. This procedure will  
not affect any other programmed HomeLinkா  
buttons.  
The garage door opener should now recognize  
the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver and acti-  
vate when the HomeLinkா button is pressed. The  
remaining two buttons may now be programmed  
(if not yet programmed, follow steps 2 through 4  
in the “Programming HomeLinkா” procedures  
earlier in this section).  
This transmitter has been tested and com-  
plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.  
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-  
proved by the party responsible for compli-  
ance could void the user’s authority to op-  
erate the equipment.  
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN  
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the  
codes of any non-rolling code device that has  
been programmed into HomeLinkா. Consult the  
Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-  
facturer or dealer of those devices for additional  
information.  
DOC: ISTC 1763K1313  
FCC I.D. CV2V67690  
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE  
HOMELINKா BUTTON  
To reprogram a HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver  
button, complete the following.  
When your vehicle is recovered, you will  
need to reprogram the HomeLinkா Univer-  
sal Transceiver with your new transmitter  
information.  
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkா but-  
ton. Do not release the button until step 4  
has been completed.  
2. When the indicator light begins to flash  
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the  
hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76  
mm) away from the HomeLinkா surface.  
2-52 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
How to use the remote keyless entry  
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18  
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21  
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22  
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23  
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23  
Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23  
Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24  
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25  
Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25  
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25  
Tilt/telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27  
Tilt operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27  
Telescopic operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27  
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27  
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28  
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28  
Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28  
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror  
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Child safety rear door lock (Sedan only). . . . . . . . . . . 3-6  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ With Door and Trunk  
Request Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6  
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8  
Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9  
How to use the remote keyless entry  
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12  
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15  
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ Without Door and Trunk  
Request Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17  
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29  
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
KEYS  
use with the Intelligent Key and NISSAN Vehicle  
Immobilizer System of your vehicle. Since the  
registration process requires erasing all memory  
in the Intelligent Key components when register-  
ing new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys  
that you have to the NISSAN dealer.  
● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply  
against another object.  
● Do not change or modify the Intelligent  
Key.  
● Wetting may damage the Intelligent  
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-  
mediately wipe until it is completely dry.  
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.  
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place  
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose  
your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by  
using the key number. NISSAN does not record  
key numbers so it is very important to keep track  
of your key number plate.  
● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an  
extended period in an area where tem-  
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).  
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a  
key holder that contains a magnet.  
WPD0363  
A key number is only necessary when you have  
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate  
from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer  
can duplicate it.  
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near  
equipment that produces a magnetic  
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and  
personal computers.  
1.  
2.  
Two Intelligent Keys  
Mechanical keys (inside Intelligent  
Keys)  
3.  
Key number plate  
CAUTION  
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™  
Listed below are conditions or occur-  
rences which will damage the Intelligent  
Key:  
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent  
Key which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelli-  
gent Key components and NISSAN Vehicle Im-  
mobilizer System components.  
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which  
contains electrical components, to  
come into contact with water or salt  
water. This could affect the system  
function.  
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.  
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis-  
tered and used with one vehicle. The new keys  
must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to  
● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.  
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER  
SYSTEM KEYS  
CAUTION  
Always carry the mechanical key installed  
in the Intelligent Key slot.  
You can only drive your vehicle using the master  
keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle  
Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.  
Valet hand-off  
When you have to leave a key with a valet, give  
them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me-  
chanical key with you to protect your belongings.  
The master key can be used for all the locks.  
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.  
Additional or replacement keys:  
To prevent the glove box and the trunk from being  
opened during valet hand-off, follow the proce-  
dures below:  
If you still have a key, the key number is not  
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle  
Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-  
cate your existing key. This is because the regis-  
tration process will erase the memory of all key  
codes previously registered into the NISSAN Ve-  
hicle Immobilizer System.  
1. Push the trunk cancel switch to the OFF  
position.  
SPA1951  
Mechanical key  
2. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-  
gent Key.  
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.  
3. Lock the glove box and the rear seats with  
the mechanical key.  
Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which  
contains an electrical transponder, to come into  
contact with salt water. This could affect system  
function.  
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock  
knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.  
4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and  
keep the mechanical key with you.  
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into  
the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to  
the lock position.  
See “Trunk lid” in this section, “Storage” in the  
“Instruments and controls”section and “Seats”in  
the “Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental  
restraint system” section.  
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the  
doors, trunk lid, glove box and rear seatback lock.  
See “Doors” and “Trunk lid” in this section, “Stor-  
age” in the “Instruments and controls” section  
and “Seats” in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts  
and supplemental restraint system” section.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DOORS  
When the doors are locked using one of the  
following methods, the doors can not be opened  
using the inside or outside door handles. The  
doors must be unlocked to open the doors.  
Opening and closing windows (if so  
equipped)  
The driver’s door key operation allows you to  
open and close windows equipped with auto-  
matic operation at the same time.  
WARNING  
●
To open the windows, turn the driver’s door  
key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer  
than 1 second after the door is unlocked.  
● Always have the doors locked while  
driving. Along with the use of seat belts,  
this provides greater safety in the event  
of an accident by helping to prevent  
persons from being thrown from the  
vehicle. This also helps keep children  
and others from unintentionally open-  
ing the doors, and will help keep out  
intruders.  
●
To close the windows, turn the driver’s door  
key toward the front of the vehicle for longer  
than 1 second after the door is locked.  
Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.  
WPD0444  
Driver’s side  
● Before opening any door, always look  
for and avoid oncoming traffic.  
LOCKING WITH KEY  
The power door lock system allows you to lock or  
unlock all doors at the same time.  
● Do not leave children unattended inside  
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-  
tivate switches or controls. Unattended  
children could become involved in seri-  
ous accidents.  
1
Turning the key toward the front  
locks all doors.  
of the vehicle  
᭺
2
Turning the key one time toward the rear  
of the  
᭺
vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,  
(where the key can  
only be removed and inserted) and turning it  
3
returning the key to neutral  
᭺
toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks  
4
all doors  
.
᭺
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lockout protection  
When the power door lock switch (driver’s or  
front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock  
position with the Intelligent Key in the port and  
any door open, all doors will lock and unlock  
automatically. With the Intelligent Key left in the  
vehicle (not in the Intelligent Key port) and any  
door open, all doors will unlock automatically and  
a chime will sound after the door is closed.  
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS  
●
All doors lock automatically when the vehicle  
speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).  
WPD0291  
WPD0381  
●
All doors unlock automatically when the ig-  
nition switch is placed in the OFF position  
(models with Intelligent Key system) or when  
the key is removed from the ignition switch  
(models without Intelligent Key system).  
Inside lock  
Door lock switch  
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK  
KNOB  
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR  
LOCK SWITCH  
To lock the door without the key, move the inside  
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door  
lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to  
1
lock knob to the lock position , then close the  
᭺
The automatic unlock function can be de-  
activated or activated. To deactivate or acti-  
vate the automatic door unlock system, perform  
the following procedure:  
door.  
1
the lock position . When locking the door this  
᭺
way, be certain not to leave the key inside the  
To unlock the door without the key, move the  
inside lock knob to the unlock position  
2
vehicle.  
.
᭺
To unlock all the doors without a key, push the  
1. Close all doors.  
door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s  
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.  
2
side) to the unlock position  
.
᭺
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ WITH  
DOOR AND TRUNK REQUEST  
SWITCHES  
3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2,  
push and hold the power door lock switch to  
WARNING  
● Radio waves could adversely affect  
electric medical equipment. Those who  
use a pacemaker should contact the  
electric medical equipment manufac-  
turer for the possible influences before  
use.  
the  
5 seconds.  
position (UNLOCK) for more than  
4. When activated, the hazard indicator will  
flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard  
indicator will flash once.  
5. The ignition switch must be placed in the  
OFF and ON position again between each  
setting change.  
● The Intelligent Key transmits radio  
waves when the buttons are pressed.  
The FAA advises the radio waves may  
affect aircraft navigation and communi-  
cation systems. Do not operate the In-  
telligent Key while on an airplane. Make  
sure the buttons are not operated unin-  
tentionally when the unit is stored for a  
flight.  
When the automatic door unlock system is deac-  
tivated, the doors do not unlock when the ignition  
switch is placed in the OFF position (models with  
Intelligent Key system) or when the key is re-  
moved from the ignition switch (models without  
Intelligent Key system). To unlock the door manu-  
ally, use the inside lock knob or the power door  
lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side).  
LIC0716  
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK  
(Sedan only)  
The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks  
using the remote controller function or pushing  
the request switch on the vehicle without taking  
the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating  
environment and/or conditions may affect the  
Intelligent Key operation.  
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors  
from being opened accidentally, especially when  
small children are in the vehicle.  
The child safety lock levers are located on the  
edge of the rear doors.  
1
When the lever is in the unlock position  
, the  
Be sure to read the following before using the  
Intelligent Key.  
᭺
door can be opened from the outside or the  
inside.  
2
When the lever is in the lock position  
,
᭺
the door can be opened only from the out-  
side.  
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
When the vehicle is parked near a parking  
meter.  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with  
you when operating the vehicle.  
Listed below are conditions or occur-  
rences which will damage the Intelligent  
Key:  
In such cases, correct the operating conditions  
before using the Intelligent Key function or use  
the mechanical key.  
● Never leave the Intelligent Key in the  
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.  
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which  
contains electrical components, to  
come into contact with water or salt  
water. This could affect the system  
function.  
Although the life of the battery varies depending  
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is  
approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-  
charged, replace it with a new one.  
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with  
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-  
ligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environ-  
mental conditions may interfere with the opera-  
tion of the Intelligent Key under the following  
operating conditions:  
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-  
charged, insert the Intelligent Key into the Intelli-  
gent Key port to start the engine. Replace the  
discharged battery with a new one as soon as  
possible. For more details, see “Push-button ig-  
nition switch” in the “Starting and driving” sec-  
tion.  
● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.  
● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply  
against another object.  
●
When operating near a location where  
strong radio waves are transmitted, such as  
a TV tower, power station and broadcasting  
station.  
● Do not change or modify the Intelligent  
Key.  
● Wetting may damage the Intelligent  
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-  
mediately wipe until it is completely dry.  
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving  
radio waves, if the key is left near equipment  
which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-  
nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-  
tery life may become shorter.  
●
When in possession of wireless equipment,  
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,  
and CB radio.  
● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an  
extended period in an area where tem-  
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).  
●
●
●
When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or  
covered by metallic materials.  
For information regarding replacement of a bat-  
tery, see “Battery replacement” in the “Mainte-  
nance and do-it-yourself” section.  
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a  
key holder that contains a magnet.  
When any type of radio wave remote control  
is used nearby.  
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near  
equipment that produces a magnetic  
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and  
personal computers.  
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered  
and used with one vehicle. For information about  
the purchase and use of additional Intelligent  
Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.  
When the Intelligent Key is placed near an  
electric appliance such as a personal com-  
puter.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN  
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-  
gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the  
unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate  
the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing  
procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.  
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or  
strong radio waves are present near the operat-  
ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat-  
ing range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent  
Key may not function properly.  
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)  
1
from each request switch  
.
᭺
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,  
handle or rear bumper, the request switches may  
not function.  
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating  
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone  
who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the  
request switch to lock/unlock the doors.  
WPD0465  
Coupe shown Sedan similar  
OPERATING RANGE  
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used  
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified  
1
operating range from the request switch  
.
᭺
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left  
inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the  
Intelligent Key with you and then lock the  
doors.  
Do not pull the door handle before pushing  
the door handle request switch. The door  
will be unlocked but will not open. Release  
the door handle once and pull it again to  
open the door.  
WPD0432  
WPD0375  
Coupe shown, Sedan similar  
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS  
PRECAUTION  
NISSAN INTELLIGENT  
KEY™OPERATION  
●
Do not push the door handle request switch  
with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as  
illustrated. The close distance to the door  
handle will cause the Intelligent Key system  
to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-  
gent Key is outside the vehicle.  
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking  
the key out of your pocket or bag.  
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you  
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door  
handle request switch within the range of opera-  
tion.  
●
After locking with the door handle request  
switch, verify the doors are securely locked  
by testing them.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION  
● After locking the doors using the re-  
quest switch, make sure that the doors  
have been securely locked by operating  
the door handle or the trunk opener  
switch.  
● When locking the doors using the re-  
quest switch, make sure to have the  
Intelligent Key in your possession be-  
fore operating the request switch to  
prevent the Intelligent Key from being  
left in the vehicle.  
● The request switch is operational only  
when the Intelligent Key has been de-  
tected by the Intelligent Key system.  
WPD0433  
WPD0369  
Coupe shown, Sedan similar  
NOTE:  
Locking doors  
●
Doors lock with the door handle request  
switch while the ignition switch is not in the  
LOCK position.  
Lockout protection  
1. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-  
tion, place the ignition switch in the LOCK  
position and make sure you carry the Intelli-  
gent Key with you.  
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-  
dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection  
is equipped with the Intelligent Key.  
●
Doors do not lock by pushing the door  
handle request switch while any door is  
open. However, doors lock with the me-  
chanical key even if any door is open.  
When the driver’s side door is open, the doors  
are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put  
inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;  
the lock will automatically unlock and the door  
buzzer sounds.  
2. Close all doors.  
1
3. Push any door handle request switch  
᭺
●
Doors do not lock with the door handle  
request switch with the Intelligent Key inside  
the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.  
However, when an Intelligent Key is inside  
the vehicle, doors can be locked with an-  
other Intelligent Key.  
while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.  
4. All doors and the trunk will lock.  
5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and  
the outside buzzer sounds twice.  
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTE:  
The doors may not lock when the Intelli-  
gent Key is in the same hand that is oper-  
ating the request switch to lock the door.  
Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or  
your other hand.  
CAUTION  
The lockout protection may not function  
under the following conditions:  
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on  
top of the instrument panel.  
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on  
WPD0432  
WPD0369  
top of the rear parcel shelf.  
Coupe shown, Sedan similar  
ing the door handle, push the door handle re-  
quest switch to unlock the door.  
● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-  
side the glove box or a storage bin.  
Unlocking doors  
All doors will be locked automatically unless one  
of the following operations is performed within 1  
minute after pushing the request switch.  
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.  
● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-  
side the door pockets.  
1
2. Push the door handle request switch  
.
᭺
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on or  
under the spare tire area.  
3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the  
outside buzzer sounds once.  
●
●
Opening any door.  
Pushing the ignition switch.  
● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-  
side or near metallic materials.  
1
4. Push the door handle request switch  
᭺
The interior light timer illuminates for 30 seconds  
when a door is unlocked and the room light  
switch is in the DOOR position.  
again within 5 seconds to unlock all doors.  
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the  
doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning  
the door handle to its original position will unlock  
the door. If the door does not unlock after return-  
The interior light can be turned off without waiting  
for 30 seconds by performing one of the follow-  
ing operations.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-  
tion.  
When all doors are locked and the trunk lid is  
closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk,  
the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk will  
open.  
●
●
Locking the doors with the remote controller.  
Switching the room light switch to the OFF  
position.  
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE  
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION  
The remote keyless entry function can operate all  
door locks using the remote keyless function of  
the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function  
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away  
from the vehicle. The operating distance de-  
pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.  
The remote keyless entry function will not func-  
tion under the following conditions:  
LPD0478  
Opening the trunk lid  
●
●
●
When the Intelligent Key is not within the  
operational range.  
A
1. Push the trunk opener request switch  
for  
᭺
more than 1 second while carrying the Intel-  
ligent Key with you.  
When the doors or the trunk are open or not  
closed securely.  
2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound 4  
times.  
When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-  
charged.  
3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.  
CAUTION  
Lockout protection  
When locking the doors using the Intelli-  
gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in  
the vehicle.  
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-  
dentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection is  
equipped with the Intelligent Key.  
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION  
After locking the doors using the Intelli-  
gent Key, be sure that the doors have been  
securely locked by operating the door  
handles.  
WPD0359  
WPD0360  
Locking doors  
Unlocking doors  
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-  
tion.  
1. Press the  
Key.  
button on the Intelligent  
2. Close all doors.  
2. The hazard warning lights flash once.  
3. Press the  
Key.  
button on the Intelligent  
3. Press the button again within 5 sec-  
onds to unlock all doors.  
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and  
the horn beeps once.  
All doors will be locked automatically unless one  
of the following operations is performed within 1  
minute after pressing the  
button:  
5. All doors will be locked.  
●
●
Opening any doors.  
Pushing the ignition switch.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The interior light illuminates for 15 seconds when  
a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in  
the DOOR position.  
The light can be turned off without waiting for 15  
seconds by performing one of the following op-  
erations:  
●
Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-  
tion.  
●
●
Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.  
Switching the room light switch to the OFF  
position.  
Opening windows (if so equipped)  
WPD0364  
WPD0361  
The Intelligent Key allows you to open windows  
equipped with automatic operation simulta-  
neously.  
Releasing the trunk lid  
Using the panic alarm  
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,  
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention  
by pressing and holding the  
Press the  
button for longer than 0.5 sec-  
onds to open the trunk lid. The trunk release  
button will not operate when the ignition switch is  
in the ON position or when the trunk cancel  
switch is in the OFF position. See “Cancel  
switch” in this section.  
●
To open the windows, press the  
but-  
button on the  
ton on the Intelligent Key longer than 3  
seconds after all doors are unlocked.  
Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.  
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25  
seconds.  
The door windows will open while pressing  
the button on the Intelligent Key.  
The panic alarm stops when:  
The door windows cannot be closed by  
using the Intelligent Key.  
●
It has run for 25 seconds, or  
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
●
Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.  
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the  
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn  
beep feature has been reactivated.  
Pushing the request switch on the driver or  
passenger door with the Intelligent Key in  
range of the door handle.  
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-  
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.  
WARNING SIGNALS  
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-  
pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent  
Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being  
stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and  
outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in  
the instrument panel.  
WPD0362  
When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is  
displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the  
Intelligent Key.  
Silencing the horn beep feature  
If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-  
vated using the Intelligent Key.  
See the troubleshooting guide that follows and  
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments  
and controls” section of this manual.  
To deactivate: Press and hold the  
and  
buttons for at least 2 seconds.  
The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to  
confirm that the horn beep feature has been  
deactivated.  
To activate: Press and hold the  
and  
buttons for at least 2 seconds  
once more.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE  
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are  
programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent  
Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle  
system may respond differently than expected.  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Remedy  
The SHIFT P warning appears on the dis-  
play and the inside warning chime sounds  
continuously.  
Shift the shift selector to the P (Park)  
position.  
When pushing the ignition switch to stop  
the engine  
The shift selector is not in the P (Park)  
position.  
The ignition switch is placed in the ACC  
position.  
Place the ignition switch in the OFF  
position.  
When opening the driver’s door to get out  
of the vehicle  
The inside warning chime sounds  
continuously.  
The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent Key  
port.  
Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli-  
gent Key port.  
The NO KEY warning appears on the  
display, the outside chime sounds 3 times  
and the inside warning chime sounds for  
approximately 3 seconds.  
Place the ignition switch in the OFF  
The ignition switch is placed in the ACC or position.  
ON position.  
When closing the door after getting out of  
the vehicle  
The NO KEY warning appears on the dis-  
play and the outside chime sounds  
continuously.  
The ignition switch is placed in the ACC  
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-  
position and the shift selector is not in the P tion and place the ignition switch in the  
(Park) position.  
OFF position.  
The shift “P” warning light appears on the  
display and the outside chime sounds  
continuously.  
The ignition switch is placed in the OFF  
Move the shift selector to the P (Park)  
position and the shift selector is not in the P position.  
(Park) position.  
When closing the door with the inside lock The outside chime sounds for approximately The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or  
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.  
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.  
Close the door securely.  
knob placed in the LOCK position  
3 seconds and all the doors unlock.  
trunk.  
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or  
trunk.  
When pushing the door handle request  
switch to lock the door  
The outside chime sounds for approximately  
2 seconds.  
A door is not closed securely.  
The door handle request switch is pushed  
before the door is closed.  
Push the door handle request switch after  
the door is closed.  
The outside chime sounds for approximately  
10 seconds and the trunk lid opens.  
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.  
When closing the trunk lid  
The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.  
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™  
WITHOUT DOOR AND TRUNK  
REQUEST SWITCHES  
In such cases, correct the operating conditions  
before using the Intelligent Key function or use  
the mechanical key.  
● Never leave the Intelligent Key in the  
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.  
WARNING  
● Radio waves could adversely affect  
electric medical equipment. Those who  
use a pacemaker should contact the  
electric medical equipment manufac-  
turer for the possible influences before  
use.  
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with  
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-  
ligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environ-  
mental conditions may interfere with the opera-  
tion of the Intelligent Key under the following  
operating conditions:  
Although the life of the battery varies depending  
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is  
approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-  
charged, replace it with a new one.  
● The Intelligent Key transmits radio  
waves when the buttons are pressed.  
The FAA advises the radio waves may  
affect aircraft navigation and communi-  
cation systems. Do not operate the In-  
telligent Key while on an airplane. Make  
sure the buttons are not operated unin-  
tentionally when the unit is stored for a  
flight.  
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-  
charged, insert the Intelligent Key into the Intelli-  
gent Key port to start the engine. Replace the  
discharged battery with a new one as soon as  
possible. For more details, see “Push-button ig-  
nition switch” in the “Starting and driving” sec-  
tion.  
●
When operating near a location where  
strong radio waves are transmitted, such as  
a TV tower, power station and broadcasting  
station.  
●
When in possession of wireless equipment,  
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,  
and CB radio.  
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving  
radio waves, if the key is left near equipment  
which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-  
nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-  
tery life may become shorter.  
The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks  
using the remote controller function. The operat-  
ing environment and/or conditions may affect the  
Intelligent Key operation.  
●
●
●
When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or  
covered by metallic materials.  
When any type of radio wave remote control  
is used nearby.  
For information regarding replacement of a bat-  
tery, see “Battery replacement” in the “Mainte-  
nance and do-it-yourself” section.  
Be sure to read the following before using the  
Intelligent Key.  
When the Intelligent Key is placed near an  
electric appliance such as a personal com-  
puter.  
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered  
and used with one vehicle. For information about  
the purchase and use of additional Intelligent  
Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.  
CAUTION  
●
When the vehicle is parked near a parking  
meter.  
● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with  
you when operating the vehicle.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN  
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-  
gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the  
unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate  
the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing  
procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.  
The remote keyless entry function will not func-  
tion under the following conditions:  
CAUTION  
Listed below are conditions or occur-  
rences which will damage the Intelligent  
Key:  
●
●
●
When the Intelligent Key is not within the  
operational range.  
When the doors or the trunk are open or not  
closed securely.  
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which  
contains electrical components, to  
come into contact with water or salt  
water. This could affect the system  
function.  
OPERATING RANGE  
When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-  
charged.  
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used  
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified  
operating range.  
CAUTION  
● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.  
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or  
strong radio waves are present near the operat-  
ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat-  
ing range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent  
Key may not function properly.  
When locking the doors using the Intelli-  
gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in  
the vehicle.  
● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply  
against another object.  
● Do not change or modify the Intelligent  
Key.  
The operating range is within 33 ft (10 m) of the  
vehicle.  
● Wetting may damage the Intelligent  
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-  
mediately wipe until it is completely dry.  
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE  
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION  
● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an  
extended period in an area where tem-  
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).  
The remote keyless entry function can operate all  
door locks using the remote keyless function of  
the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function  
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away  
from the vehicle. The operating distance de-  
pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.  
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a  
key holder that contains a magnet.  
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near  
equipment that produces a magnetic  
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and  
personal computers.  
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION  
After locking the doors using the Intelli-  
gent Key, be sure that the doors have been  
securely locked by operating the door  
handles.  
WPD0359  
WPD0360  
Locking doors  
Unlocking doors  
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-  
tion.  
1. Press the  
Key.  
button on the Intelligent  
2. Close all doors.  
2. The hazard warning lights flash once.  
3. Press the  
Key.  
button on the Intelligent  
3. Press the button again within 5 sec-  
onds to unlock all doors.  
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and  
the horn beeps once.  
All doors will be locked automatically unless one  
of the following operations is performed within 1  
minute after pressing the  
button:  
5. All doors will be locked.  
●
●
Opening any doors.  
Pushing the ignition switch.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The interior light illuminates for 15 seconds when  
a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in  
the DOOR position.  
The light can be turned off without waiting for 15  
seconds by performing one of the following op-  
erations:  
●
Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-  
tion.  
●
●
Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.  
Switching the room light switch to the OFF  
position.  
WPD0364  
WPD0361  
Releasing the trunk lid  
Using the panic alarm  
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,  
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention  
Press the  
button for longer than 0.5 sec-  
onds to open the trunk lid. The trunk release  
button will not operate when the ignition switch is  
in the ON position or when the trunk cancel  
switch is in the OFF position. See “Cancel  
switch” in this section.  
by pressing and holding the  
button on the  
Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.  
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25  
seconds.  
The panic alarm stops when:  
●
●
It has run for 25 seconds, or  
Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.  
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the  
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn  
beep feature has been reactivated.  
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-  
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.  
WARNING SIGNALS  
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-  
pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent  
Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being  
stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and  
outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in  
the instrument panel.  
WPD0362  
When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is  
displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the  
Intelligent Key.  
Silencing the horn beep feature  
If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-  
vated using the Intelligent Key.  
See the troubleshooting guide that follows and  
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments  
and controls” section of this manual.  
To deactivate: Press and hold the  
and  
buttons for at least 2 seconds.  
The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to  
confirm that the horn beep feature has been  
deactivated.  
To activate: Press and hold the  
and  
buttons for at least 2 seconds  
once more.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE  
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are  
programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent  
Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle  
system may respond differently than expected.  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Remedy  
The SHIFT P warning appears on the dis-  
play and the inside warning chime sounds  
continuously.  
Shift the shift selector to the P position.  
When pushing the ignition switch to stop  
the engine  
The shift selector is not in the P position.  
Place the ignition switch in the OFF  
position.  
The ignition switch is in the ACC position.  
When opening the driver’s door to get out  
of the vehicle  
The inside warning chime sounds  
continuously.  
The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent Key  
port.  
Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli-  
gent Key port.  
The NO KEY warning appears on the  
display, the outside chime sounds 3 times  
and the inside warning chime sounds for  
approximately 3 seconds.  
Place the ignition switch in the OFF  
position.  
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON  
position.  
When closing the door after getting out of  
the vehicle  
The NO KEY warning appears on the dis-  
play and the outside chime sounds  
continuously.  
The ignition switch is in the ACC position  
and the shift selector is not in the P (Park)  
position.  
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-  
tion and place the ignition switch in the  
OFF position.  
When closing the door with the inside lock The outside chime sounds for approximately The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or  
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.  
knob turned to LOCK  
3 seconds and all the doors unlock.  
trunk.  
The outside chime sounds for approximately  
10 seconds and the trunk lid opens.  
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.  
When closing the trunk lid  
The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.  
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HOOD  
TRUNK LID  
WPD0441  
LPD0394  
1
Pull the hood lock release handle located  
below the driver’s side instrument panel; the  
hood springs up slightly.  
᭺
OPENER OPERATION  
WARNING  
● Make sure the hood is completely  
closed and latched before driving. Fail-  
ure to do so could cause the hood to fly  
open and result in an accident.  
WARNING  
2
Lift the lever at the front of the hood with your  
fingertips and raise the hood.  
● Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This  
could allow dangerous exhaust gases  
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-  
haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”  
section of this manual.  
᭺
3
Remove the support rod from the clamp.  
● If you see steam or smoke coming from  
the engine compartment, to avoid injury  
do not open the hood.  
᭺
4
Insert the support rod into the hole on the  
5
passenger’s side of the hood.  
᭺
᭺
When closing the hood, return the hood rod to its  
original position. Lower the hood approximately  
12 inches (30 cm) above the latch and release it.  
This allows proper engagement of the hood latch.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● Closely supervise children when they  
are around cars to prevent them from  
playing and becoming locked in the  
trunk where they could be seriously in-  
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear  
seatback and trunk lid securely latched  
when not in use, and prevent children’s  
access to car keys.  
To open the trunk lid, push the opener switch  
down.  
To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid  
down securely.  
LPD0395  
LPD0396  
NOTE:  
Cancel switch  
INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE  
You can open the trunk lid with the Intelli-  
gent Key. Refer to “NISSAN Intelligent  
Key™” in this section.  
When the switch, located inside the glove box, is  
in the OFF position, the power to the trunk lid will  
be cancelled. The trunk can only be opened with  
the master key or keyfob.  
WARNING  
Closely supervise children when they are  
around cars to prevent them from playing  
and becoming locked in the trunk where  
they could be seriously injured. Keep the  
car locked, with the rear seatback and  
trunk lid securely latched when not in use,  
and prevent children’s access to car keys.  
The trunk lid cannot be opened when:  
●
●
using the trunk lid release switch,  
the trunk open request switch (if so  
equipped) is pushed, when the Intelligent  
Key is in range of the vehicle or  
The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides  
a means of escape for children and adults in the  
event they become locked inside the trunk.  
●
the HOLD button on the Intelligent Key is  
pressed.  
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FUEL-FILLER DOOR  
To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illumi-  
nated release handle until the lock releases and  
push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is  
made of a material that glows in the dark after a  
brief exposure to ambient light.  
The handle is located inside the trunk compart-  
ment on the interior of the trunk lid.  
LPD0448  
LPD0397  
Coupe  
OPENER OPERATION  
FUEL-FILLER CAP  
The fuel-filler door release is located on the floor  
to the left of the driver’s seat. To open the fuel-  
filler door, pull up the release. To lock, close the  
fuel-filler door securely.  
The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the  
cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn  
the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are  
heard.  
For the Coupe model, put the fuel-filler cap on the  
1
cap holder  
while refueling.  
᭺
For the Sedan model, loop the tether strap  
1
around the hook  
while refueling.  
᭺
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● Use only an original equipment type  
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a  
built-in safety valve needed for proper  
operation of the fuel system and emis-  
sion control system. An incorrect cap  
can result in a serious malfunction and  
possible injury. It could also cause the  
malfunction indicator light to come on.  
CAUTION  
● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,  
flush it away with water to avoid paint  
damage.  
● Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the  
fuel-filler tube, then tighten until the  
fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten  
the fuel-filler cap properly may cause  
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to  
attempt to start your vehicle.  
the  
Malfunction Indicator Light  
● Do not fill a portable fuel container in  
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity  
can cause an explosion of flammable  
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or  
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious  
injury or death when filling portable fuel  
containers:  
(MIL) to illuminate. If the  
light  
illuminates because the fuel-filler cap  
is loose or missing, tighten or install the  
cap and continue to drive the vehicle.  
LPD0449  
Sedan  
The  
light should turn off after a  
WARNING  
few driving trips. If the  
light  
● Gasoline is extremely flammable and  
highly explosive under certain condi-  
tions. You could be burned or seriously  
injured if it is misused or mishandled.  
Always stop the engine and do not  
smoke or allow open flames or sparks  
near the vehicle when refueling.  
– Always place the container on the  
ground when filling.  
does not turn off after a few driving  
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a  
NISSAN dealer.  
– Do not use electronic devices when  
filling.  
● For additional information, see the  
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in  
the “Instruments and Controls” section  
earlier in this manual.  
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact  
with the container while you are fill-  
ing it.  
● Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the  
cap a third of a turn, and wait for any  
“hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuel  
from spraying out and possibly causing  
personal injury. Then remove the cap.  
– Use only approved portable fuel con-  
tainers for flammable liquid.  
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING  
SUN VISORS  
TELESCOPIC OPERATION  
1
Pull the lever  
all the way toward you and  
᭺
adjust the steering wheel forward or backward in  
3
direction  
, to the desired position. Lock the  
wheel by releasing the lever and ensure that the  
lever has returned to its original position.  
᭺
WARNING  
Do not adjust the steering wheel any  
closer to you than is necessary for proper  
steering operation and comfort. The driv-  
er’s air bag inflates with great force. If you  
are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting  
sideways or out of position in any way, you  
are at greater risk of injury or death in a  
crash. You may also receive serious or  
fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up  
against it when it inflates. Always sit back  
against the seatback and as far away as  
practical from the steering wheel. Always  
use the seat belts.  
LPD0398  
TILT OPERATION  
1
Pull the lever  
all the way toward you and  
᭺
2
adjust the steering wheel up or down  
to the  
᭺
desired position. Lock the wheel by releasing the  
lever and ensure that the lever has returned to its  
original position.  
WPD0435  
WARNING  
Coupe shown, sedan similar  
To block glare from the front, swing down the  
main sun visor.  
Do not adjust the steering wheel while  
driving. You could lose control of your  
vehicle and cause an accident.  
1
᭺
2
To block glare from the side, remove the sun  
visor from the center mount and swing the  
sun visor to the side.  
᭺
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MIRRORS  
3
Slide the extension sun visor (if so equipped)  
in or out as needed.  
᭺
CAUTION  
Do not store the sun visor before returning  
the extension to its original position.  
LPD0400  
WPD0126  
Coupe shown, sedan similar  
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)  
VANITY MIRRORS  
1
The night position  
reduces glare from the  
᭺
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor  
down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity  
mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the  
mirror cover is open.  
headlights of vehicles behind you at night.  
2
Use the day position  
hours.  
when driving in daylight  
᭺
WARNING  
Use the night position only when neces-  
sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.  
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE  
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)  
The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-  
cally dims during night time conditions and ac-  
cording to the intensity of the headlights of the  
vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare  
feature is activated when the ignition switch is in  
the ON position.  
The indicator light will illuminate when the auto-  
matic anti-glare feature is operating.  
NOTE:  
Do not hang any objects over the sensors  
LPD0469  
LPD0470  
1
or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.  
᭺
Type A-Without compass  
Type B-With compass  
Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the  
sensors, resulting in improper operation.  
To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again,  
press:  
Type A and Type B  
2
The indicator light  
will illuminate when the  
automatic anti-glare feature is operating.  
᭺
●
the  
|
button for inside mirrors without  
compass.  
To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:  
●
the  
compass.  
button for inside mirrors with  
●
the  
compass.  
O
button for inside mirrors without  
The indicator light will turn on.  
●
the  
button for inside mirrors with  
compass.  
For information on HomeLinkா Universal Trans-  
ceiver operation, see the “HomeLinkா Universal  
Transceiver” in the “Instruments and controls”  
section of this manual.  
The indicator light will turn off.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For information on the compass display (if so  
equipped), see “Compass display” in the “Instru-  
ments and controls” section of this manual.  
OUTSIDE MIRRORS  
WARNING  
● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on  
the passenger side are closer than they  
appear. Be careful when moving to the  
right. Using only this mirror could cause  
an accident. Use the inside mirror or  
glance over your shoulder to properly  
judge distances to other objects.  
LPD0346  
WPD0056  
Electric control type  
Manual folding outside mirrors (if so  
equipped)  
The outside mirror remote control only operates  
when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON  
position.  
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.  
Rotate the control lever to select the right or left  
mirror. Adjust the mirror to the desired position by  
moving the control lever.  
Heated mirrors (if so equipped)  
Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,  
defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-  
tional information, see “Rear window and outside  
mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and  
controls” section of this manual.  
3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MEMO  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice  
recognition systems  
Control panel buttons — color screen with  
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27  
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28  
Audio system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28  
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28  
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29  
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29  
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . .4-29  
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30  
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player  
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
How to use the touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
How to select menus on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
How to use the INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12  
RearView Monitor (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13  
How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13  
Difference between predicted and actual  
distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14  
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16  
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17  
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18  
Heater and air conditioner (manual)  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44  
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)  
player (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48  
FM/AM/SAT radio with CD/DVD player  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54  
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) Player  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19  
Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19  
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20  
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21  
Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22  
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)  
Operation (models with Navigation System) . . . . . .4-63  
USB interface (models without Navigation  
System) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66  
USB interface (models with Navigation  
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-68  
iPodா* Player Operation without Navigation  
System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72  
iPodா* Player Operation with Navigation  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26  
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26  
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27  
System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Music Box™ Hard Drive audio system  
Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-107  
Vehicle Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-109  
Handset Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-111  
Making a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-112  
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-112  
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-113  
Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-114  
Phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-114  
Bluetooth settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-115  
Call volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-116  
NISSAN Voice Recognition System  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-116  
NISSAN Voice Recognition Standard Mode . . . . .4-117  
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-120  
Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-120  
Giving voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-120  
NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-76  
Bluetoothா streaming audio (if so equipped). . . . . .4-83  
CD care and cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-86  
Steering wheel switch for audio control  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88  
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-90  
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-90  
Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System without  
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91  
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-92  
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-93  
Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-95  
Getting started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-95  
List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-97  
Speaker adaptation (SA) mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-102  
Manual Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-103  
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-104  
Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System with  
Command Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-129  
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-134  
Speaker Adaptation function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-137  
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-139  
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-105  
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-107  
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —  
COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION  
SYSTEM (if so equipped)  
WARNING  
● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-  
tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,  
fire, or electrical shock.  
● In case you notice any foreign object in  
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,  
or notice smoke or smell coming from  
it, stop using the system immediately  
and contact your nearest NISSAN  
dealer. Ignoring such conditions may  
lead to accidents, fire or electrical  
shock.  
CAUTION  
Do not use this system if you notice any  
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or  
lack of sound. Continued use of the sys-  
tem may result in accident, fire or electric  
shock.  
LHA1400  
5. INFO button (P. 4-5)  
6. SETTING button (P. 4-6)  
7. Volume control knob  
1. Display screen  
2. MAP button*  
3. DEST button*  
4. ROUTE button*  
8.  
(brightness control) button  
4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
*For Navigation system control buttons, refer to  
the separate Navigation System Owner’s  
Manual.  
● To clean the display, never use a rough  
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any  
kind of solvent or paper towel with a  
chemical cleaning agent. They will  
scratch or deteriorate the panel.  
When you use this system, make sure the engine  
is running.  
● Do not splash any liquid such as water  
or car fragrance on the display. Contact  
with liquid will cause the system to  
malfunction.  
If you use the system with the engine not  
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long  
time, it will discharge the battery, and the  
engine will not start.  
To help ensure safe driving, some functions can-  
not be operated while driving.  
Reference symbols:  
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a  
key shown only on the display. These keys can be  
selected by touching the screen.  
The on-screen functions that are not available  
while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.  
LHA1227  
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper-  
ate the navigation system.  
Touch screen operation  
HOW TO USE THE TOUCH  
SCREEN  
Selecting the item:  
WARNING  
Touch an item to select. To select the “Naviga-  
1
tion” key, touch the “Navigation” key  
screen. Touch the “BACK”key  
previous screen.  
on the  
CAUTION  
᭺
● ALWAYS give your full attention to  
driving.  
2
to return to the  
᭺
● The glass screen on the liquid crystal  
display may break if it is hit with a hard  
or sharp object. If the glass breaks, do  
not touch the liquid crystalline material,  
which contains a small amount of mer-  
cury. In case of contact with skin, wash  
immediately with soap and water.  
● Avoid using vehicle features that could  
distract you. If distracted, you could  
lose control of your vehicle and cause  
an accident.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
Delete:  
Deletes the last inputted character with one  
touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to  
delete all of the characters.  
OK:  
Completes the character input.  
Touch screen maintenance  
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft  
cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a  
small amount of neutral detergent with a soft  
cloth. Never spray the screen with water or de-  
tergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe the  
screen.  
LHA1228  
LHA1230  
Adjusting the item:  
Inputting characters:  
1
Touch the “+” key  
᭺
2
or the “Ϫ” key  
the settings of an item.  
to adjust  
1
Touch the letter or number key  
.
᭺
᭺
There are some options available when inputting  
characters.  
3
Touch the up arrow  
᭺
to scroll up the page one  
4
item at a time, or touch the double up arrow  
scroll up an entire page.  
to  
᭺
●
●
●
Uppercase:  
Shows uppercase characters.  
5
Touch the down arrow  
to scroll down the  
᭺
Lowercase:  
page one item at a time, or touch the double  
6
Shows lowercase characters.  
down arrow  
to scroll down an entire page.  
᭺
Space:  
Inserts a space.  
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Menu Selections:  
Shows the options to choose within that  
menu screen (for example, Auto Interior Illu-  
mination, etc.).  
3. Up/Down Movement Indicator:  
Shows that the arrows on the touch screen  
may be used to move up or down on the  
screen and select more options.  
4. Screen Count:  
Shows the number of menu selections avail-  
able for the current menu, even if they are on  
multiple pages (for example, 1/7).  
5. Footer/Information Line:  
WHA1401  
LHA1402  
Provides more information (if available)  
about the menu selection currently high-  
lighted (for example, Cabin lighting when  
unlocking doors).  
HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE  
SCREEN  
HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON  
Press the INFO button; the display screen shows  
vehicle and navigation information for your con-  
venience.  
Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis-  
play screen in menus. Whenever a menu selec-  
tion is made or menu item is highlighted, different  
areas on the screen provide you with important  
information. See the following for details.  
Where am I?  
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-  
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.  
1. Header:  
Shows the path used to get to the current  
screen (for example, press the SETTING  
button > then select the “Comfort” key).  
Traffic Info  
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-  
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Weather Info  
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-  
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.  
Map Update  
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-  
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.  
Navigation Version  
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-  
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.  
GPS Position  
LHA1236  
LHA1237  
For GPS Position, refer to the separate Naviga-  
tion System Owner’s Manual.  
HOW TO USE THE SETTING  
BUTTON  
Voice recognition settings  
When the SETTING button is pressed, the Set-  
tings screen will appear on the display. You can  
select and/or adjust several functions, features  
and modes that are available for your vehicle.  
For Voice Recognition settings, refer to “NISSAN  
Voice Recognition system” in this section.  
4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHA1502  
WHA1503  
LHA1242  
Brightness/contrast:  
Display off:  
Display settings  
Select the “Brightness” key or the “Contrast” key  
to adjust the brightness or contrast of the display  
background. Touch the “+”or “-”key to adjust the  
brightness to darker or brighter and the contrast  
to lower or higher.  
Select the “Display ON” key. The indicator of the  
“Display ON” turns off and the message above  
will be displayed briefly. When the audio, HVAC  
(Heater and air conditioner), or any mode button  
on the control panel is operated, the display turns  
on for that operation. If one of the control panel  
buttons is pressed, the display will not automati-  
cally turn off until that operation is finished. Oth-  
erwise, the screen turns off automatically after 5  
seconds.  
Select the “Display” key. On the screen above,  
select the “Display Adjustment” key. The Display  
Adjustment screen will appear.  
The new settings are automatically saved when  
you exit the setting screen by selecting the  
“Back” key or any other mode button.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To turn the screen on:  
●
Press the SETTING button and select the  
“Display” key and then select the “Display  
ON” key, or  
●
Press the  
button and the message  
“resuming display” will appear and the “Dis-  
play ON” key will be automatically turned on  
(no amber indicator).  
Background color:  
Select the “Background Color” key; the display  
color changes between day and night.  
The new settings are automatically saved when  
you exit the setting screen by selecting the  
“Back” key or any other mode button.  
LHA1240  
LHA1241  
Color theme:  
Clock  
Select the “Display” key, then select the “Color  
Theme” key. The Color Theme select screen will  
appear.  
The following display will appear after pressing  
the SETTING button, then selecting the “Clock”  
key.  
Select the key for the desired color. The appear-  
ance of the background, arrows and bars will  
change for all screens accordingly. You can  
choose a black, blue or red color theme.  
On-screen Clock:  
When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-  
nated), a clock is always displayed in the upper  
right corner of the screen.  
This clock will indicate the time almost exactly  
because it is always adjusted by the GPS system.  
4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clock Format (24h):  
●
●
●
Newfoundland  
Hawaii  
When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-  
nated), the clock format will change from the  
default 12-hour display to a 24-hour display.  
Alaska  
After selection/settings, select the “Back” key or  
any other mode button to accept the changes.  
Offset (hour):  
Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the  
hours.  
Offset (minute):  
Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the  
minutes.  
Daylight Savings Time:  
LHA1243  
When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-  
nated), daylight savings time is on. To turn off the  
daylight savings time, touch the “ON” key; the  
amber indicator light will go out.  
Time Zone:  
Select the “Time Zone” key; the Time Zone  
screen will appear.  
Select one of the following zones, depending on  
the current location, by selecting the correct time  
zone key to enable that time zone (indicator light  
will illuminate for that location).  
●
●
●
●
●
Pacific  
Mountain  
Central  
Eastern  
Atlantic  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LHA1403  
WHA1404  
LHA1405  
Comfort settings  
Auto Interior Illumination: Select to turn on or  
turn off the illumination of the interior lights when  
any door is unlocked.  
Others settings  
Select the “Others” key, then select the “Com-  
fort” key. The Comfort settings screen will be  
displayed.  
Select the “Others” key. Comfort settings, lan-  
guage and units and Voice Recognition settings  
will be displayed.  
Light Sensitivity: Select to adjust the sensitivity  
of the automatic headlights higher (right) or lower  
(left). After selecting the item, touch the “+”or “-”  
key to change the setting.  
You can set the following operating conditions by  
selecting the key for the desired item. The indica-  
tor light (box at the right of the selected item)  
alternately turns on and off each time the item is  
touched.  
Light Off Delay: Select to change the duration  
of the automatic headlight off timer. After select-  
ing the item, touch the “+” or “-” key to change  
the setting. The available delays are 0, 30, 45, 60,  
90, 120, 150 and 180 seconds.  
Indicator light is illuminated — ON  
Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF  
4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Speed Sensing Wiper Interval: Select to turn  
on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati-  
cally according to the vehicle speed.  
Selective Door Unlock: When this item is  
turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked first  
after the door unlock operation. When the door  
handle request switch on the driver’s or front  
passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked,  
only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All  
the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock  
operation is performed again within one minute.  
When this item is turned to off, all the doors will  
be unlocked after the door unlock operation is  
performed once.  
LHA1250  
LHA1251  
Language & Units:  
Select Language:  
Intelligent Key Lock / Unlock: Select to turn  
on or turn off the door lock/unlock function by  
pushing the door handle request switch.  
Select the “Language & Units”key. Select the key  
of the setting you wish to change.  
Select the “English” key or the “Français” key to  
change the language shown on the display.  
Return All Settings to Default: Select to  
change all the comfort and convenience systems  
to their default settings.  
If you select the “Français” key, French language  
will be displayed, so please use the French Own-  
er’s Manual. To obtain a French Owner’s Manual,  
please see “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual Or-  
der Information” in the “Technical and consumer  
information” section.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio settings  
For audio settings, refer to “Audio System” in this  
section.  
Phone settings  
For phone settings refer to “Bluetoothா Hands-  
Free Phone System with Navigation System” in  
this section.  
Bluetoothா settings  
For Bluetoothா phone settings, refer to  
“Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System with  
Navigation System” in this section.  
LHA1252  
LHA1253  
For Bluetoothா audio settings, refer to  
“Bluetoothா streaming audio” in this section.  
Select Units:  
Switch beeps  
Select the “US” (mi, °F, MPG) key or the “Metric”  
(km, °C, L/100 km) key to change the units  
shown on the display.  
With this option on (indicator light illuminated), a  
beep will sound if any control panel button is  
pressed.  
Volume & beeps settings  
Navigation volume  
For navigation volume settings, refer to the sepa-  
rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for infor-  
mation regarding these settings.  
Voice Recognition:  
BUTTON  
For Voice Recognition settings, refer to “NISSAN  
Voice Recognition system” in this section.  
To change the display brightness, press  
the  
change the display to the day  
night display.  
button. Pressing the button again will  
Phone volume  
Navigation settings  
or the  
For phone volume settings refer to “Bluetoothா  
Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation Sys-  
tem” in this section.  
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-  
er’s Manual for information regarding these set-  
tings.  
If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, the  
display will return to the previous display.  
4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so  
equipped)  
When the shift selector is shifted into the R  
(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows the  
view directly to the rear of the vehicle.  
● When washing the vehicle with high-  
pressure water, be sure not to spray it  
around the camera. Otherwise, water  
may enter the camera unit causing wa-  
ter condensation on the lens, a mal-  
function, fire or an electric shock.  
WARNING  
● The system is designed as an aid to the  
driver in detecting large stationary ob-  
jects to help avoid damaging the ve-  
hicle. The system will not detect small  
objects below the bumper, and may not  
detect objects close to the bumper or  
on the ground.  
● Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-  
sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-  
function or cause damage resulting in a  
fire or an electric shock.  
CAUTION  
● The RearView Monitor is a convenience  
but it is not a substitute for proper back-  
ing. Always turn and check that it is safe  
to do so before backing up. Always  
back up slowly.  
There is a plastic cover over the camera.  
Do not scratch the cover when cleaning  
dirt or snow from the cover.  
LHA1254  
Press and hold the  
button for more than  
two seconds to turn the display off. Press the  
button again to turn the display on.  
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED  
LINES  
● Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-  
tor differ from actual distance because  
a wide-angle lens is used.  
Lines which indicate the vehicle clearance and  
distances to objects with reference to the  
A
bumper line  
are displayed on the monitor.  
● Make sure that the trunk is securely  
closed when backing up.  
᭺
● Do not put anything on the rearview  
camera. The rearview camera is in-  
stalled beside the license plate light.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN  
PREDICTED AND ACTUAL  
DISTANCES  
The distance guide line and the vehicle width  
guide line should be used as a reference only  
when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. The  
distance viewed on the monitor is for reference  
only and may be different than the actual distance  
between the vehicle and displayed objects.  
LHA0437  
They are indicated as reference distances to  
objects. The lines and colors in the display indi-  
A
cate distances from the back bumper line  
the illustration.  
in  
᭺
1
1.5 ft (0.5 m) red  
᭺
2
3 ft (1 m) yellow  
᭺
3
7 ft (2 m) green  
WHA1504  
᭺
4
10 ft (3 m) green  
Backing up on a steep uphill  
᭺
The vehicle clearance lines are wider than  
the actual clearance.  
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-  
tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide  
lines are shown closer than the actual distance.  
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the  
A
place  
, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on  
᭺
4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
B
B
the hill is the place  
. Note that any object on  
the hill is the place  
. Note that any object on  
᭺
᭺
the hill is viewed in the monitor farther than it  
appears.  
the hill is viewed in the monitor closer than it  
appears.  
WHA1505  
Backing up on a steep downhill  
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the  
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide  
lines are shown farther than the actual distance.  
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the  
A
place  
, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on  
᭺
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
the position  
if the object projects over the  
᭺
actual backing up course.  
LHA1272  
Type A  
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN  
The procedure for adjusting the quality of the  
screen differs depending on the type of screen  
present on the vehicle.  
For vehicles without a touch screen (Type A):  
WHA1506  
●
To adjust the Brightness and Contrast,  
press the ENTER button on the audio sys-  
tem repeatedly until the desired setting is  
displayed. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to  
adjust the display to the desired level.  
Backing up behind a projecting object  
C
The position  
᭺
is shown farther than the position  
᭺
B
C
in the display. However, the position  
is  
.
᭺
A
actually at the same distance as the position  
᭺
The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to  
4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast, and  
Color of the RearView Monitor while the  
vehicle is moving.  
●
●
The screen may flicker under fluorescent  
light. This is not a malfunction.  
The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-  
tor may differ somewhat from those of the  
actual object.  
OPERATING TIPS  
●
When the shift selector is shifted to R (Re-  
verse), the monitor screen automatically  
changes to the RearView Monitor mode.  
However, the radio can be heard.  
●
When the contrast of objects is low at night,  
pressing the SETTING button or ENTER  
button may not change the brightness.  
●
●
Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a  
dark place or at night.  
●
It may take some time until the RearView  
Monitor is displayed after the shift selector  
has been shifted to R (Reverse). Objects  
may be distorted momentarily until the Rear-  
View Monitor screen is displayed com-  
pletely. When the shift selector is returned to  
a position other than R (Reverse), it may take  
some time until the screen changes. Objects  
on the screen may be distorted until they are  
completely displayed.  
If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,  
the RearView Monitor may not display ob-  
jects. Clean the camera.  
LHA1238  
Type B  
●
Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to  
clean the camera. This will cause discolora-  
tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth  
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent  
and then wipe with a dry cloth.  
●
Do not adjust the Brightness or Contrast of  
the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is  
moving.  
For vehicles with a touch screen (Type B):  
●
●
Do not damage the camera as the monitor  
screen may be adversely affected.  
●
When the temperature is extremely high or  
low, the screen may not clearly display ob-  
jects. This is not a malfunction.  
●
To adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Display  
ON/OFF and Color of the RearView Moni-  
tor, press the SETTING button and then  
select the “Display” key with the RearView  
Monitor on. When the display adjustment  
screen appears, touch the “–” or “+” key on  
the desired item and adjust the level.  
Do not use body wax on the camera window.  
If body wax does get on the camera window,  
wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp-  
ened with mild detergent diluted with water.  
●
●
When strong light directly enters the cam-  
era, objects may not be displayed clearly.  
Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the  
screen. This is due to strong reflected light  
from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VENTS  
WHA0736  
WHA0737  
WHA0688  
Right and Left  
Center  
Rear (sedan, if so equipped)  
Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent  
slides.  
Open or close the vents by using the dial. Move  
the dial toward the  
to open the vents or  
toward the to close them.  
4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER  
(manual) (if so equipped)  
WARNING  
● The air conditioner cooling function op-  
erates only when the engine is running.  
● Do not leave children or adults who  
would normally require the assistance  
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets  
should also not be left alone. They  
could accidentally injure themselves or  
others through inadvertent operation of  
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,  
temperatures in a closed vehicle could  
quickly become high enough to cause  
severe or possibly fatal injuries to  
people or animals.  
WHA1407  
1. Fan speed control/system OFF dial  
2. Air flow control buttons  
3. Temperature control dial  
4. Air conditioner button  
5. Rear window defroster  
6. MAX A/C button  
CONTROLS  
● Do not use the recirculation mode for  
long periods as it may cause the interior  
air to become stale and the windows to  
fog up.  
Fan control dial  
The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and  
controls fan speed.  
Air flow control buttons  
7. Front windshield defrost button  
8. Air recirculation button  
The air flow control buttons allow you to select  
the air flow outlets.  
MAX — Air flows from center and side  
A/C  
vents with maximum cooling.  
— Air flows from center and side  
vents.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use the off position for normal heater or air con-  
ditioner operation.  
— Air flows from center and side  
vents and foot outlets.  
1. Press the button to the OFF position  
for normal heating.  
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.  
— Air flows from defroster outlets  
and foot outlets.  
Air conditioner button  
2. Press the  
air flow control button.  
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-  
tion.  
The button is provided only on vehicles equipped  
with an air conditioner.  
— Air flows mainly from defroster  
outlets.  
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-  
sired position between the middle and the  
hot position.  
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the  
desired position and push the  
turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light  
comes on when the air conditioner is operating.  
To turn off the air conditioner, push the  
button again.  
Temperature control dial  
button to  
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust  
the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the  
temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase  
the temperature, turn the dial to the right.  
Ventilation  
This mode directs outside air to the side and  
center ventilators.  
Air recirculation button  
The air conditioner cooling function oper-  
ates only when the engine is running.  
1. Press the  
2. Press the  
button to the OFF position.  
air flow control button.  
On position (Indicator light on):  
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.  
Rear window defroster switch  
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-  
tion.  
For more information about the rear window de-  
froster switch, see “Rear window and outside  
mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and  
controls” section of this manual.  
Press the  
button to the on position when:  
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-  
sired position.  
●
●
driving on a dusty road.  
to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-  
senger compartment.  
Defrosting or defogging  
HEATER OPERATION  
Heating  
This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to  
defrost/defog the windows.  
●
for maximum cooling when using the air con-  
ditioner.  
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot  
outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost  
outlets.  
1. Press the defrost/defog button  
.
Off position (Indicator light off):  
Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-  
ment and distributed through the selected outlet.  
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-  
tion.  
4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-  
sired position between the middle and the  
hot position.  
1. Press the  
2. Press the  
button to the OFF position. Operating tips  
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades  
air flow control button.  
and air inlet in front of the windshield. This  
improves heater operation.  
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-  
tion.  
●
To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-  
dows, turn the fan control dial to the highest  
setting and the temperature control to the  
full HOT position.  
AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION  
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-  
sired position.  
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the  
desired position, and push in the  
button to  
●
When the  
position is selected, the air Heating and defogging  
activate the air conditioner. When the air condi-  
tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions  
are added to the heater operation.  
conditioner automatically turns on (however,  
the indicator light on the  
This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-  
shield.  
button will  
not come on) if the outside temperature is  
more than 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode for  
more than one minute, the air conditioning  
system will continue to operate until the fan  
control dial is turned to OFF, the vehicle is  
shut off, or the A/C button is used to turn off  
the compressor even if the air flow control  
dial is turned to a position other than  
the  
which helps defog the windshield.  
The mode automatically turns off, al-  
lowing outside air to be drawn into the pas-  
senger compartment to further improve the  
defogging performance.  
1. Press the  
air flow control button.  
The air conditioner cooling function oper-  
ates only when the engine is running.  
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-  
tion.  
Cooling  
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-  
sired position between the middle and the  
hot position.  
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.  
1. Press the  
button to the OFF position.  
position. This dehumidifies the air  
●
When the  
position is selected, the air  
2. Press MAX A/C or  
button.  
air flow control  
conditioner automatically turns on if the out-  
side temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).  
This dehumidifies the air which helps defog  
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-  
tion.  
the windshield. The  
mode automati-  
cally turns off, allowing outside air to be  
drawn into the passenger compartment to  
further improve the defogging performance.  
4. Push the  
comes on.  
button. the indicator light  
Bi-level heating  
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side  
and center vents and to the front and rear floor  
outlets.  
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-  
sired position.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
For quick cooling when the outside tem-  
perature is high, push the button to  
the ON position. Be sure to return the  
to the OFF position for normal cooling. MAX  
A/C may be used for quick cooling.  
●
If the engine coolant temperature  
gauge indicates engine coolant tem-  
perature over the normal range, turn  
the air conditioner off. See “If your  
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of  
emergency” section of this manual.  
When the  
or  
are selected, the air  
conditioner automatically turns on (the indicator  
light will illuminate) if the outside temperature is  
more than 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air  
which helps defog the windshield. The  
mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air  
to be drawn into the passenger compartment to  
further improve the defogging performance.  
Dehumidified heating  
AIR FLOW CHARTS  
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.  
The following charts show the button and dial  
positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,  
cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation  
button should always be in the OFF posi-  
tion for heating and defrosting.  
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-  
sired position.  
1. Press the  
2. Press the  
button to the OFF position.  
air flow control button.  
Operating tips  
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-  
tion.  
●
Keep the windows and moonroof closed  
while the air conditioner is in operation.  
4. Push the  
comes on.  
button. The indicator light  
●
After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3  
minutes with the windows open to vent hot  
air from the passenger compartment. Then,  
close the windows. This allows the air con-  
ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.  
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-  
sired position.  
Dehumidified defogging  
●
●
The air conditioning system should be  
operated for approximately 10 minutes  
at least once a month. This helps pre-  
vent damage to the system due to lack  
of lubrication.  
This mode is used to defog the windows and  
dehumidify the air.  
1. Press the  
air flow control button.  
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-  
tion.  
A visible mist may be seen coming from the  
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air  
is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a  
malfunction.  
3. Press the  
comes on.  
button. The indicator light  
4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHA1408  
WHA1409  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHA1410  
WHA1411  
4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHA1412  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER  
(automatic) (if so equipped)  
● Do not use the recirculation mode for  
long periods as it may cause the interior  
air to become stale and the windows to  
fog up.  
Start the engine and operate the controls to  
activate the air conditioner.  
AUTOMATIC OPERATION  
Cooling or heating (auto)  
This mode may be normally used all year round as  
the system automatically works to keep a con-  
stant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan  
speed are also controlled automatically.  
WHA1171  
1. Driver temperature control dial  
2. Air flow control buttons  
3. Passenger temperature control dial  
4. DUAL button  
WARNING  
1. Push the AUTO button on.  
● The air conditioner cooling function op-  
erates only when the engine is running.  
2. Turn the driver’s side temperature control  
dial to the left or right to set the desired  
temperature. Driver and passenger tem-  
peratures can be set independently. Press  
DUAL or turn the passenger temperature  
control dial to the left or right to activate dual  
climate control functions. Turn the passen-  
ger’s side temperature control dial to the left  
or right to set the desired passenger’s tem-  
perature.  
● Do not leave children or adults who  
would normally require the assistance  
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets  
should also not be left alone. They  
could accidentally injure themselves or  
others through inadvertent operation of  
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,  
temperatures in a closed vehicle could  
quickly become high enough to cause  
severe or possibly fatal injuries to  
people or animals.  
5. Rear defrost button  
6. Front window defrost button  
7. Fan speed dial/system OFF button  
8. Air recirculation button  
9. A/C ON/OFF button  
10. AUTO button  
●
Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F  
(24°C) for normal operation.  
4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
The temperature of the passenger compart-  
ment will be maintained automatically. Air  
flow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/off  
are also controlled automatically.  
Rear window defroster switch  
Air flow control  
For more information about the rear window de-  
froster switch, see “Rear window and outside  
mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and  
controls” section of this manual.  
Push the air flow control buttons to manually  
control air flow and select the air outlet:  
— Air flows from center and side  
vents.  
— Air flows from center and side  
vents and foot outlets.  
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.  
— Air flows from defroster and foot  
outlets.  
— Air flows from defroster outlets.  
A visible mist may be seen coming from the  
vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is  
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-  
function.  
MANUAL OPERATION  
Fan speed control  
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging  
Turn the fan control dial  
left or right to  
manually control the fan speed.  
1. Push the defroster control button  
to  
turn the system on. The indicator light in the  
button will illuminate.  
Press the  
off.  
/OFF button to turn the system  
To turn system off  
2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right  
to set the desired temperature.  
Push the AUTO button to return to automatic  
control of the fan speed.  
Press the  
/OFF button.  
●
To quickly remove ice from the outside of the  
windows, turn the manual fan control to HI.  
OPERATING TIPS  
Air recirculation  
●
When the engine coolant temperature and  
outside air temperature are low, the air flow  
from the foot outlets may not operate for a  
maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is  
not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-  
ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets  
will operate normally.  
●
As soon as possible after the windshield is  
clean, push the AUTO button to return to the  
auto mode.  
Push the air recirculation button  
culate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator  
light on the switch will come on.  
to recir-  
The air recirculation button will not be activated  
when the air conditioner is in DEF or  
●
When the  
control is activated, the air  
conditioner will automatically be turned on at  
outside temperatures above 36°F (2°C). This  
dehumidifies the air which helps defog the  
windshield. The air recirculation mode auto-  
matically turns off, allowing outside air to be  
drawn into the passenger compartment to  
further improve the defogging performance.  
mode.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER  
AUDIO SYSTEM (if so equipped)  
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-  
hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with  
the environment in mind.  
RADIO  
With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON posi-  
tion, press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) knob  
to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with  
the engine not running, the ignition should be  
placed in the ACC position.  
This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s  
ozone layer.  
Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-  
quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-  
tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants  
will cause severe damage to your air conditioner  
system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant  
and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and  
consumer information” section of this manual.  
Radio reception is affected by station signal  
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-  
ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-  
ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality  
normally are caused by these external influences.  
Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-  
hicle may influence radio reception quality.  
A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-  
mentally friendly” air conditioning system.  
WHA0791  
The sunload sensor, located on the top of the  
instrument panel on the driver’s side, helps the  
system maintain a constant temperature. Do not  
put anything on or around this sensor.  
Radio reception  
WARNING  
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with  
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-  
dio reception. These circuits are designed to  
extend reception range, and to enhance the qual-  
ity of that reception.  
The air conditioner system contains re-  
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid  
personal injury, any air conditioner ser-  
vice should be done only by an experi-  
enced technician with proper equipment.  
However, there are some general characteristics  
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect  
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even  
when the finest equipment is used. These char-  
acteristics are completely normal in a given re-  
ception area and do not indicate any malfunction  
in your NISSAN radio system.  
4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reception conditions will constantly change be-  
cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,  
signal distance and interference from other ve-  
hicles can work against ideal reception. De-  
scribed below are some of the factors that can  
affect your radio reception.  
(usually in conjunction with increased distance  
from the station transmitter), static or flutter can  
be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the  
treble control to reduce treble response.  
SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so  
equipped)  
When the satellite radio is used for the first time  
or the battery has been replaced, the satellite  
radio may not work properly. This is not a mal-  
function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite  
radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or  
large building for satellite radio to receive all of  
the necessary data.  
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective  
characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected  
signals reach the receiver at the same time. The  
signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-  
mentary flutter or loss of sound.  
Some cellular phones or other devices may  
cause interference or a buzzing noise to come  
from the audio system speakers. Storing the de-  
vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-  
nate the noise.  
AM RADIO RECEPTION  
No satellite radio reception is available and “NO  
SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option is  
selected unless optional satellite receiver and  
antenna are installed and an XMா satellite radio  
service subscription is active. Satellite radio is  
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.  
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can  
bend around objects and skip along the ground.  
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the  
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of  
these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-  
ject to interference as they travel from transmitter  
to receiver.  
FM RADIO RECEPTION  
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi  
(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM  
having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-  
nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM  
station reception even if the FM station is within  
25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is  
directly related to the distance between the  
transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-  
of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-  
acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect  
off objects.  
Satellite radio performance may be affected if  
cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio  
signal.  
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing  
through freeway underpasses or in areas with  
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several  
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in  
areas where no obstacles exist.  
If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite  
antenna.  
A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can  
affect satellite radio performance. Remove the  
ice to restore satellite radio reception.  
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical  
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.  
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from  
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade  
and/or drift.  
Static and flutter: During signal interference from  
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
CDs that are in poor condition or are  
dirty, scratched or covered with finger-  
prints may not work properly.  
Compact disc (CD) player (models  
without Navigation System)  
The following CDs may not work prop-  
erly:  
CAUTION  
● Do not force a compact disc into the CD  
insert slot. This could damage the CD  
and/or CD player.  
● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)  
● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)  
● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)  
● Only one CD can be loaded into the CD  
player at a time.  
●
Do not use the following CDs as they  
may cause the CD player to malfunc-  
tion:  
●
●
Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)  
round discs that have the “COMPACT  
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc  
or packaging.  
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter  
● CDs that are not round  
During cold weather or rainy days, the  
player may malfunction due to the hu-  
midity. If this occurs, remove the CD  
and dehumidify or ventilate the player  
completely.  
● CDs with a paper label  
● CDs that are warped, scratched, or  
have abnormal edges  
●
●
This audio system can only play pre-  
recorded CDs. It has no capability to  
record or burn CDs.  
●
●
The player may skip while driving on  
rough roads.  
LHA0099  
The CD player sometimes cannot func-  
tion when the compartment tempera-  
ture is extremely high or low.  
Decrease/increase the temperature  
before use.  
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS  
If the CD cannot be played, one of the  
following messages will be displayed.  
●
Do not expose the CD to direct sun-  
light.  
4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CHECK DISC:  
●
During cold weather or rainy days, the  
player may malfunction due to the hu-  
midity. If this occurs, remove the  
CD/DVD and dehumidify or ventilate  
the player completely.  
● Recordable compact discs (DVD R,  
DVD R DL)  
● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-  
rectly (the label side is facing up,  
etc.).  
● Rewritable  
compact  
discs  
(DVD RW, DVD RW DL)  
●
Do not use the following CDs/DVDs as  
they may cause the CD/DVD player to  
malfunction.  
● Confirm that the CD is not bent or  
warped and it is free of scratches.  
●
●
The player may skip while driving on  
rough roads.  
PRESS EJECT:  
The CD/DVD player sometimes cannot  
function when the passenger compart-  
ment temperature is extremely high.  
Decrease the temperature before use.  
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs  
This is an error due to excessive tem-  
perature inside the player. Remove the  
CD by pressing the EJECT button. After  
a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD  
can be played when the temperature of  
the player returns to normal.  
● CDs/DVDs that are not round  
● CDs/DVDs with a paper label  
●
Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)  
round discs that have the “COMPACT  
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” or “DVD Video”  
logo on the disc or packaging.  
● CDs/DVDs  
that  
are  
warped,  
scratched, or have abnormal edges  
● This audio system can only play pre-  
recorded CDs/DVDs. It has no capa-  
bilities to record or burn CDs/DVDs.  
UNPLAYABLE:  
●
●
Do not expose the CD/DVD to direct  
sunlight.  
The file is unplayable in this audio sys-  
tem (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped)  
CD).  
●
If the CD/DVD cannot be played, one of  
the following messages will be dis-  
played.  
CDs/DVDs that are of poor quality,  
dirty, scratched, covered with finger-  
prints, or that have pinholes may not  
work properly.  
CD/DVD combination player (models  
with Navigation System)  
Disc Read Error:  
● Confirm that the CD/DVD is inserted  
correctly (the label side is facing up,  
etc.).  
●
Do not force a disc into the CD/DVD  
insert slot. This could damage the  
CD/DVD player.  
●
The following CDs/DVDs are not guar-  
anteed to play:  
● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)  
● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)  
● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)  
● Confirm that the CD/DVD is not bent  
or warped and it is free of scratches.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Please Eject Disc:  
●
This copyright protected technology  
cannot be used without a permit from  
Macrovision Corporation. It is limited  
to personal use, etc., as long as the  
permit from Macrovision Corporation  
is not issued.  
This error may be due to the tempera-  
ture inside the player getting too high.  
Remove the CD/DVD by pushing the  
EJECT button, and after a short time  
reinsert the CD/DVD. The CD/DVD can  
be played when the temperature of the  
player returns to normal. If the error  
persists, consult your local dealership.  
●
●
●
Modifying or disassembling is prohib-  
ited.  
Dolby digital is manufactured under li-  
cense from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.  
Unplayable File:  
● The file may be copy protected.  
Dolby and the double D mark “  
”
● The file is not MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A  
or DIVX type.  
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories,  
Inc.  
Region Invalid  
●
DTS and DTS Digital Surround “  
”
are registered trademarks of Digital  
Theater Systems, Inc.  
● The DVD is not for region 1 or all  
regions.  
Universal Serial Bus (USB) memory (if  
so equipped)  
● Use DVDs with a region code “1”,  
“ALL” or “1 included” for your DVD  
entertainment system. (The region  
A
This system supports various USB memory  
sticks, USB hard drives and iPodா players. There  
are some USB devices which may not be sup-  
ported with this system.  
code  
is displayed as a small sym-  
᭺
LHA0484  
bol printed on the top of the DVD  
Copyright and trademark  
B
.) This vehicle-installed DVD  
᭺
player cannot play DVDs with a re-  
gion code other than “1” or “ALL”.  
●
The technology protected by the U.S.  
patent and other intellectual property  
●
Make sure that the USB device is connected  
correctly into the USB connector.  
rights  
owned  
by  
Macrovision  
Corporation and other right holders is  
adopted for this system.  
●
Do not force the memory stick or USB cable  
into the USB connector.  
4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
During cold weather or rainy days, the player  
may malfunction due to the humidity. If this  
occurs, remove the USB memory stick and  
dehumidify or ventilate the player com-  
pletely.  
●
●
●
Do not connect the USB device if the con-  
nector or cable is wet. Allow the cable  
and/or connectors to dry completely before  
connecting the USB device.  
●
If you are using an iPodா (3rd Generation  
with Dock connector), do not use very long  
names for the song title, album name or artist  
name to avoid the iPodா resetting itself.  
Large video podcast files cause slow re-  
sponses in the iPodா. The vehicle center  
display may momentarily black out, but it will  
soon recover.  
iPodா is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in  
the U.S. and other countries.  
●
●
The player sometimes cannot function when  
the passenger compartment temperature is  
extremely high. Decrease the temperature  
before use.  
Bluetoothா streaming audio (if so  
equipped)  
If the iPodா automatically selects large video  
podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the  
vehicle center display may momentarily  
black out, but it will soon recover.  
●
Some Bluetoothா audio devices may not be  
recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.  
Do not leave the USB memory in a place  
prone to static electricity or where the air  
conditioner blows directly. The data in the  
USB memory may be damaged.  
●
It is necessary to set up the wireless con-  
nection between a compatible Bluetoothா  
audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetoothா  
module before using the Bluetoothா audio.  
●
●
Audiobooks may not play in the same order  
as they appear on the iPodா.  
●
●
Prepare the USB device by yourself be-  
cause it is not equipped with the vehicle.  
The iPodா nano (1st Generation) may re-  
main in fast forward or rewind mode if it is  
connected during a seek operation. In this  
case, please manually reset the iPodா.  
●
●
Operating procedure of the Bluetoothா au-  
dio will vary depending on the devices. Make  
sure how to operate your audio device be-  
fore using it with this system.  
The USB device cannot be formatted with  
this system. If you want to format the USB  
memory, use your personal computer.  
●
●
Partitioned USB devices may not be played  
correctly.  
●
●
The iPodா nano (2nd Generation) will con-  
tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is discon-  
nected during a seek operation.  
The Bluetoothா audio may be stopped under  
the following conditions:  
Some characters used in other languages  
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed  
properly on the vehicle center screen.  
NISSAN recommends using English lan-  
guage characters with USB devices.  
● Receiving a call on the Hands-Free  
Phone System.  
An incorrect song title may appear when the  
Play Mode is changed while using the iPodா  
nano (2nd generation).  
● Checking the connection to the hands-  
free phone.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
Do not place the Bluetoothா audio device in  
an area surrounded by metal or far away from  
the in-vehicle Bluetoothா module to prevent  
tone quality degradation and wireless con-  
nection disruption.  
●
●
Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency  
is the rate at which the samples of a signal  
are converted from analog to digital (A/D  
conversion) per second.  
Compact Disc with MP3 or WMA  
(models without Navigation System)  
Terms:  
Multisession — Multisession is one of the  
methods for writing data to media. Writing  
data once to the media is called a single  
session, and writing more than once is called  
a multisession.  
●
MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures  
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the  
most well-known compressed digital audio  
file format. This format allows for near “CD  
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of  
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an  
audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the  
file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with  
virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3  
compression removes the redundant and  
irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the  
human ear doesn’t hear.  
●
●
While an audio device is connected through  
the Bluetoothா wireless connection, the bat-  
tery power of the device may discharge  
quicker than usual.  
●
ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the  
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that  
contains information about the digital music  
file such as song title, artist, encoding bit  
rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-  
mation is displayed on the Artist/song title  
line on the display.  
This system supports the Bluetoothா Audio  
Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).  
BLUETOOTH௡ is a  
trademark owned by  
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,  
U.S.A. and licensed  
to Clarion.  
* Windowsா and Windows Mediaா are regis-  
tered trademarks and trademarks in the United  
States of America and other countries of Mi-  
crosoft Corporation of the USA.  
●
WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a  
compressed audio format created by Mi-  
crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA  
codec offers greater file compression than  
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more  
digital audio tracks in the same amount of  
space when compared to MP3s at the same  
level of quality.  
●
Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of  
bits per second used by a digital music file.  
The size and quality of a compressed digital  
audio file is determined by the bit rate used  
when encoding the file.  
4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback order:  
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA  
files is as illustrated.  
●
●
●
The names of folders not containing MP3 or  
WMA files are not shown in the display.  
If there is a file in the top level of the disc,  
“Root Folder” is displayed.  
The playback order is the order in which the  
files were written by the writing software.  
Therefore, the files might not play in the  
desired order.  
WHA1078  
Playback order chart  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specification chart:  
Supported media  
CD, CD-R, CD-RW  
Supported file systems  
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.  
Version  
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5  
MP3  
Sampling frequency  
Bit rate  
8 kHz - 48 kHz  
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR  
Supported  
versions*1  
WMA  
Version  
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9  
Sampling frequency  
Bit rate  
32 kHz - 48 kHz  
48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR  
Tag information  
Folder levels  
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)  
Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)  
128 characters  
Text character number limitation  
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:  
UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)  
Displayable character codes*2  
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.  
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.  
4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting guide:  
Symptom  
Cause and Countermeasure  
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.  
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.  
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.  
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.  
Cannot play  
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.  
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for  
folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.  
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.  
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.  
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.  
Poor sound quality  
Bit rate may be too low.  
It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.  
before the music starts  
playing.  
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the  
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.  
Music cuts off or skips  
Skipping with high bit rate  
files  
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.  
Moves immediately to the  
next song when playing  
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there  
will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.  
Songs do not play back in  
the desired order  
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
AAC/M4A  
—
Advanced Audio Coding  
●
ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the  
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that  
contains information about the digital music  
file such as song title, artist, album title,  
encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.  
ID3 tag information is displayed on the  
Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.  
CD, DVD or USB with Compressed  
Audio Files (models with Navigation  
System)  
(AAC) is a lossy audio compression format.  
Audio files that have been encoded with  
AAC are generally smaller in size and deliver  
a higher quality of sound than MP3.  
The file types supported by this system are MP3,  
WMA, AAC/M4A and ATRAC3.  
●
●
ATRAC3, ATRAC3 Plus — Adaptive Trans-  
form Acoustic Coding (ATRAC) is a lossy  
audio compression format developed by  
Sony.  
Explanation of terms:  
* Windowsா, Windows Mediaா and Windows  
Vistaா are registered trademarks or trademarks  
of Microsoft Corporation in the United States of  
America and/or other countries.  
●
MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures  
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the  
most well known compressed digital audio  
file format. This format allows for near “CD  
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of  
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an  
audio track can reduce the file size by ap-  
proximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1 kHz,  
Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no percep-  
tible loss in quality. The compression re-  
duces certain parts of sound that seem in-  
audible to most people.  
Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of  
bits per second used by a digital music file.  
The size and quality of a compressed digital  
audio file is determined by the bit rate used  
when encoding the file.  
●
●
Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency  
is the rate at which the samples of a signal  
are converted from analog to digital (A/D  
conversion) per second.  
Multisession — Multisession is one of the  
methods for writing data to media. Writing  
data once to the media is called a single  
session, and writing more than once is called  
a multisession.  
●
WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a  
compressed audio format created by Mi-  
crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA  
codec offers greater file compression than  
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more  
digital audio tracks in the same amount of  
space when compared to MP3s at the same  
level of quality.  
4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback order:  
Music playback order of a CD, DVD or USB  
device with compressed audio files is as illus-  
trated.  
●
The folder names of folders not containing  
compressed audio files are not shown in the  
display.  
●
●
If there is a file in the top level of the  
disc/USB, “Root Folder” is displayed.  
The playback order is the order in which the  
files were written by the writing software, so  
the files might not play in the desired order.  
WHA1374  
Playback order chart  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specification chart:  
Supported media  
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD R, DVD RW, DVD R DL, USB 2.0  
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD R, DVD RW, DVD R DL, ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2,  
Romeo, Joliet  
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.  
* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vistaா operating system-based com-  
puter) are not supported.  
Supported file systems  
UDF Bridge (UDF 1.02 + ISO9660), UDF 1.5, UDF 2.0  
* VDF 1.5/VDF 2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.  
USB memory: FAT16, FAT32  
Version  
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5  
MP3  
Sampling frequency  
Bit rate  
8 kHz - 48 kHz  
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4  
WMA*2  
Version  
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9  
Supported  
versions*1  
Sampling frequency  
Bit rate  
32 kHz - 48 kHz  
32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4  
AAC  
Sampling frequency  
Bit rate  
8 kHz - 96 kHz  
16 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4  
ATRAC  
Version  
ATRAC3, ATRAC3 Plus  
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER 2.4 (MP3 only)  
Tag information (Song title and artist name)  
WMA tag (WMA only)  
Folder levels  
Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)  
128 characters  
Text character number limitation  
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM  
Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF 16 BOM Little Endian), 07: SHIFT-JIS  
Displayable character codes*3  
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.  
*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.  
*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.  
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.  
4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting guide:  
Symptom  
Cause and Countermeasure  
Check if the CD/DVD/USB device was inserted correctly.  
Check if the CD/DVD is scratched or dirty.  
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.  
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.  
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.  
Cannot play  
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.AAC”, “.M4A” or “.AA3” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of charac-  
ters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.  
Check if the disc or file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of the compressed audio file writ-  
ing application or other text editing applications.  
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.  
Check if the CD/DVD/USB device is protected by copyright.  
Check if the CD/DVD is scratched or dirty.  
Poor sound quality  
It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the CD/DVD/USB device, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts  
before the music starts  
playing.  
playing.  
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the  
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.  
Music cuts off or skips  
Skipping with high bit rate  
files  
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.  
Moves immediately to the  
next song when playing  
If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like “.MP3”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the  
player will skip to the next song.  
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.  
Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on the USB device.  
Songs do not play back in  
the desired order  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Compressed Video Files (models with  
Navigation System)  
Explanation of terms:  
●
DivX – DivX refers to the DivXா codec  
owned by Div, Inc. used for a lossy compres-  
sion of video based on MPEG-4.  
●
AVI – AVI stands for Audio Video Interleave.  
It is standard file format originated by Mi-  
crosoft Corporation. A .divx encoded file can  
be saved into the .avi file format for playback  
on this system if it meets the requirements  
stated in the table in this section. However,  
all .avi files are not playable on this system  
since different encodings can be used other  
than the DivXா codec.  
●
●
ASF – ASF stands for Advanced Systems  
Format. It is file format owned by Microsoft  
Corporation. Note: Only .asf files that meet  
the requirements stated in the table in this  
section can be played.  
Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of  
bits per second used by a digital video files.  
The size and quality of a compressed digital  
audio file is determined by the bit rate used  
when encoding the file.  
4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Requirements for Supporting Video Playback:  
Media  
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD, DVD R, DVD RW, DVD RW DL, USB 2.0 Memory  
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD,  
DVD R, DVD RW, DVD RW  
DL  
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet, UDF Bridge (UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0  
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.  
* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported.  
* VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.  
File Systems  
USB Memory  
.divx, .avi  
FAT16, FAT32  
Video Codecs  
Audio Codecs  
Video Codec  
Audio Codec  
Maximum Average  
Maximum Peak  
Minimum  
DivX3, DivX4, DivX5, DivX6  
MP3, MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3, AC3, LPCM  
File Types  
Bit Rates  
Resolution  
.asf  
ISO-MPEG4  
G.726  
.divx, .avi  
.divx, .avi  
.asf  
4 Mbps  
8 Mbps  
32 x 32  
Maximum  
720 x 480  
32 x 32  
Minimum  
Maximum  
720 x 576  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12. RADIO button  
13. CD button  
14. DISP button  
15. PRESET A·B·C button  
16. Station select (1 - 6) buttons  
17.  
pause/mute button  
FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT  
DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)  
For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-  
tion precautions” earlier in this section.  
Audio main operation  
PWR/VOL control knob  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position, then press the PWR/VOL control knob.  
If you listen to the radio with the engine not  
running, place the ignition in the ACC position.  
The mode (radio or CD) that was playing imme-  
diately before the system was turned off resumes  
playing.  
LHA0728  
1. SEEK/TRACK button  
2. CD insert slot  
3. TUNE/FF·REW button  
6. CLOCK button  
7. AUX IN jack  
8. SCAN button  
9. RDM/RPT button  
10. PWR/VOL control knob  
11. AUX button  
When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.  
Pressing the PWR/VOL control knob again turns  
the system off.  
4.  
CD eject button  
Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to the right to  
increase volume or to the left to decrease volume.  
5. AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADE  
and BALANCE)  
4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AUDIO button (Bass, Treble, Fade and  
Balance)  
DISP (display) button:  
Clock operation  
Pressing the DISP (display) button will show text  
about CD information in the audio display.  
Pressing the CLOCK button displays the clock  
with the radio on or off. Press the CLOCK button  
again to turn off the clock display.  
Press the AUDIO button to change the mode as  
follows:  
If the text information is to long to fully be dis-  
played on the screen; press and hold the DISP  
button for longer than 1.5 seconds to scroll  
through the rest of the text.  
Clock set  
Bass → Treble → Fade → Balance → Beep  
ON/OFF → Audio → Bass  
1. Press and hold the CLOCK button for ap-  
proximately 2 seconds.  
To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance press  
the AUDIO button until the desired mode ap-  
CD display mode  
2. The display will show “H-Seek M-Tune”.  
pears  
in  
the  
display.  
Press  
the  
To change the text displayed while playing a CD  
with text, press the DISP button. The DISP button  
will allow you to scroll  
3. Press the SEEK/TRACK button  
TUNE/FF·REW  
or  
to adjust Bass  
or  
to adjust the hours.  
TUNE/FF·REW button  
and Treble to the desired level. You can also use  
the TUNE/FF·REW button to adjust Fade and  
Balance mode. Fade adjusts the sound level be-  
tween the front and rear speakers and Balance  
adjusts the sound between the right and left  
speaker.  
through CD text as follows: Track number and  
Track time → Album title → Song title.  
4. Press  
or  
to adjust the minutes.  
●
●
●
●
Track number displays the track number se-  
lected on the disc.  
5. Press the CLOCK button again to exit the  
clock set mode.  
Track time displays the amount of time the  
track has played.  
The display will return to the regular clock display  
after 10 seconds, or you may press the CLOCK  
button again to return to the regular clock display.  
To turn the Beep sound off or on, press the  
AUDIO button until Beep is displayed. Press the  
Album title displays the title of the CD being  
played.  
TUNE/FF·REW button  
or  
until the  
pause/mute button:  
desired mode is displayed. This turns on or turns  
off the beep sound when audio buttons are  
pressed.  
Song title displays the title of the selected  
CD track.  
To mute or pause the audio sound, press  
the  
pause/mute button. Press the  
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the  
desired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly  
until the radio or CD display reappears. Other-  
wise, the radio or CD display will automatically  
reappear after about 10 seconds.  
button again to resume the audio sound.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SEEK (tuning) button:  
2. Tune to the desired station using manual  
TUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any of  
the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)  
until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes  
when the select button is pressed.)  
FM/AM radio operation  
FM/AM band select:  
Press the SEEK/TRACK button  
or  
to tune from high to low or low to high frequen-  
cies and stop at the next broadcasting station.  
Pressing the RADIO button will change the band  
as follows:  
SCAN (tuning) button:  
3. The channel indicator will then come on and  
the sound will resume. Programming is now  
complete.  
AM ←→ FM  
When the RADIO button is pressed while the  
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the  
radio will come on at the station last played.  
Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in the  
display window. Scan tuning begins from low to  
high frequencies. Scan tuning stops for 5 sec-  
onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi-  
cient signal strength. When scanning, SCAN  
blinks in the display. Pressing the SCAN button  
again during this 5 second period stops scan  
tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.  
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-  
ner.  
If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO  
button is pressed, the compact disc will auto-  
matically be turned off and the last radio station  
played will come on.  
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse  
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that  
case, reset the desired stations.  
Station memory operations:  
Compact disc (CD) player operation  
The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates during  
FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast  
signal is weak, the radio automatically changes  
from stereo to monaural reception.  
18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio to  
the A, B and C preset button in any combination  
of AM or FM stations.  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position, and carefully insert the compact disc  
into the slot with the label side up. The compact  
disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts  
to play.  
TUNE/FF·REW (tuning)  
button:  
1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to change  
between storage banks. The radio displays  
the icon A, B or C to indicate which set of  
presets are active.  
If the radio is already operating, it automatically  
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.  
Press the TUNE/FF·REW button  
or  
for manual tuning. To move quickly through the  
channels, hold the tuning buttons down.  
CD button:  
When the CD button is pressed with a compact  
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns  
off and the last used compact disc starts to play.  
4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TUNE/FF·REW (Fast For-  
ward, Rewind) button:  
pause/mute button:  
CD EJECT:  
When the button is pressed with a com-  
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be  
ejected.  
To pause the sound while a CD is playing, press  
When the TUNE/FF·REW button  
or  
is pressed while the compact disc is playing, the  
compact disc plays at an increased speed while  
fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is  
released, the compact disc returns to normal play  
speed.  
the  
pause/mute button. “Pause” is shown  
on the display. Press the  
resume playing the CD.  
button again to  
When the  
button is pressed while the  
RDM/RPT button:  
compact disc is playing, the compact disc will  
eject and the system will turn off.  
When the RDM/RPT button is pressed while the  
compact disc is being played, the play pattern  
can be changed as follows:  
CD IN indicator:  
SEEK/TRACK button:  
A CD icon indicator appears on the display when  
a CD is loaded with the system on.  
Random Disc ←→ Repeat Track ←→ Normal  
Random Disc: The order of the tracks on the disc  
will be mixed during play.  
When  
is pressed while the compact disc  
is playing, the next track following the present  
one starts to play from the beginning.  
AUX (Auxiliary) button:  
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The  
AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard  
analog audio input such as from a portable cas-  
sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop com-  
puters.  
Press  
several times to skip several tracks.  
Repeat Track: The track that is currently playing  
will be repeated.  
Each time the button is pressed, the CD ad-  
vances 1 additional track. The track number ap-  
pears in the display window. (When the last track  
on the compact disc is skipped, the first track is  
played.)  
SCAN (CDs) button:  
Press the SCAN button less than 1.5 seconds to  
scan all tracks of the current disc for 10 seconds  
per track. The SCAN icon is flashed during scan  
mode.  
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device  
when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.  
When  
is pressed, the track being played  
several  
returns to the beginning. Press  
times to skip back several tracks. Each time the  
button is pressed the CD moves back 1 track.  
The scan mode is canceled once it scans through  
all tracks on the disc, or if the SCAN button is  
pressed during scan mode.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12. AM-FM button  
13. RPT button  
14. VOL/ON-OFF control knob  
15. RDM button  
*No satellite radio reception is available  
when the AUX button is pressed to ac-  
cess satellite radio stations unless op-  
tional satellite receiver and antenna are  
installed and an XMா satellite radio ser-  
vice subscription is active. Satellite ra-  
dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii  
and Guam.  
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH  
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so  
equipped)  
For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-  
tion precautions” earlier in this section.  
Audio main operation  
WHA1475  
VOL/ON·OFF control:  
1. SCAN button  
2. Station select (1 - 6) buttons  
3. CD insert slot  
4. Display screen  
5. iPod MENU button  
7. SEEK/CATEGORY button  
8. SETTING/ENTER button, SCROLL/  
TUNE knob  
9. AUX IN jack  
10. AUX button  
11. CD button  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position and push the VOL/ON·OFF control knob  
while the system is off to call up the mode (radio  
or CD) that was playing immediately before the  
system was turned off.  
6.  
CD eject button  
4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF  
control knob.  
Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the  
volume.  
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-  
sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. When this feature  
is active, the audio volume changes as the driving  
speed changes.  
Setting control knob (Audio, Display and  
Clock):  
Press the SETTING button to adjust the audio,  
display and clock settings as follows:  
LHA1270  
LHA1271  
Bass → Treble → Fade → Balance → Speed  
Sensitive Volume (SSV) (if so equipped) →  
Brightness → Contrast → On-screen Clock →  
Clock Adjust → Bass  
Once the desired setting is displayed on the  
screen, turn the SCROLL/TUNE knob left or right  
to adjust the chosen setting. Press the SETTING  
button to move to the next setting or wait approxi-  
mately five seconds to exit the setting adjustment  
mode.  
Audio settings:  
Speed Sensitive Volume (if so equipped):  
Adjust the bass, treble, fade and balance by  
selecting the desired setting with the SETTING  
button and then adjusting the level with the  
SCROLL/TUNE knob. Balance adjusts the  
sound between the left and right speakers. Fade  
adjusts the sound between the front and rear  
speakers.  
To change the Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)  
level from 1 to 5, or to turn the feature off entirely,  
choose the Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV) set-  
ting with the SETTING button and then adjust the  
level with the SCROLL/TUNE knob. Speed Sen-  
sitive Volume (SSV) adjusts the volume of the  
audio system as the vehicle’s driving speed  
changes.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LHA1272  
LHA1273  
LHA1274  
Display settings:  
On-screen Clock:  
Clock adjust:  
To adjust the brightness or contrast of the display  
screen, press the SETTING button until the cho-  
sen setting is displayed. Use the SCROLL/TUNE  
knob to adjust the display to the desired level.  
The clock is shown in the upper right corner of  
the screen. To turn this feature off or to re-enable  
the clock display after it has been turned off,  
press the SETTING button until the On-screen  
To adjust the time, perform the following steps:  
1. Press the SETTING button repeatedly until  
the Clock Adjust mode is displayed on the  
screen.  
Clock  
mode  
is  
displayed.  
Use  
the  
SCROLL/TUNE knob to toggle the feature on or  
off.  
2. The hours will begin blinking. Adjust the  
hours by turning the SCROLL/TUNE knob  
left or right and press the ENTER button.  
3. The minutes will begin blinking. Adjust the  
minutes by turning the SCROLL/TUNE knob  
left or right and press the ENTER button.  
4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iPodா MENU button  
When the AUX button is pressed while the igni-  
tion switch is in the ACC or ON position, the  
radio will come on at the station last played.  
SCAN tuning:  
This button can only be used for iPodா opera-  
tions. See “iPodா player operation without Navi-  
gation System” later in this section for details  
about the function of this button.  
Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-  
casting station for 5 seconds. SCAN will appear  
on the screen while the radio is scan tuning.  
The last station played will also come on when  
the VOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed to turn  
the radio on.  
Pressing the button again during this 5 second  
period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will  
remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is  
not pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning  
moves to the next station.  
FM/AM/SAT radio operation  
*When the AUX button is pressed, the satellite  
radio mode will be skipped unless an optional  
satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an  
XMா satellite radio service subscription is active.  
Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii  
and Guam.  
AM·FM button:  
Press the AM·FM button to change the band as  
follows:  
1 to 6 Station memory operations:  
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM  
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for  
FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for  
the AM band.  
If another audio source is playing when the  
AM·FM button is pressed, the audio source play-  
ing will automatically be turned off and the last  
radio station played will begin playing.  
If a compact disc is playing when the AUX button  
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be  
turned off and the last radio station played will  
come on.  
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2  
using the AM·FM select button.  
The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on  
the screen during FM stereo reception. When the  
stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio auto-  
matically changes from stereo to monaural re-  
ception.  
SCROLL/TUNE knob (Tuning):  
2. Tune to the desired station using manual,  
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any  
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –  
6) until a beep sound is heard.  
Turn the SCROLL/TUNE knob to the left or right  
for manual tuning.  
SEEK tuning:  
3. The channel indicator will then come on and  
the sound will resume. Programming is now  
complete.  
SAT band select:  
Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button  
Pressing the AUX button will change the band as  
follows:  
or  
to tune from low to high or high to low  
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-  
ner.  
frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting  
station.  
AUX → XM1* → XM2* → AUX (satellite, if so  
equipped)  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse  
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that  
case, reset the desired stations.  
SEEK/CATEGORY  
(Reverse or Fast Forward)  
button:  
Compact disc (CD) player operation  
Press and hold the SEEK/CATEGORY  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position and carefully insert the compact disc  
into the slot with the label side up. The compact  
disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts  
to play.  
button  
or  
for 1.5 seconds while the  
compact disc is playing to reverse or fast forward  
the track being played. The compact disc plays at  
an increased speed while reversing or fast for-  
warding. When the button is released, the com-  
pact disc returns to normal play speed.  
If the radio is already operating, it automatically  
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.  
SEEK/CATEGORY button:  
CD button:  
LHA1275  
When the CD button is pressed with the system  
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will  
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.  
CD/MP3 display mode:  
Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button  
while  
a CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the  
beginning of the current track. Press the  
While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain text  
may be displayed on the screen if the CD has  
been encoded with text information. Depending  
on how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, informa-  
tion such as Artist, Song and Folder will be dis-  
played.  
When the CD button is pressed with a compact  
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will  
automatically be turned off and the compact disc  
will start to play.  
SEEK/CATEGORY button  
several times  
to skip backward several tracks.  
Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button  
while  
a CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance  
one track. Press the SEEK/CATEGORY  
The track number and the total number of tracks  
in the current folder or on the current disc are  
displayed on the screen as well. For example, the  
first track out of fourteen total is currently playing.  
button  
several times to skip forward sev-  
eral tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped, the  
first track on the disc is played. If the last track in  
a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first  
track of the next folder is played.  
4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCROLL/TUNE knob (MP3/WMA CD  
only):  
RDM button:  
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device  
plugged into the AUX IN jack. The AUX button is  
also used to switch the audio system to a source  
plugged into the USB input jack in the center  
console. When a device is plugged into the AUX  
IN jack while another device is plugged into the  
USB input jack, the AUX button is used to toggle  
between the two functions.  
When the RDM button is pressed while a com-  
pact disc is playing, the play pattern can be  
changed as follows:  
If an MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is play-  
ing, turn the SCROLL/TUNE knob to change  
folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back a  
folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a  
folder.  
CD:  
1 DISC RDM ←→ OFF  
CD with MP3 or WMA:  
1 DISC RDM → 1 FOLDER RDM → OFF  
1 DISC RDM: all tracks on the disc will be played  
randomly.  
RPT button:  
For more information about the USB input jack,  
see “USB interface” in this section.  
When the RPT button is pressed while a com-  
pact disc is playing, the play pattern can be  
changed as follows:  
EJECT button:  
When the  
button is pressed with a com-  
CD:  
1 FOLDER RDM: all tracks in the current folder  
will be played randomly.  
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and  
the last source will be played.  
1 TRK RPT ←→ OFF  
CD with MP3 or WMA:  
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The  
indicator on the display will turn off.  
When the  
button is pressed twice with a  
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be  
ejected further for easier CD removal. If the disc  
is not removed within 20 seconds, the disc will  
reload.  
1 FOLDER RPT → 1 TRK RPT → OFF  
1 TRK RPT: the current track will be repeated.  
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on  
the screen unless no pattern is applied.  
AUX button:  
1 FOLDER RPT: the current folder will be re-  
peated.  
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The  
AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard  
analog audio input such as from a portable cas-  
sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop  
computer.  
Additional features  
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-  
cator on the display will turn off.  
For more information about the USB interface  
available with this system, see “USB interface  
(models without Navigation System)” in this sec-  
tion.  
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on  
the screen unless no pattern is applied.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11.  
button  
*No satellite radio reception is available  
when the XM button is pressed to ac-  
cess satellite radio stations unless op-  
tional satellite receiver and antenna are  
installed and an XMா satellite radio ser-  
vice subscription is active. Satellite ra-  
dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii  
and Guam.  
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH CD/DVD  
PLAYER (if so equipped)  
For all operation precautions, see ЉAudio opera-  
tion precautionsЉ in this section.  
Audio main operation  
VOL/ON·OFF control:  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position and push the VOL/ON·OFF control knob  
while the system is off to call up the mode that  
was playing immediately before the system was  
turned off.  
LHA1391  
1. OPEN/TILT button (Screen tilts down to  
expose CD/DVD insert slot)  
2. Display screen  
3. SETTING button  
4. AUDIO button/control knob  
5. Station select (1 - 6) buttons  
6.  
Seeking button  
7. VOL/ON·OFF control knob  
8. DISC·AUX button  
9. XM button*  
To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF  
control knob.  
Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the  
volume.  
10. FM·AM button  
4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)  
for audio. The audio volume changes as the driv-  
ing speed changes.  
AUDIO control knob (Bass, Treble, Bal-  
ance and Fade):  
Press the AUDIO control knob to change the  
mode as follows:  
Bass → Treble → Balance → Fade  
To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, press  
the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode  
appears in the display. Turn the tuning knob to  
adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You  
can also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade and  
Balance modes. Fade adjusts the sound level  
between the front and rear speakers and Balance  
adjusts the sound between the right and left  
speakers.  
LHA1236  
LHA1256  
Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV):  
To change the SSV mode from OFF to 5, press  
the SETTING button. Select the “Audio” key to  
display the audio settings screen. Select the “–”  
key or “+” key to change the SSV level.  
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the  
desired level, press the AUDIO control knob re-  
peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears.  
If the control knob is not pressed for approxi-  
mately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will  
automatically reappear.  
While in this screen you can also adjust the other  
audio settings by selecting the corresponding  
key.  
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the  
desired level, select the “Back” key.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
●
●
Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the  
song name.  
Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the  
album name.  
Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the  
artist’s name.  
Some of this text might not display while playing a  
regular CD.  
FM/AM/SAT radio operation  
FM/AM band select:  
Pressing the FM·AM button will change the band  
as follows:  
LHA1257  
LHA1258  
Display album cover art:  
CD, DVD or USB with compressed audio  
files  
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM  
When the FM·AM button is pressed while the  
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the  
radio will come on at the station last played.  
When an audio source encoded with album  
cover art is played, the album cover art can be  
displayed on the screen. To toggle this feature on  
or off, touch the “Display Album Cover Art” key.  
When the feature is activated, the amber indica-  
tor next to the word ON will illuminate.  
While listening to a CD or compressed audio  
files, certain text might be able to be displayed  
(when CD encoded with text is being used).  
The last station played will also come on when  
the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.  
Depending on how the CD or compressed audio  
files are encoded, the following text might be  
displayed:  
If a compact disc is playing when the FM·AM  
button is pressed, the compact disc will auto-  
matically be turned off and the last radio station  
played will come on.  
●
Folder displays the name of the current  
folder being accessed.  
●
File displays the name of the file currently  
playing.  
4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The FM stereo indicator STEREO will illuminate  
during FM stereo reception. When the stereo  
broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automati-  
cally change from stereo to monaural reception.  
TUNE/FOLDER (Tuning) knob:  
2. Tune to the desired station using  
the  
seeking button. Press and  
To manually tune the radio, turn the  
TUNE/FOLDER knob to the right or left.  
hold any of the desired station memory but-  
tons (1 – 6) until the preset number is up-  
dated on the display and the sound is briefly  
muted.  
Seeking button:  
XM band select:  
Press the XM button to change the band as  
follows:  
For AM or FM:  
3. The channel indicator will then come on and  
the sound will resume. Programming is now  
complete.  
Press the  
tune from high to low frequencies and stop at the  
next broadcasting station. Press the side  
of the seeking button to tune from low to high  
frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting  
station.  
side of the seeking button to  
XM1* → XM2* → XM3* → XM1 (satellite, if so  
equipped)  
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-  
ner.  
When the XM button is pressed while the ignition  
switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will  
come on at the station last played.  
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse  
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that  
case, reset the desired stations.  
For XM:  
The last station played will also come on when  
the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.  
Press the  
or  
side of the seeking  
List (AM and FM)  
button to go to the first channel of the previous or  
next category.  
*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite  
radio reception will not be available unless an  
optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-  
stalled and an XMா satellite radio service sub-  
scription is active. Satellite radio is not available  
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.  
Select the “List” key to see a list of the presets in  
the AM, FM1 or FM2 preset banks.  
1 to 6 Station memory operations:  
Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve  
stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6  
for FM2). Eighteen channels can be set for the  
XM radio (6 for XM1, 6 for XM2, 6 for XM3 – if so  
equipped).  
If a compact disc is playing when the XM button  
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be  
turned off and the last radio station played will  
come on.  
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2  
using the FM·AM select button, or choose  
the satellite band XM1, XM2 or XM3 using  
the XM button.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– Turn the Alert ON to indicate whenever a  
favorite artist or song is playing on XM.  
The audio system must be playing XM  
radio for this feature to work.  
– Delete a favorite artist or song.  
●
●
Categories – Displays a category list for XM  
radio. Select a category to select the first  
channel for that category.  
Direct Tune – Tune to a channel by entering  
the channel number.  
Radio data system (RDS):  
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data  
information service transmitted by some radio  
stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-  
rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but  
many stations are now considering broadcasting  
RDS data.  
LHA1375  
LHA1413  
Menu (XM, if so equipped)  
Select the “Menu” key to see a list of options:  
Compact disc (CD) player operation  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position. The CD/DVD insert slot is located be-  
hind the display screen. To insert a CD, press the  
OPEN/TILT button on the audio unit. The display  
screen will automatically move down to expose  
the CD/DVD insert slot. Insert the CD into the  
slot with the label side facing up. The CD will be  
guided automatically into the slot and begin play-  
ing. To return the display screen to its upright  
position after the CD is inserted, press the  
OPEN/TILT button again.  
●
●
●
Preset List – Displays the list of presets.  
Press and hold the key on the touchscreen  
to save a preset.  
RDS can display:  
●
●
●
Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.  
Station name, such as “The Groove”.  
Customize Channel List – deselect chan-  
nels to skip while using the TUNE/FOLDER  
knob.  
Music or programming type such as “Clas-  
sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.  
Favorite Artist & Songs  
●
Station specific text.  
– Tags the current artist or song playing on  
XM as a favorite.  
If the station broadcasts RDS information, the  
text information is automatically displayed.  
If the radio is already operating, it will automati-  
cally turn off and the compact disc will play.  
4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the system has been turned off while the com-  
pact disc was playing, pressing the  
VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the compact  
disc.  
the button is pressed. (When the last track on the  
compact disc is skipped through, the first track  
will be played.)  
Seeking (Rewind and  
Fast Forward) button:  
DISC·AUX button:  
When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the  
system off and the compact disc loaded, the  
system will turn on and the compact disc will start  
to play.  
Press and hold the  
button or the  
while a compact disc is playing; the compact disc  
will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When  
the button is released, the compact disc will  
return to normal play speed.  
side of the seeking  
side of the seeking button  
When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the  
compact disc loaded but the radio playing, the  
radio will automatically be turned off and the  
compact disc will start to play.  
TUNE/FOLDER knob  
LHA1258  
While playing a CD with compressed audio files,  
turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob right or left to play  
the next or previous folder.  
CD menu  
Seeking button:  
Touch the “Menu” key on the display while a CD  
or CD with compressed audio files is playing to  
bring up a list of options. Depending on the type  
of CD being played, the following options may be  
available:  
When the  
side of the seeking button is  
pressed while a compact disc is playing, the track  
being played returns to its beginning. Press sev-  
eral times to skip back through tracks. The com-  
pact disc will go back the number of times the  
button is pressed.  
When the  
side of the seeking button is  
pressed while the compact disc is playing, the  
next track will start to play from its beginning.  
Press several times to skip through tracks. The  
compact disc will advance the number of times  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LHA1259  
LHA1262  
LHA1260  
Normal - Plays all tracks on the CD in sequential  
order until stopped.  
●
Folder List  
●
Play Mode  
The folders on the disc are displayed. Select the  
key of a folder name to begin playing tracks from  
that folder.  
This option allows you to alter the play pattern of  
the CD. Touch the key of the mode you wish to  
apply. The modes change the play pattern as  
follows:  
1 Track Repeat - the current track is repeated.  
1 Disc Random- tracks from the entire disc are  
played randomly.  
1 Folder Repeat (compressed audio files CD  
only) - the current folder is repeated.  
1 Folder Random (compressed audio files CD  
only) - tracks from the current folder are played  
randomly.  
4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LHA1261  
LHA1267  
LHA1415  
●
Track List  
●
●
Title Text Priority  
CD EJECT button:  
The tracks on the disc are displayed. Select the  
key of a track name to begin playing that track.  
Record to Music Box, Automatic Recording,  
Recording Quality  
To eject a CD, press the OPEN/TILT button to  
lower the display screen. Once the screen is in  
the lowered position, press the  
For more information about these options, see  
“Music Box™ Hard Drive Audio System” in this  
section.  
button to  
1
the left of the CD/DVD insert slot . The CD will  
᭺
be ejected.  
When the  
button is pressed while the CD  
is being played, the CD will eject and the system  
will turn off.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before connecting a device to the auxiliary input  
jacks, turn off the power of the portable device.  
With a compatible device connected to the aux-  
iliary input jacks, press the DISC·AUX button  
repeatedly until the AUX mode appears in the  
display. The output from the device will be played  
through the display (when the vehicle is in the (P)  
Park position and the parking brake engaged)  
and audio system.  
WHA1532  
WHA1393  
AUX (auxiliary) input jacks  
AUX settings  
The auxiliary input jacks are located inside the  
Select the “Settings” key.  
1
center console  
. NTSC compatible devices  
᭺
The display mode can be set to Normal, Wide or  
Cinema. The volume setting can be set to Low,  
Medium or High.  
such as video games, camcorders and portable  
video players can be connected to the auxiliary  
input jacks. Audio devices, such as some MP3  
players, can also be connected to the system  
through the auxiliary input jacks.  
Additional features  
For more information about the iPodா player  
available with this system, see “iPodா player op-  
eration with Navigation System” in this section.  
The auxiliary input jacks are color coded for iden-  
tification purposes:  
●
●
●
Red – right channel audio input  
White – left channel audio input  
Yellow – video input  
For more information about the USB interface  
available with this system, see “USB interface  
with Navigation System” in this section.  
4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC (DVD)  
PLAYER OPERATION (models with  
Navigation System)  
CAUTION  
● Only operate the DVD while the vehicle  
engine is running. Operating the DVD  
for extended periods of time with the  
engine OFF can discharge the vehicle  
battery.  
Precautions  
Start the engine when using the DVD entertain-  
ment system.  
● Do not allow the system to get wet.  
Excessive moisture such as spilled liq-  
uids may cause the system to  
malfunction.  
Movies will not be shown on the front display  
while the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce  
driver distraction. Audio is available when a movie  
is played. To view movies on the front display,  
stop the vehicle in a safe location, move the shift  
selector to the P (Park) position and apply the  
parking brake.  
● While playing VIDEO-CD media, this  
DVD player does not guarantee com-  
plete functionality of all VIDEO-CD  
formats.  
LHA1394  
For more information about the Music Box feature  
available with this system, see “Music Box™ Hard  
Drive audio system” in this section.  
WARNING  
● The driver must not attempt to operate  
the DVD system or wear the head-  
phones while the vehicle is in motion so  
that full attention may be given to ve-  
hicle operation.  
For more information about the Bluetoothா  
streaming audio feature available with this sys-  
tem, see “Bluetoothா streaming audio” in this  
section.  
● Do not attempt to modify the system to  
display a movie on the front screen  
while the vehicle is being driven. Doing  
so may distract the driver and may  
cause a collision and serious personal  
injury or death.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To eject a DVD, press the OPEN/TILT button to  
lower the display screen. Once the screen is in  
the lowered position, press the  
the left of the CD/DVD insert slot  
will be ejected.  
button to  
. The DVD  
1
᭺
DISC-AUX button  
Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front  
seat occupants to operate the DVD drive while  
watching the images.  
Press the DISC-AUX button until the DVD mode  
is active on the display.  
When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed auto-  
matically.  
LHA1415  
LHA1376  
DVD operation keys  
Playing a DVD  
The operation screen will be turned on when the  
DISC-AUX button is pressed while a DVD is  
playing. The operation screen will turn off auto-  
matically after a period of time. To turn it on again,  
press the DISC-AUX button.  
When the DVD is playing without the operation  
screen being shown, you may use the touch-  
screen to select items from the displayed video.  
When the operation screen is being shown, use  
the touchscreen to select an item from the dis-  
played menus.  
Inserting/Ejecting the DVD  
The CD/DVD insert slot is located behind the  
display screen. To insert the DVD, press the  
OPEN/TILT button on the audio unit. The display  
screen will automatically move down to expose  
the CD/DVD insert slot. Insert the DVD into the  
slot with the label side facing up. The DVD will be  
guided automatically into the slot and begin play-  
ing. To return the display screen to its upright  
position after the DVD is inserted, press the  
OPEN/TILT button again.  
PAUSE:  
Select the  
sume playing the DVD, use the  
key to pause the DVD. To re-  
key.  
4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Top Menu:  
●
●
●
Title Search (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR)  
The scene with the specified title will be  
displayed the number of times the “+” or “-”  
side is selected.  
PLAY:  
Select the  
When the “Top Menu” key is selected while the  
DVD is playing, the top menu specific to each  
disc will be displayed. For details, see the instruc-  
tions attached to the disc.  
key to start playing the DVD or  
resume playing the DVD after it has been paused.  
Group Search (DVD-AUDIO, VIDEO CD)  
The scene with the specified group will be  
displayed the number of times the “+” or “-”  
side is selected.  
STOP:  
DVD settings  
Select the  
key to stop playing the DVD.  
Select the “Settings” key to adjust the following  
settings:  
10 Key Search (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD,  
CD-DA, DVD-VR)  
NEXT/PREVIOUS  
CHAPTER:  
key to skip the chapter(s) of the  
●
Key (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO)  
Displays the operation keys for the specific  
DVD menu.  
Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the  
number entry screen. Input the number you  
want to search for and select the “OK” key.  
The specified Title/Chapter or Group/Track  
will be played.  
Select the  
disc forward. Select the  
chapter(s) of the disc backward. The chapters  
will advance forward or backward the number of  
times the respective key is touched.  
key to skip the  
– Select the directional keys to move the  
cursor on the DVD menu.  
– Select the “Enter” key to fix the selected  
menu item.  
●
●
Select No. (VIDEO CD)  
CM SKIP:  
Select the “Select No.” key to open the  
number entry screen. Input the number you  
want to search for and select the “OK” key.  
The specified scene will be played.  
– Select the “Move” key to move the loca-  
tion of the operation keys on the screen.  
This function is only for DVD-VIDEO and DVD-  
VR. Select the  
or  
key to fast forward  
– Select the “Back” key to return to the  
previous menu screen.  
or rewind a set interval of time based on the CM  
settings. For more information, see “DVD set-  
tings” in this section.  
Angle (DVD-VIDEO)  
If the DVD contains different angles (such as  
moving images), the current image angle  
can be switched to another one. Select the  
“Angle” key and use the “+” or “-” key to  
change the angle.  
– Select the “Hide” key to hide the opera-  
tion keys.  
Next/Prev:  
This function is only for DVD-AUDIO. Select the  
“+”or “-”key to advance or rewind the still image.  
The still image will advance or rewind the number  
of times the key is touched.  
●
Title Menu (DVD-VIDEO)  
Some menus specific to each disc will be  
shown. For details, see the instructions at-  
tached to the disc.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
●
Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO)  
●
●
●
●
Display  
Adjust the image quality of the screen by  
selecting the preferred adjustment items.  
When this item is turned on, an angle mark  
will be shown on the bottom of the screen if  
the scene can be seen from a different angle.  
Audio  
Choose the preferred language for the au-  
dio.  
Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO)  
DVD menus are automatically configured  
and the contents will be played directly  
when the “Menu Skip”key is turned on. Note  
that some discs may not be played directly  
even if this item is turned on.  
Subtitle (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR)  
Choose the preferred language for the sub-  
titles.  
Display Mode (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD,  
DVD-VR)  
Choose from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal” or  
“Cinema” mode.  
●
●
●
CM Skip (DVD-VIDEO)  
Select the “CM Skip” key to choose the  
setting time for CM backward and forward  
operations. Use the “+” or “-” key to choose  
a setting time of 15, 30 or 60 seconds.  
WHA1530  
●
●
●
Title List (DVD-VR)  
Choose the preferred title from the list.  
USB INTERFACE (models without  
Navigation System) (if so equipped)  
DRC (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR)  
Play Mode  
Choose the preferred play mode.  
DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto-  
matically adjusts the soundtrack volume  
level to maintain a more even sound to the  
speakers.  
Connecting a device to the USB input  
jack  
PG/PL Mode (DVD-VR)  
Choose from the “PG” or “PL” mode.  
The USB input jack is located in the center con-  
1
sole. Open the protective cover  
on the USB  
᭺
DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD)  
Select the “DVD Language” key to open the  
number entry screen. Input the number cor-  
responding to the preferred language and  
select the “OK” key. The DVD top menu  
language will be changed to the one speci-  
fied.  
jack, then insert the USB device into the jack.  
When a compatible storage device is plugged  
into the jack, compatible audio files on the stor-  
age device can be played through the vehicle’s  
audio system.  
4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SEEK/CAT (Reverse or  
Fast Forward) buttons:  
Audio file operation  
AUX button:  
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC  
position and press the AUX button to switch to  
the USB input mode. If another audio source is  
plugged in through the AUX IN jack on the radio,  
the AUX button toggles between the two  
sources.  
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons  
or  
for 1.5 seconds while an audio file on  
the USB device is playing to reverse or fast  
forward the track being played. The track plays at  
an increased speed while reversing or fast for-  
warding. When the button is released, the audio  
file returns to normal play speed.  
SEEK/CAT buttons:  
Press the SEEK/CAT button  
while an au-  
dio file on the USB device is playing to return to  
the beginning of the current track. Press the  
LHA1280  
Play information  
SEEK/CAT button  
several times to skip  
Information about the audio files being played  
can be displayed on the display screen of the  
vehicle’s audio system. Depending on how the  
audio files are encoded, information such as  
Folder, Song and Artist will be displayed.  
backward several tracks.  
Press the SEEK/CAT button  
dio file on the USB device is playing to advance  
one track. Press the SEEK/CAT button  
several times to skip forward several tracks. If the  
last track in a folder on the USB device is  
skipped, the first track of the next folder is played.  
while an au-  
The track number and number of total tracks in  
the folder are displayed on the screen as well. For  
example, the fourth track out of twelve total is  
currently playing.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RDM button:  
The current play pattern of the USB device is  
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is  
applied.  
When the RDM button is pressed while an audio  
file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern  
can be changed as follows:  
TUNE/SCROLL knob:  
If there are multiple folders with audio files on the  
USB device, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to  
change folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip  
back a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip  
ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audio  
files on the USB device, turning the  
TUNE/SCROLL knob in either direction will re-  
turn to the first track on the USB device.  
ALL RDM → 1 FOLDER RDM → OFF  
ALL RDM: all tracks on the USB device will be  
played randomly.  
1 FOLDER RDM: all tracks in the current folder  
will be played randomly.  
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The  
indicator on the display will turn off.  
WHA1530  
The current play pattern of the USB device is  
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is  
applied.  
USB INTERFACE (models with  
Navigation System)  
RPT button:  
Connecting a device to the USB input  
jack  
When the RPT button is pressed while an audio  
file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern  
can be changed as follows:  
The USB input jack is located in the center con-  
1
sole. Open the protective cover  
on the USB  
᭺
jack, then insert the USB device into the jack.  
1 FOLDER RPT → 1 TRACK RPT → OFF  
1 TRACK RPT: the current track will be repeated.  
When a compatible storage device is plugged  
into the jack, compatible audio and video files on  
the storage device can be played through the  
vehicle’s audio system and center display screen.  
1 FOLDER RPT: the current folder will be re-  
peated.  
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-  
cator on the display will turn off.  
4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Audio file operation  
Seeking button:  
DISC-AUX button:  
Press the  
side of the seeking button while  
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC  
position and press the DISC-AUX button to  
switch to the USB input mode. If another audio  
source is playing and a USB memory device is  
inserted, press the DISC-AUX button repeatedly  
until the center display changes to the USB  
memory mode.  
an audio file on the USB device is playing to  
return to the beginning of the current track. Press  
the  
side of the seeking button several  
times to skip backward several tracks.  
Press the  
side of the seeking button while  
an audio file on the USB device is playing to  
advance one track. Press the  
side of the  
If the system has been turned off while the USB  
memory was playing, push the ON-OFF/VOL  
control knob to restart the USB memory.  
seeking button several times to skip forward sev-  
eral tracks. If the last track in a folder on the USB  
device is skipped, the first track of the next folder  
is played.  
LHA1378  
Seeking (Reverse or Fast  
Forward) button:  
When there are both audio and movie files in the  
USB memory, the mode select screen is dis-  
played. Use the touchscreen to select the pre-  
ferred type of file. When there is only type of file in  
the USB memory, that audio or movie operation  
screen is displayed and starts to play.  
Folder selection:  
To change to another folder in the USB memory,  
turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob or choose a folder  
displayed on the screen using the touchscreen.  
Press and hold the  
button for 1.5 seconds while an audio file on the  
USB device is playing to reverse the track being  
side of the seeking  
played. Press and hold the  
side of the  
When you play a file with limited playing time, the  
confirmation screen will be displayed before  
starting to play the file. Confirm the playing time  
and select “yes” to start playing.  
seeking button for 1.5 seconds while an audio file  
on the USB device is playing to fast forward the  
track being played. The track plays at an in-  
creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding.  
When the button is released, the audio file re-  
turns to normal play speed.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
●
Folder List/Track List  
Displays the folder or track list. The “Movie  
Playback” key is also displayed in this list  
screen and enables you to switch to the  
movie playback mode.  
Play Mode  
Choose the preferred play mode using the  
touchscreen.  
LHA1294  
LHA1379  
Menu:  
Movie file operation  
There are some options available during play-  
back. Select one of the following that are dis-  
played on the screen, if necessary. Refer to the  
following information for each item.  
Park the vehicle in a safe location for the  
front seat occupants to operate the USB  
memory while watching the images.  
DISC-AUX button:  
●
Movie Playback  
When the DISC-AUX button is pushed with the  
system off and the USB memory inserted, the  
system will turn on. If another audio source is  
playing and the USB memory is inserted, press  
the DISC-AUX button repeatedly until the center  
display changes to the USB memory mode.  
Switch to the movie playback mode. This  
item is displayed only when the USB  
memory contains movie files.  
The shift selector must be in Park (P) with  
the parking brake engaged to watch movies  
from a USB device.  
4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation keys:  
●
Previous Chapter/Rewind:  
Select the key to skip the chapter(s)  
To operate the USB memory, select the desired  
key displayed on the display screen.  
of the disc backward. The chapters will go  
back the number of times the key is selected.  
Press and hold the key to rewind the chap-  
ter.  
●
Pause:  
Select the  
key to pause the movie file.  
To resume playing the movie file, use  
List:  
the  
key.  
Select the “List” key on the movie file operation  
screen to display the file list.  
●
Play:  
Select the  
key to start playing the  
LHA1380  
movie file or resume the movie file if it has  
been paused.  
Settings:  
Select the “Settings” key to adjust the following  
settings:  
●
●
Stop:  
Select the  
movie file.  
key to stop playing the  
●
Audio File Playback  
Switch to the audio playback mode. This  
item is displayed only when the USB  
memory contains audio files.  
Next Chapter/Fast Forward:  
●
Play Mode  
Choose between the “Normal” or “1 Track  
Repeat” play modes.  
Select the  
key to skip the chapter(s)  
of the disc forward. The chapters will ad-  
vance the number of times the key is se-  
lected. Press and hold the key to fast for-  
ward the chapter.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
10 Key Search  
tery will be charged while connected to the ve-  
hicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position.  
Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the  
number entry screen. Input the number you  
want to search for and the specified file or  
folder will be played.  
While connected to the vehicle, the iPodா can  
only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.  
●
●
Display  
To disconnect the iPodா from the vehicle, remove  
the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on  
the vehicle, then remove the cable from the  
iPodா.  
Adjust the image quality of the screen.  
DRC  
DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto-  
matically adjusts the soundtrack volume  
level to maintain a more even sound to the  
speakers.  
* iPodா is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in  
the U.S. and other countries.  
●
●
Audio  
Compatibility  
WHA1530  
Choose the preferred language of the audio.  
The following models are compatible:  
iPodா* PLAYER OPERATION  
Subtitle  
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if  
so equipped)  
●
●
●
●
●
●
iPodா 5th Generation version 1.2.1  
iPodா Classic - version 1.1  
Choose the preferred language of the sub-  
titles.  
●
Display Mode  
Choose between the “Normal”, “Wide”,  
“Cinema” or “Full” display modes.  
Connecting iPodா  
iPodா Touch - version 2.1.0  
To connect an iPodா to the vehicle so that the  
iPodா can be controlled with the audio system  
controls and display screen, use the USB jack  
located in the center console. Open the protec-  
1
iPodா Nano - 1st generation version 1.3.1  
iPodா Nano - 2nd generation version 1.1.3  
iPodா Nano - 3rd generation version 1.0.2  
tive cover  
on the USB jack in the center  
᭺
Make sure that your iPodா firmware is updated to  
the version indicated above.  
console. Then connect the iPodா-specific end of  
the cable to the iPodா and the USB end of the  
cable to the USB jack on the vehicle. If your iPodா  
supports charging via a USB connection, its bat-  
4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
●
●
●
●
Songs  
RDM button:  
Audio main operation  
Press the RDM button while a track is playing to  
change the play pattern as follows:  
Podcasts  
Genres  
AUX button:  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position and press the AUX button repeatedly  
until the iPodா mode is displayed on the screen.  
TRK SHUFFLE  
SHUFFLE OFF  
→
ALBUM SHUFFLE  
→
Composers  
Audiobooks  
ShuffleSongs  
TRK SHUFFLE: the tracks in the current list will  
be played randomly.  
If another audio source is playing and the iPodா is  
connected, press the AUX button repeatedly to  
switch to the iPodா mode.  
ALBUM SHUFFLE: the albums in the current list  
will be played randomly.  
SEEK/CAT buttons:  
If the vehicle audio system is turned off while the  
iPodா is playing, the iPodா will start when the  
VOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed.  
Press the SEEK/CAT buttons  
skip backward or forward one track.  
or  
to  
SHUFFLE OFF: no random play pattern is ap-  
plied.  
Interface:  
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons  
or for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing  
to reverse or fast forward the track being played.  
The track plays at an increased speed while  
reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is  
released, the track returns to normal play speed.  
The interface for iPodா operation shown on the  
vehicle’s audio system display screen is similar to  
the iPodா interface. Use the TUNE/SCROLL  
knob and ENTER button to navigate the menus  
on the screen. The iPodா MENU button on the  
vehicle audio system is used to move up one level  
in the iPodா menus.  
RPT button:  
Press the RPT button while a track is playing to  
change the play pattern as follows:  
Depending on the iPodா model, the following  
items may be available on the menu list screen.  
For further information about each item, see the  
iPodா Owner’s Manual.  
1 TRK RPT → ALL RPT → RPT OFF  
1 TRK RPT: the current track will be repeated.  
●
●
●
Playlists  
Artists  
ALL RPT: all songs in the current list are re-  
peated.  
RPT OFF: no repeat play pattern is applied.  
Albums  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
tery will be charged while connected to the ve-  
hicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position.  
While connected to the vehicle, the iPodா can  
only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.  
To disconnect the iPodா from the vehicle, remove  
the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on the  
vehicle, then remove the cable from the iPodா.  
* iPodா is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in  
the U.S. and other countries.  
Compatibility  
The following models are compatible:  
WHA1530  
LHA1397  
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
iPodா 5th Generation version 1.2.1  
iPodா Classic - version 1.1.1  
iPodா* PLAYER OPERATION WITH  
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so  
equipped)  
Audio main operation  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position. Press the DISC·AUX button repeatedly  
to switch to the iPodா mode.  
iPodா Touch - version 2.0.0*  
iPodா Nano - 1st generation version 1.3.1  
iPodா Nano - 2nd generation version 1.1.3  
iPodா Nano - 3rd generation version 1.1  
iPodா Nano - 4thgeneration version 1.0.2  
Connecting iPodா  
If the system has been turned off while the iPodா  
was playing, pressing the VOL/ON·OFF control  
knob will start the iPodா.  
To connect an iPodா to the vehicle so that the  
iPodா can be controlled with the audio system  
controls and display screen, use the USB jack  
located in the center console. Open the protec-  
1
DISC·AUX button:  
When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the  
system off and the iPodா connected, the system  
will turn on. If another audio source is playing and  
the iPodா is connected, press the DISC·AUX  
button repeatedly until the center display  
changes to the iPodா mode.  
tive cover  
on the USB jack in the center  
᭺
* Some features of this iPodா may not be fully  
functional.  
console. Then connect the iPodா-specific end of  
the cable to the iPodா and the USB end of the  
cable to the USB jack on the vehicle. If your iPodா  
supports charging via a USB connection, its bat-  
Make sure that your iPodா firmware is updated to  
the version indicated above.  
4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
●
●
●
●
Songs  
Podcasts  
Genres  
Composers  
Audiobooks  
Shuffle Songs  
The following keys shown on the screen are also  
available:  
●
●
Menu: returns to the previous screen.  
: plays/pauses the music selected.  
LHA1398  
LHA1315  
Interface:  
Play mode:  
The interface for iPodா operation shown on the  
vehicle center display is similar to the iPodா in-  
terface. Use the touchscreen to control your fa-  
vorite settings.  
While the iPodா is playing, touch the “Menu” key  
to display the iPodா menu. Touch the “Play  
Mode” key to display the Play Mode screen and  
adjust the settings for Shuffle, Repeat and Audio-  
books. For further information about each item,  
see the iPodா Owner’s Manual.  
The following items can be chosen from the menu  
list screen. For further information about each  
item, see the iPodா Owner’s Manual.  
Seeking button:  
●
●
●
●
Now Playing  
Playlists  
Artists  
When the  
or  
side of the seeking  
button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds while  
the iPodா is playing, the next track or the begin-  
ning of the current track on the iPodா will be  
played.  
Albums  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MUSIC BOX™ HARD DRIVE AUDIO  
SYSTEM (if so equipped)  
When the  
or  
side of the seeking  
button is pressed for more than 1.5 seconds  
while the iPodா is playing, the iPodா will play  
while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the  
button is released, the iPodா will return to the  
normal play speed.  
The Music Box Hard Drive audio system can  
store songs from CDs being played. The system  
has a 9.3 gigabyte (GB) storage capacity and  
can record up to 200 hours (approximately 2,900  
songs).  
The following CDs can be recorded in the Music  
Box Hard Drive audio system:  
●
●
CDs without MP3/WMA files.  
Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (Hybrid  
CD-DA) specification in Super Audio CDs.  
LHA1399  
●
●
Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) speci-  
fication in CD-Extras.  
Scrolling menus:  
While navigating long lists of artists, albums or  
songs in the music menu, it is possible to scroll  
the list by the first letter. To activate letter index-  
ing, touch and hold the page up/down arrows on  
the touchscreen.  
First session of multisession disc.  
Extreme temperature conditions [below Ϫ4°F  
(Ϫ20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)] could affect  
the performance of the hard-disk.  
To exit the scrolling by letter mode, perform one of  
the following:  
NOTE:  
If the hard drive needs to be replaced due  
to a malfunction, all stored music data will  
be erased.  
●
Push the ENTER switch on the steering  
wheel.  
●
Do not touch the controls for 2 seconds.  
4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To view the details of the track, touch the “Text”  
key on the screen. The track name and album title  
are displayed on the screen.  
If a track is not recorded successfully due to  
skipping sounds, the  
behind the track number.  
symbol is displayed  
The Music Box audio system cannot perform  
recording under the following conditions:  
●
●
There is not enough space in the hard drive.  
The number of albums reaches the maximum  
of 500.  
●
The number of tracks reaches the maximum  
of 3,000.  
LHA1263  
LHA1282  
●
●
The fast forward and rewind features are  
disabled while the CD is recording.  
Recording CDs  
Automatic recording:  
1. Operate the audio system to play a CD.  
For information on playing CDs, see “Compact  
Disc (CD) player operation” in this section.  
If the “Automatic Recording” function is turned to  
ON, recording starts when a CD is inserted. For  
more information, see “Music Box settings”in this  
section.  
The recording process can be stopped at  
any time. All tracks that were played before  
the CD was stopped are stored.  
2. Touch the “Start REC” key. REC CD ap-  
pears on the screen.  
●
●
Individual tracks can be deleted from the  
hard drive after the CD is recorded.  
Stopping recording:  
NOTE:  
The system records faster than it plays.  
To stop the recording, touch the “Stop REC” key  
on the screen. If the CD is ejected, the audio  
system is turned off or the ignition switch is  
placed in the OFF position, the recording also  
stops.  
●
The system starts playing and recording the  
1st track on the CD when the “Start REC”  
key is selected.  
Individual tracks from a CD cannot be se-  
lected to be recorded to the Music Box hard  
drive.  
If the title information of the track being recorded  
is stored either in the hard drive or in the CD, the  
title is automatically displayed on the screen. For  
title acquisition from the hard drive, music recog-  
nition technology and related data are provided  
by Gracenoteா.  
●
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
Give voice commands.  
TUNE/FOLDER knob:  
For information, see “NISSAN Voice Recog-  
nition system” in this section.  
The TUNE/FOLDER knob skips from album to  
album unless it is playing “All Songs” from the  
Music Library menu. When playing “All Songs”,  
the TUNE/FOLDER knob changes the track in-  
stead of the album. The upper right corner of the  
screen indicates if the TUNE/FOLDER knob is  
changing by track or album.  
Stopping playback:  
The system stops playing when:  
●
Another mode (radio, CD, USB, Bluetoothா  
Audio or AUX) is selected.  
●
●
The audio system is turned off.  
The ignition switch is placed in the OFF  
position.  
Seeking button:  
LHA1283  
Press the  
side of the seeking button while  
a track is playing to return to the beginning of the  
Playing recorded songs  
Select the Music Box audio system by using one  
of the following methods:  
current track. Press the  
side of the seeking  
button while a track is playing to skip to the  
beginning of the next track.  
●
Press the SOURCE select switch on the  
steering wheel.  
If you press and hold the  
side of the seek-  
For information, see “Steering wheel switch  
for audio control” in this section.  
ing button or the side of the seeking button  
for more than approximately 1.5 seconds; the  
track will play while rewinding or fast forwarding.  
●
Press the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until  
the center display changes to the Music Box  
mode.  
When the  
the  
side of the seeking button or  
side of the seeking button is released,  
the track will return to the normal playing speed.  
4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LHA1284  
LHA1285  
LHA1286  
Music Box menu  
There are some options available during play-  
back. Select the “Menu” key, then select one of  
the following that are displayed on the screen, if  
necessary. Refer to the following information for  
each item:  
●
Now Playing  
Lists the tracks stored in the Music Box  
system. Touch the name of the track to begin  
playing that track.  
●
Music Library  
Lists the songs in the Music Library. Tracks  
can be searched by Album, Artist or Genre.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– Edit Name - changes the name of the  
playlist.  
– Delete Songs - deletes songs from the  
playlist.  
LHA1287  
LHA1288  
●
Play Mode  
●
My Playlists  
Alters the play mode of the playlist. Touch  
the key of the mode you wish to apply. The  
modes change the play pattern as follows:  
Displays the playlists stored in the system.  
Touch the “Edit” key next to a playlist to  
perform the following operations for that  
playlist:  
– Normal - no play pattern is applied.  
– Add Current Song - adds the song cur-  
rently playing to the playlist.  
– 1 Album Repeat - the songs in the current  
album are repeated.  
– Add Songs by Album - adds songs to the  
playlist by album.  
– 1 Track Repeat - the current track is re-  
peated.  
– Add Songs by Artist - adds songs to the  
playlist by artist.  
– 1 Album Random - the songs in the cur-  
rent album are played randomly.  
– All Random - all songs are played ran-  
domly.  
– Edit Song Order - edits the order of the  
songs in the playlist.  
4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The “Transfer Missing Titles to USB” and “Up-  
date Gracenote from HDD” options can be used  
to update the titles of songs in the Music Library.  
Visit www.nissanusa.com/gracenote for detailed  
instructions on how to update the Gracenote  
database.  
LHA1289  
LHA1290  
●
Edit Music Information  
Edits the information of the songs in the  
Music Library.  
Music Box settings  
To set up the Music Box Hard Drive audio system  
to your preferred settings, touch the “Menu” key  
during playback, then touch the “Music Box Set-  
tings” key.  
– Edit Information of Current Song  
– Edit Information by Album  
●
●
Music Box Used/Free Space:  
– Update Gracenote from USB Device  
– Transfer Missing Titles to USB  
– Update Gracenote from HDD  
Displays the number of tracks and albums  
stored on the hard drive. The percentage of  
hard drive space taken up and the amount of  
remaining recording time left are also shown.  
Automatic Recording:  
When this item is turned to ON, the Music  
Box Hard Drive audio system automatically  
starts recording when a CD is inserted.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
tion, including name, artist, track, and title infor-  
mation (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers  
(“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other func-  
tions. You may use Gracenote Data only by  
means of the intended End-User functions of this  
device.  
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the  
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for  
your own personal non-commercial use only. You  
agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the  
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to  
any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR  
EXPLOIT  
GRACENOTE  
DATA,  
THE  
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE  
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMIT-  
TED HEREIN.  
LHA1291  
LHA1292  
●
The service of the Gracenoteா Database on  
the Internet may be stopped without prior  
notice for maintenance.  
●
●
Delete Songs from Music Box:  
Delete music data stored on the hard drive.  
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use  
the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,  
and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you vio-  
late these restrictions. If your license terminates,  
you agree to cease any and all use of the  
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and  
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights  
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and  
the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership  
rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote  
become liable for any payment to you for any  
information that you provide. You agree that  
Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this  
Agreement against you directly in its own name.  
Recording Quality:  
Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132  
kbps. The default is set to 132 kbps.  
End-User License Agreement  
●
CDDB Version:  
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP-  
TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW.  
Shows the version of CDDB (Compact Disc  
Data Base).  
Gracenoteா MusicID™ Terms of Use  
Gracenoteா  
This device contains software from Gracenote,  
Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The  
software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Soft-  
ware”) enables this application to do online disc  
identification and obtain music-related informa-  
NOTE:  
●
The information contained in the Gracenoteா  
Database is not fully guaranteed.  
4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Gracenote MusicID Service uses a unique  
identifier to track queries for statistical purposes.  
The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric  
identifier is to allow the Gracenote MusicID ser-  
vice to count queries without knowing anything  
about who you are. For more information, see the  
web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for  
the Gracenote MusicID Service.  
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RE-  
SULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR  
USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR  
ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE  
WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAM-  
AGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST  
REVENUES.  
BLUETOOTHா STREAMING AUDIO  
(if so equipped)  
If you have a compatible Bluetoothா audio device  
that is capable of playing audio files, the device  
can be connected to the vehicle’s audio system  
so that the audio files on the device play through  
the vehicle’s speakers.  
Copyright:  
The Gracenote Software and each item of  
Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”  
Gracenote makes no representations or warran-  
ties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy  
of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote  
Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete  
data from the Gracenote Servers or to change  
data categories for any cause that Gracenote  
deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the  
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are  
error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Soft-  
ware or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.  
Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with  
new enhanced or additional data types or cat-  
egories that Gracenote may provide in the future  
and is free to discontinue its online services at  
any time.  
Music recognition technology and related data  
are provided by Gracenoteா. Gracenote is the  
industry standard in music recognition technol-  
ogy and related content delivery. For more infor-  
mation visit www.gracenote.com.  
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,  
copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote  
Software, copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote.  
This product and service may practice one or  
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;  
#6,061,680;  
#6,230,192,  
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend-  
ing. Some services supplied under license from  
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.  
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks  
of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype,  
and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trade-  
marks of Gracenote.  
#6,154,773,  
#6,230,207,  
#6,161,132,  
#6,240,459,  
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-  
CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LHA1316  
LHA1317  
LHA1351  
4. A screen will appear asking if you are con-  
necting the device to use with the hands-  
free phone system. Select the “No” key.  
5. Enter a PIN of your choice. It will be needed  
by your Bluetoothா audio device to com-  
plete the connection process. See the  
Bluetoothா audio device’s owner’s manual  
for more information.  
Connecting Bluetoothா audio  
To connect your Bluetoothா audio device to the  
vehicle, follow the procedure below:  
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-  
ment panel.  
2. Select the “Bluetooth” key.  
3. Select the “Connect Bluetooth” key.  
4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LHA1299  
LHA1316  
LHA1296  
4. Select the “Audio Player” key.  
Audio main operation  
Bluetoothா audio settings  
To switch to the Bluetoothா audio mode, press  
the DISC-AUX button repeatedly until the  
Bluetoothா audio mode is displayed on the  
screen.  
To adjust the Bluetoothா audio settings, follow  
the procedure below:  
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-  
ment panel.  
The controls for the Bluetoothா audio are dis-  
played on the screen.  
2. Select the “Bluetooth” key.  
3. Select the “Connected Devices” key.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LHA1297  
LHA1298  
LHA0049  
5. A list of the connected Bluetoothா audio  
players is displayed. Select the name of the  
device you wish to edit.  
6. The Device Name and Device Address are  
displayed on the screen. Select the “Select”  
key to make this device the active  
Bluetoothா audio player. Select the “Edit”  
key to edit the details of the player, such as  
Device Name. Select the “Delete” key to  
delete the device.  
CD CARE AND CLEANING  
●
●
●
Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the  
disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.  
Always place the discs in the storage case  
when they are not being used.  
To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the  
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft  
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular  
motion.  
●
Do not use a conventional record cleaner or  
alcohol intended for industrial use.  
4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
A new disc may be rough on the inner and  
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by  
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the  
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.  
LHA0752  
LHA0753  
Type A  
Type B  
1. Source select and Power on switch  
2. Tuning switch  
1. Source select and Power on switch  
2. Tuning switch  
3. Volume control switch  
3. Volume control switch  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Type C Switch:  
SOURCE select switch  
AM → FM1 → FM2 → XM1 → XM2 → XM3  
(satellite radio, if so equipped) → CD/DVD*→  
Music Box** → USB/iPodா* → Bluetoothா Au-  
dio* → AUX* → AM.  
* These modes are only available when compat-  
ible media storage is inserted into the device.  
Push the source select switch to change the  
mode in the following sequence:  
Type A Switch:  
PRESET BANK A → PRESET BANK B → PRE-  
SET BANK C → CD* → AUX* → PRESET BANK  
A.  
** This mode is only available when music has  
been downloaded into the Music Box system.  
* These modes are only available when compat-  
ible media storage is inserted into the device.  
Volume control switch  
While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,  
B or C), use the tuning switch  
or  
to  
Push the volume control switch to increase or  
decrease the volume.  
select one of the preset radio stations (1 – 6).  
LHA0754  
Type B Switch:  
Type C  
Tuning (Type A and  
AM → FM* → XM* (satellite radio, if so equipped)  
1. Source select and Power on switch  
2. Menu control switch/ENTER button  
3. Volume control switch  
→ CD** → USB/iPod** → AUX** → AM  
Type B switches only)  
* When using the SOURCE switch, the audio  
mode switches to the FM preset bank (FM1 or  
FM2) or XM preset bank (XM1 or XM2) that was  
last active. To switch between the FM1 and FM2  
preset banks or the XM1 and XM2 preset banks,  
use the controls on the audio system.  
Memory change (radio):  
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR  
AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)  
While in one of the preset radio station banks,  
push the tuning switch  
or  
for less  
than 1.5 seconds to change to the next preset  
station in memory.  
POWER on switch  
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi-  
tion, push the SOURCE switch to turn the audio  
system on.  
** These modes are only available when compat-  
ible media is connected to the system.  
Seek tuning (radio):  
Push the tuning switch  
or  
for more  
than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous  
radio station.  
4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Next/Previous track (CD):  
XM (if so equipped):  
●
●
●
Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to  
increase or decrease the title number.  
●
●
●
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to  
increase or decrease the preset station.  
Push the tuning switch  
or  
for less  
Press the ENTER button to select an item  
from the DVD display.  
than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the  
present track or skip to the next track. Push  
several times to skip back or skip through tracks.  
Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to  
go to the next or previous category.  
When the transparent operation menu ap-  
pears, the switch will control the menu.  
Menu control  
switch/ENTER button  
(Type C switch only)  
Press the ENTER button to show the XM  
Menu.  
USB:  
iPodா:  
●
●
●
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to  
increase or decrease the track number.  
●
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to  
While the display is showing a map or audio  
screen, tilt the Menu Control switch upward or  
downward to select a station, track, CD or folder.  
For most audio sources, tilting the switch  
up/down for more than 1.5 seconds provides a  
different function than a tilting up/down for less  
than 1.5 seconds.  
increase or decrease the track number.  
Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to  
increase or decrease the folder number.  
●
Press the ENTER button to show the iPod  
Menu.  
Press the ENTER button to show the USB  
Menu.  
CD:  
Music Box:  
●
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to  
increase or decrease the track number.  
●
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to  
AM and FM:  
increase or decrease the track number.  
●
●
●
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to  
increase or decrease the preset station.  
●
●
Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to  
increase or decrease the folder number (if  
playing compressed audio files).  
●
Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to  
increase or decrease the album (folder)  
number (if playing compressed audio files).  
Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to  
seek up or down to the next station.  
Press the ENTER button to show the CD  
Menu.  
●
Press the ENTER button to show the Music  
Box Menu.  
Press the ENTER button to show the list of  
preset stations.  
DVD:  
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to  
increase or decrease the track number.  
Bluetoothா Audio:  
●
●
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to  
increase or decrease the track number.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO  
AUX:  
Press the ENTER button to show the AUX  
When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in  
your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following  
precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may  
adversely affect the engine control system and  
other electronic parts.  
CAUTION  
●
● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-  
sible from the electronic control  
modules.  
Menu.  
ANTENNA  
● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in  
(20 cm) away from the electronic con-  
trol system harnesses. Do not route the  
antenna wire next to any harness.  
Window antenna  
WARNING  
The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear  
window.  
● A cellular telephone should not be used  
while driving so full attention may be  
given to vehicle operation. Some juris-  
dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-  
phones while driving.  
● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio  
as recommended by the manufacturer.  
CAUTION  
● Do not place metalized film near the  
rear window glass or attach any metal  
parts to it. This may cause poor recep-  
tion or noise.  
● Connect the ground wire from the CB  
radio chassis to the body.  
● If you must make a call while your ve-  
hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-  
lar phone operational mode (if so  
equipped) is highly recommended. Ex-  
ercise extreme caution at all times so  
full attention may be given to vehicle  
operation.  
● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.  
● When cleaning the inside of the rear  
window, be careful not to scratch or  
damage the rear window antenna.  
Lightly wipe along the antenna with a  
dampened soft cloth.  
● If you are unable to devote full attention  
to vehicle operation while talking on  
the phone, pull off the road to a safe  
location and stop your vehicle.  
4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BLUETOOTHா HANDS-FREE PHONE  
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION  
SYSTEM (if so equipped)  
WARNING  
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle  
in a safe location. If you have to use a  
phone while driving, exercise extreme  
caution at all times so full attention may  
be given to vehicle operation.  
● If you are unable to devote full attention  
to vehicle operation while talking on  
the phone, pull off the road to a safe  
location and stop your vehicle.  
CAUTION  
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,  
use a phone after starting the engine.  
WHA1042  
make or receive a hands-free telephone call with  
your cellular phone in the vehicle.  
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetoothா  
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-  
patible Bluetoothா enabled cellular phone, you  
can set up the wireless connection between your  
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.  
With Bluetoothா wireless technology, you can  
Once your cellular phone is connected to the  
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-  
necting procedure is required. Your phone is  
automatically connected with the in-vehicle  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
phone module when the ignition switch is placed  
in the ON position with the previously connected  
cellular phone turned on and carried in the ve-  
hicle.  
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is  
difficult to receive a cellular signal; such  
as in a tunnel, in an underground parking  
garage, near a tall building or in a moun-  
tainous area.  
●
●
Some cellular phones or other devices may  
cause interference or a buzzing noise to  
come from the audio system speakers. Stor-  
ing the device in a different location may  
reduce or eliminate the noise.  
You can connect up to 5 different Bluetoothா  
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.  
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone  
at a time.  
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it  
from being dialed.  
Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual  
regarding the telephone charges, cellular  
phone antenna and body, etc.  
●
●
When the radio wave condition is not ideal  
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be  
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-  
ing a call.  
Before using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone  
System, refer to the following notes.  
REGULATORY INFORMATION  
FCC Regulatory information  
●
Set up the wireless connection between a  
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle  
phone module before using the hands-free  
phone system.  
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with  
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the  
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,  
modification, or attachments could damage  
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-  
tions.  
Do not place the cellular phone in an area  
surrounded by metal or far away from the  
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone  
quality degradation and wireless connection  
disruption.  
●
Some Bluetoothா enabled cellular phones  
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle  
phone  
module.  
Please  
visit  
●
●
While a cellular phone is connected through  
the Bluetoothா wireless connection, the bat-  
tery power of the cellular phone may dis-  
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetoothா  
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge  
cellular phones.  
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-  
mended phone list and connecting instruc-  
tions.  
– Operation is subject to the following two con-  
ditions:  
1. This device may not cause interference and  
●
You will not be able to use a hands-free  
phone under the following conditions:  
2. this device must accept any interference,  
including interference that may cause un-  
desired operation of the device.  
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-  
vice area.  
If the hands-free phone system seems to be  
malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”  
in this section. You can also visit  
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-  
shooting help.  
IC Regulatory information  
– Operation is subject to the following two con-  
ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-  
ence, and (2) this device must accept any  
4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
interference, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation of the device.  
●
●
●
If a command is not recognized, the system  
announces, “Command not recognized.  
Please try again.” Repeat the command in a  
clear voice.  
Operating tips  
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN  
Voice Recognition system, observe the following:  
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-  
quirements of the Canadian Interference-  
Causing Equipment Regulations.  
●
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as  
possible. Close the windows to eliminate  
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration  
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system  
from recognizing voice commands correctly.  
If you want to go back to the previous com-  
mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-  
tion” any time the system is waiting for a  
response.  
BLUETOOTH௡ is a  
trademark owned by  
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,  
U.S.A. and licensed  
to Visteon.  
You can cancel a command when the sys-  
tem is waiting for a response by saying,  
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces  
“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can  
●
Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a  
command. Otherwise, the command will not  
be received properly.  
●
●
Start speaking a command within 5 seconds  
after the tone sounds.  
USING THE SYSTEM  
also press and hold the  
button on the  
steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to  
end the VR session. Whenever the VR ses-  
sion is cancelled, a double beep is played to  
indicate you have exited the system.  
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows  
hands-free operation of the Bluetoothா Phone  
System.  
Speak in a natural voice without pausing  
between words.  
Giving voice commands  
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may  
not be available so full attention may be given to  
vehicle operation.  
●
●
If you want to adjust the volume of the voice  
feedback, press the volume control switches  
(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being  
provided with feedback. You can also use  
the radio volume control knob.  
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press  
and release the  
steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a  
command.  
button located on the  
Initialization  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,  
The command given is picked up by the micro-  
phone, and voice feedback is given when the  
command is accepted.  
In most cases you can interrupt the voice  
feedback to speak the next command by  
which takes a few seconds. If the  
button is  
pressing the  
wheel.  
button on the steering  
pressed before the initialization completes, the  
system will announce “Hands-free phone system  
not ready” and will not react to voice commands.  
●
If you need to hear the available commands  
for the current menu again, say “Help” and  
the system will repeat them.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
To use the system faster, you may speak the  
second level commands with the main menu  
command on the main menu. For example,  
– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty  
two hundred,” and  
Example: 1-555-1212 *123  
– “One five five five one two one two star  
one two three”  
– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two  
hundred”  
press the  
button and after the tone  
●
●
Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using  
the “Special Dialing” command).  
say, “Call Redial.”  
●
Numbers can be spoken in small groups.  
The system will prompt you to continue en-  
tering digits, if desired.  
NOTE:  
Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (available  
only when storing a phone book number).  
The combined command of Call and (a  
Name) cannot be used.  
Example: 1-800-662-6200  
– “One eight zero zero”  
NOTE:  
How to say numbers  
For best results, say phone numbers as  
single digits.  
The system repeats the numbers and  
prompts you to enter more.  
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain  
way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer  
to the following rules and examples.  
The voice command “Help” is available at any  
time. Please use the “Help” command to get  
information on how to use the system.  
– “six six two”  
The system repeats the numbers and  
prompts you to enter more.  
●
Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.  
Example: 1-800-662-6200  
– “six two zero zero”  
–
“One eight oh oh six six two six two oh  
oh”, or  
●
Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail-  
able when using the “Special Dialing” com-  
mand and the “Send” command during a  
call).  
–
“One eight zero zero six six two six two oh  
oh”  
●
Words can be used for the first 4 digits  
places only.  
See “List of voice commands” and “Special  
Dialing” in this section for more information.  
Example: 1-800-662-6200  
– “One eight hundred six six two six two oh  
oh”,  
4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Choosing a language  
You can also use the  
button  
to interrupt the system feedback  
and give a command at once. See  
“List of voice commands” and  
“During a call” in this section for  
more information.  
You can interact with the Bluetoothா Hands-Free  
Phone System using English, Spanish or French.  
To change the language, perform the following.  
1. Press and hold the  
than 5 seconds.  
button for more  
PHONE/END  
While the voice recognition sys-  
tem is active, press and hold  
2. The system announces: “Press the  
PHONE/SEND button for the  
(
)
hands-free phone system to enter the  
speaker adaptation mode or press the  
the  
button for 5 seconds to  
quit the voice recognition system  
at any time.  
TUNING SWITCH  
While using the voice recognition  
system, tilt the tuning switch up or  
down to manually control the  
phone system.  
PHONE/END (  
ferent language.”  
) button to select a dif-  
button.  
LHA0757  
CONTROL BUTTONS  
3. Press the  
The control buttons for the Bluetoothா Hands-  
Free Phone System are located on the steering  
wheel.  
For information on speaker adaptation, see  
“Speaker adaptation (SA) mode”in this sec-  
tion.  
PHONE/SEND  
4. The system announces the current language  
and gives you the option to change the lan-  
guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in  
French). To select the current language,  
GETTING STARTED  
Press the  
button to initiate  
a VR session or answer an incom-  
ing call.  
The following procedures will help you get  
started using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone  
System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-  
ditional command options, refer to “List of voice  
commands” in this section.  
press the PHONE/SEND (  
select a different language, tilt the tuning  
switch ( or ) up or down.  
) button. To  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
B
NOTE:  
3. Say: “Add phone” . The system acknowl-  
᭺
Making a call by entering a phone  
number  
edges the command and asks you to initiate  
connecting from the phone handset  
You must press the  
seconds to change the language.  
button within 5  
C
.
᭺
Main Menu  
The connecting procedure of the cellular  
phone varies according to each cellular  
phone model. See the cellular phone Own-  
er’s Manual for details. You can also visit  
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-  
tions on connecting NISSAN recommended  
cellular phones.  
5. If you decide not to change the language, do  
not press either button. After 5 seconds, the  
VR session will end, and the language will  
not be changed.  
A
“Call”  
᭺
B
“Phone Number”  
᭺
C
Speak the digits  
᭺
D
“Dial”  
᭺
Connecting procedure  
1. Press the  
button on the steering  
NOTE:  
wheel. A tone will sound.  
When prompted for a Passkey code, enter  
“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code  
“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and  
cannot be changed.  
A
2. Say: “Call”  
. The system acknowledges  
The connecting procedure must be per-  
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the  
vehicle starts moving during the procedure,  
the procedure will be cancelled.  
᭺
the command and announces the next set of  
available commands.  
4. The system asks you to say a name for the  
Say: “Special Dialing” to dial more than 10  
digits or any special characters.  
D
phone  
.
᭺
Main Menu  
B
A
“Connect phone”  
᭺
3. Say “Phone Number”  
. The system ac-  
᭺
If the name is too long or too short, the  
system tells you, then prompts you for a  
name again.  
knowledges the command and announces  
the next set of available commands.  
B
“Add phone”  
᭺
C
Initiate from handset  
᭺
D
Name phone  
᭺
4. Say the number you wish to call starting with  
Also, if more than one phone is connected  
and the name sounds too much like a name  
already used, the system tells you, then  
prompts you for a name again.  
C
the area code in single digit format . If the  
᭺
system has trouble recognizing the correct  
phone number, try entering the number in  
the following groups: 3-digit area code,  
3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-  
ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five  
five five” as the 1st group, then “one two  
one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five  
1. Press the  
button on the steering  
wheel. The system announces the available  
commands.  
A
2. Say: “Connect phone”  
. The system ac-  
᭺
knowledges the command and announces  
the next set of available commands.  
4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than  
10 digits or any special characters, say  
“Special Dialing”. See “How to say num-  
bers” in this section for more information.  
LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS  
“Call”  
Main Menu  
Main Menu  
“Call”  
(Speak name)  
“Call”  
5. When you have finished speaking the phone  
number, the system repeats it back and an-  
nounces the available commands.  
A
“Phonebook”  
“Recent Calls”  
“Connect Phone”  
᭺
“Phone Number”  
(Speak Digits)  
B
᭺
D
6. Say: “Dial”  
. The system acknowledges  
᭺
C
“Special Number”  
᭺
the command and makes the call.  
When you press and release the  
button on  
D
“Redial”  
the steering wheel, you can choose from the  
commands on the Main Menu. The following  
pages describe these commands and the com-  
mands in each sub-menu.  
᭺
For additional command options, see “List of  
voice commands” in this section.  
E
“Call Back”  
᭺
A
(Speak Name)  
Receiving a call  
᭺
If you have stored entries in the phonebook, you  
can dial a number associated with a name and  
location.  
When you hear the ring tone, press the  
button on the steering wheel.  
Remember to wait for the tone before  
speaking.  
After the main menu, you can say “Help” to hear  
the list of commands currently available any time  
the system is waiting for a response.  
Once the call has ended, press the  
on the steering wheel.  
button  
See “Phonebook” in this section to learn how to  
store entries.  
NOTE:  
When prompted by the system, say the name of  
the phone book entry you wish to call. The system  
acknowledges the name.  
If you want to end an action without completing it,  
you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the  
system is waiting for a response. The system will  
end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is  
cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate  
you have exited the system.  
If you do not wish to take the call when you  
hear the ring tone, press the  
on the steering wheel.  
button  
If there are multiple locations associated with the  
name, the system asks you to choose the loca-  
tion.  
For additional command options, see “List of  
voice commands” later in this section.  
If you want to go back to the previous command,  
you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time  
the system is waiting for a response.  
Once you have confirmed the name and location,  
the system begins the call.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
B
(Speak Digits)  
If a call back number does not exist, the system  
announces, “There is no number to call back”and  
ends the VR session.  
●
“Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-  
mand to transfer the call from the Bluetoothா  
Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular  
phone when privacy is desired.  
᭺
When prompted by the system, say the number  
you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”  
and “Making a call by entering a phone number”  
in this section for more details.  
During a call  
The system announces, “Transfer call. Call  
transferred to privacy mode.” The system  
then ends the VR session.  
During a call there are several command options  
C
“Special Number”  
᭺
available. Press the  
button on the steering  
wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-  
mands.  
For dialing more than 10 digits or any special  
characters, say “Special Number”. When the  
system acknowledges the command, the system  
will prompt you to speak the number.  
To reconnect the call from the cellular phone  
to the Bluetoothா Hands-Free System,  
●
“Help” — The system announces the avail-  
able commands.  
press the  
button.  
●
“Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute  
your voice so the other party cannot hear it.  
Use the mute command again to unmute  
your voice.  
D
“Redial”  
᭺
●
“Go back/Correction” — The system an-  
nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session  
and returns to the call.  
Use the Redial command to call the last number  
that was dialed.  
●
●
“Cancel/Quit” — The system announces  
“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns  
to the call.  
NOTE:  
The system acknowledges the command, re-  
peats the number and begins dialing.  
If a call is ended or the cellular phone  
network connection is lost while the Mute  
feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset  
to “off” for the next call so the other party  
can hear your voice.  
If a redial number does not exist, the system  
announces, “There is no number to redial” and  
ends the VR session.  
“Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send  
command to enter numbers, “*”or “#”during  
a call. For example, if you were directed to  
dial an extension by an automated system:  
E
“Call back”  
᭺
Use the Call Back command to dial the number of  
the last incoming call within the vehicle.  
Say: “Send one two three four.”  
The system acknowledges the command  
and sends the tones associated with the  
numbers. The system then ends the VR ses-  
sion and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,  
Say “pound” for “#”.  
The system acknowledges the command, re-  
peats the number and begins dialing.  
4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
“Transfer entry”  
Manual for details. You can also visit  
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions  
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN  
recommended cellular phones.  
“Phonebook” (phones without  
automatic phonebook download  
function)  
᭺
Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new  
name in the system.  
When prompted by the system, say the name you  
would like to give the new entry.  
NOTE:  
The system repeats the number and prompts you  
for the next command. When you have finished  
entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose  
“Store.”  
The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-  
able when the vehicle is moving.  
For example, say: “Mary.”  
If the name is too long or too short, the system  
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.  
Main Menu  
The system confirms the name, location and  
number.  
“Phonebook”  
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name  
already stored, the system tells you, then prompts  
you for a name again.  
A
“Transfer Entry”  
᭺
B
“Delete Entry”  
᭺
C
“List Names”  
᭺
B
“Delete Entry”  
᭺
Use the Delete Entry command to erase one  
entry from the phonebook. After the system rec-  
ognizes the command, speak the name to delete  
or say “List Names” to choose an entry.  
The system will ask you to transfer a phone  
number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.  
For phones that do not support automatic down-  
load of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetoothா pro-  
file), the “Phonebook”command is used to manu-  
ally add entries to the vehicle phonebook.  
Enter a phone number by voice command:  
For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”  
See “How to say numbers” in this section for  
more information.  
C
“List names”  
᭺
Use the List Names command to hear all the  
names in the phonebook.  
The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each  
phone connected to the system.  
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular  
phone’s memory:  
The system recites the phonebook entries but  
does not include the actual phone numbers.  
When the playback of the list is complete, the  
system goes back to the main menu.  
NOTE:  
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges  
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer  
from the phone handset. The new contact phone  
number will be transferred from the cellular  
phone via the Bluetoothா communication link.  
Each phone has its own separate phone-  
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-  
book if you are currently connected with  
Phone B.  
You can stop the playback of the list at any time  
by pressing the button on the steering  
wheel. The system ends the VR session.  
The transfer procedure varies according to each  
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
difficulty recognizing. For more information see  
“Record Name” in this section.  
For example, say: “Mary.”  
If the name is too long or too short, the system  
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.  
“Phonebook” (phones with automatic  
phonebook download function)  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name  
already stored, the system tells you, then prompts  
you for a name again.  
Each phone has its own separate phone-  
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-  
book if you are currently connected with  
Phone B.  
The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-  
able when the vehicle is moving.  
The system will ask you to transfer a phone  
number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.  
Main Menu  
A
“List names”  
᭺
Use the List Names command to hear all the  
names and locations in the phone book.  
“Phonebook”  
Enter a phone number by voice command:  
A
“List Names”  
᭺
B
“Transfer Entry”  
᭺
For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”  
See “How to say numbers” in this section for  
more information.  
C
The system recites the phone book entries but  
does not include the actual phone numbers.  
When the playback of the list is complete, the  
system goes back to the main menu.  
“Delete Entry”  
᭺
D
“Record Name”  
᭺
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular  
phone’s memory:  
For phones that support automatic download of  
the phonebook (PBAP Bluetoothா profile), the  
“Phonebook” command is used to manage en-  
tries in the vehicle phonebook. You can say the  
name of an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of  
that entry.  
You can stop the playback of the list at any time  
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges  
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer  
from the phone handset. The new contact phone  
number will be transferred from the cellular  
phone via the Bluetoothா communication link.  
by pressing the  
button on the steering  
wheel. The system ends the VR session. See the  
“Record Name” command in this section for in-  
formation about recording custom voice tags for  
list entries that the system has difficulty pro-  
nouncing.  
The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for  
each phone connected to the system.  
The transfer procedure varies according to each  
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s  
Manual for details. You can also visit  
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions  
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN  
recommended cellular phones.  
B
“Transfer entry”  
᭺
Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new  
name in the system.  
When a phone is connected to the system, the  
phonebook is automatically downloaded to the  
vehicle. This feature allows you to access your  
phonebook from the Bluetoothா system and call  
contacts by name. You can record a custom  
voice tag for contact names that the system has  
When prompted by the system, say the name you  
would like to give the new entry.  
4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The system repeats the number and prompts you  
for the next command. When you have finished  
entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose  
“Store.”  
Use the Recent Calls command to access out-  
going, incoming or missed calls.  
Use the Connect Phone commands to manage  
the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable  
the Bluetoothா function on the vehicle.  
A
“Outgoing”  
᭺
Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing  
calls made from the vehicle.  
A
“Add Phone”  
᭺
Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to  
the vehicle. See “Connecting procedure” in this  
section for more information.  
The system confirms the name, location and  
number.  
B
“Incoming”  
᭺
Use the Incoming command to list the incoming  
calls made to the vehicle.  
C
“Delete Entry”  
᭺
B
“Select Phone”  
᭺
Use the Delete Entry command to erase one  
entry from the phonebook. After the system rec-  
ognizes the command, speak the name to delete  
or say “List Names” to choose an entry.  
Use the Select Phone command to select from a  
list of phones connected to the vehicle. The sys-  
tem will list the names assigned to each phone  
and then prompt you for the phone you wish to  
select. Only one phone can be active at a time.  
C
“Missed”  
᭺
Use the Missed command to list the calls made to  
the vehicle that were not answered.  
D
“Record name”  
᭺
The system allows you to record custom voice  
tags for contact names in the phonebook that the  
vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This feature can  
also be used to record voice tags to directly dial  
an entry with multiple numbers. Up to 40 voice  
tags can be recorded to the system.  
“Connect Phone”  
C
“Delete Phone”  
᭺
NOTE:  
Use the Delete Phone command to delete a  
phone that is connected to the vehicle. The sys-  
tem will list the names assigned to each phone  
and then prompt you for the phone you wish to  
delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also  
delete that phonebook for that phone.  
The Add Phone command is not available  
when the vehicle is moving.  
Main Menu  
“Recent Calls”  
“Connect Phone”  
Main Menu  
A
“Add Phone”  
᭺
“Recent Calls”  
B
“Select Phone”  
᭺
A
“Outgoing”  
᭺
B
“Incoming”  
᭺
C
“Missed”  
᭺
C
“Delete Phone”  
᭺
D
“Turn Bluetooth OFF”  
᭺
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D
“Turn Bluetooth OFF”  
speaker adaptation mode or press the  
●
●
The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.  
᭺
PHONE/END (  
) button to select a dif-  
Use the Turn Bluetooth OFF command to prevent  
a wireless connection to your phone.  
The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or  
LOCK position.  
ferent language.”  
5. Press the  
button.  
SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE  
Training phrases  
For information on selecting a different lan-  
guage, see “Choosing a language” in this  
section.  
Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of-  
dialect users to train the system to improve rec-  
ognition accuracy. By repeating a number of  
commands, the users can create a voice model of  
their own voice that is stored in the system. The  
system is capable of storing a different speaker  
adaptation model for each connected phone.  
During the SA mode, the system instructs the  
trainer to say the following phrases. (The system  
will prompt you for each phrase.)  
6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected  
automatically. If both memory locations are  
already in use, the system will prompt you to  
overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-  
vided by the system.  
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
phonebook transfer entry  
dial three oh four two nine  
delete call back number  
incoming  
Training procedure  
7. When preparation is complete and you are  
The procedure for training a voice is as follows.  
transfer entry  
ready to begin, press the  
button.  
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet  
outdoor location.  
eight pause nine three two pause seven  
delete all entries  
8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the  
instructions provided by the system.  
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-  
ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-  
sion in P (Park).  
9. When training is finished, the system will tell  
you an adequate number of phrases have  
been recorded.  
call seven two four zero nine  
phonebook delete entry  
next entry  
3. Press and hold the  
than 5 seconds.  
button for more  
10. The system will announce that speaker ad-  
aptation has been completed and the sys-  
tem is ready.  
dial star two one seven oh  
yes  
4. The system announces: “Press the  
PHONE/SEND button for the  
hands-free phone system to enter the  
(
)
The SA mode will stop if:  
no  
●
The  
button is pressed for more than 5  
seconds in SA mode.  
select  
4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
missed  
●
●
●
●
●
●
delete  
●
To browse the menu options, tilt the tuning  
) switch up or down. The system will  
always speak the current menu option. De-  
pending on the audio display, it will also  
show the current menu option.  
(
dial eight five six nine two  
Bluetooth on  
dial nine seven two six six  
call seven six three oh one  
go back  
outgoing  
●
●
To select the current menu option, press the  
call three one nine oh two  
nine seven pause pause three oh eight  
cancel  
call five six two eight zero  
dial six six four three seven  
PHONE/SEND (  
To go back to the previous menu, press the  
PHONE/END ( ) button. If the current  
) button.  
MANUAL CONTROL  
menu is the Main Menu, pressing the  
call back number  
While using the voice recognition system, it is  
possible to select menu options by using the  
steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice  
commands. The manual control mode does not  
allow dialing a phone number by digits. The user  
may select an entry from the Phonebook or Re-  
cent Calls lists. To re-activate voice recognition,  
exit the manual control mode by pressing and  
PHONE/END (  
Phone system.  
) button will exit the  
call star two zero nine five  
delete phone  
●
To exit the manual control mode, press and  
hold the PHONE/END (  
seconds.  
) button for 5  
dial eight three zero five one  
record name  
four three pause two nine pause zero  
delete redial number  
phonebook list names  
call eight oh five four one  
correction  
holding the PHONE/END (  
time, pressing the PHONE/SEND (  
will start the Hands Free Phone System.  
) button. At that  
) button  
Operating tips  
●
To enter manual control mode, start the  
voice recognition system and tilt the tuning  
) switch up or down. The system will  
connect phone  
(
dial seven four oh one eight  
previous entry  
speak ЉShowing Manual OptionsЉ when  
manual controls are initially activated.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE  
The system should respond correctly to all voice  
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-  
countered, try the following solutions.  
Where the solutions are listed by number, try  
each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until  
the problem is resolved.  
Symptom  
Solution  
1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” in this section.  
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.  
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.  
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too  
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.  
System fails to interpret the command correctly.  
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.  
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-  
prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” in this section.  
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by  
using the “List Names” command. See “Phonebook” in this section.  
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the  
phone book.  
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.  
4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BLUETOOTHா HANDS-FREE PHONE  
SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM  
(if so equipped)  
WARNING  
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle  
in a safe location. If you have to use a  
phone while driving, exercise extreme  
caution at all times so full attention may  
be given to vehicle operation.  
● If you are unable to devote full attention  
to vehicle operation while talking on  
the phone, pull off the road to a safe  
location and stop your vehicle.  
CAUTION  
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,  
use a phone after starting the engine.  
WHA1501  
make or receive a hands-free telephone call with  
your cellular phone in the vehicle.  
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetoothா  
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-  
patible Bluetoothா enabled cellular phone, you  
can set up the wireless connection between your  
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.  
With Bluetoothா wireless technology, you can  
Once your cellular phone is connected to the  
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-  
necting procedure is required. Your phone is  
automatically connected with the in-vehicle  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
phone module when the ignition switch is placed  
in the ON position with the connected cellular  
phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.  
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is  
difficult to receive cellular signal; such as  
in a tunnel, in an underground parking  
garage, near a tall building or in a moun-  
tainous area.  
●
●
If the hands-free phone system seems to be  
malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”  
in this section. You can also visit  
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-  
shooting help.  
You can register up to 5 different Bluetoothா  
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.  
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone  
at a time.  
Some cellular phones or other devices may  
cause interference or a buzzing noise to  
come from the audio system speakers. Stor-  
ing the device in a different location may  
reduce or eliminate the noise.  
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it  
from being dialed.  
NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the  
phone commands, so dialing a phone number  
using your voice is possible. For more details, see  
“NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in this sec-  
tion.  
●
●
●
When the radio wave condition is not ideal  
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be  
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-  
ing a call.  
●
●
●
Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manual  
regarding the telephone charges, cellular  
phone antenna and body, etc.  
Immediately after the ignition switch is  
placed in the ON position, it may be impos-  
sible to receive a call for a short period of  
time.  
Before using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone  
System, refer to the following notes.  
The signal strength display on the monitor  
will not coincide with the signal strength  
display of some cellular phones.  
●
Set up the wireless connection between a  
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone  
module before using the hands-free phone  
system.  
Do not place the cellular phone in an area  
surrounded by metal or far away from the  
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone  
quality degradation and wireless connection  
disruption.  
If reception between callers is unclear, ad-  
justing the incoming or outgoing call volume  
may improve the clarity. See “Call volume” in  
this section.  
●
Some Bluetoothா enabled cellular phones  
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle  
phone  
module.  
Please  
visit  
●
While a cellular phone is connected through  
the Bluetoothா wireless connection, the bat-  
tery power of the cellular phone may dis-  
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetoothா  
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge  
cellular phones.  
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-  
mended phone list and connecting.  
●
You will not be able to use a hands-free  
phone under the following conditions:  
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-  
vice area.  
4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REGULATORY INFORMATION  
BLUETOOTH௡ is a  
trademark owned by  
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,  
U.S.A. and licensed  
to Clarion.  
FCC Regulatory information  
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with  
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the  
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,  
modification, or attachments could damage  
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-  
tions.  
VOICE COMMANDS  
You can use voice commands to operate various  
Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System features  
using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For  
more details, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition  
System” in this section.  
– Operation is subject to the following two con-  
ditions:  
1. This device may not cause interference and  
LHA1236  
2. this device must accept any interference,  
including interference that may cause un-  
desired operation of the device.  
CONNECTING PROCEDURE  
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-  
ment panel and select the “Bluetooth” key  
on the display.  
IC Regulatory information  
– Operation is subject to the following two con-  
ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-  
ence, and (2) this device must accept any  
interference, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation of the device.  
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-  
quirements of the Canadian Interference-  
Causing Equipment Regulations.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LHA1316  
LHA1317  
LHA1318  
2. Select the “Connect Bluetooth” key.  
3. A popup box will appear on the screen,  
prompting you to confirm that the connec-  
tion is for the phone system. Select the “Yes”  
key.  
4. When a PIN code appears on the screen,  
operate the Bluetoothா cellular phone to  
enter the PIN code.  
The connecting procedure of the cellular  
phone varies according to each cellular  
phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s  
Manual for details. You can also visit  
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or call the  
NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for  
instructions on connecting recommended  
cellular phones.  
When the connecting is complete, the  
screen will return to the Bluetoothா settings  
screen.  
4-108 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LHA1320  
LHA1321  
LHA1381  
2. Select the “Vehicle Phonebook” key  
6. Select the “Voicetag” key to record a name  
to speak when using the Voice Recognition  
system.  
VEHICLE PHONEBOOK  
3. Select the “Add New” key at the top of the  
screen.  
This vehicle has two phonebooks available for  
your use. Depending on your phone, the system  
may automatically download your entire cell  
phone’s phonebook into the “Handset Phone-  
book”. For the details on downloading your  
phonebook, see “Handset phonebook” in this  
section. If your phonebook does not automati-  
cally download, you may set up the vehicle  
phonebook for up to 40 entries. This phonebook  
allows you to record a name to speak while using  
voice recognition.  
7. Select the “Store” key and prepare to speak  
the name after the tone.  
4. Choose the method for entering the phone-  
book entry. For this example, select “Enter  
Number by Keypad”.  
8. When the voicetag is successfully saved  
5. Enter the digits and select the “OK” key. For  
more information, see “How to use the touch  
screen” in this section.  
(
), select the “OK” key to save the  
phonebook entry.  
9. After the phonebook entry is saved, it will  
show a screen that is ready to call the num-  
ber. Select the “Back” key to return to the  
Vehicle Phonebook.  
1. Press the  
wheel.  
button on the steering  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
Copy from Call History  
The system will show a list of your incoming,  
outgoing or missed calls that were down-  
loaded from your cell phone (depending on  
your phone’s compatibility). You may select  
one of these entries to save in the vehicle  
phonebook.  
Copy from the Handset  
The system will show your cell phone’s  
phonebook that was downloaded (depend-  
ing on your phone’s compatibility). You may  
select one of these entries to save in the  
vehicle phonebook.  
LHA1382  
LHA1383  
●
Editing the Vehicle Phonebook  
5. Select the desired item to change.  
The following editing items are available:  
1. Press the  
wheel.  
button on the steering  
●
Entry #  
2. Select the “Vehicle Phonebook” key.  
Changes the displayed number of the se-  
lected entry.  
3. Select the desired entry from the displayed  
list.  
●
●
●
Name  
Edit the name of the entry using the keypad  
displayed on the screen.  
4. Select the “Edit” key.  
Number  
Edit the phone number using the keypad  
displayed on the screen.  
Type  
Select the icon from the icon list.  
4-110 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
Voicetag  
2. Select the “Phone” key.  
Confirm and store the voicetag. Voicetags  
allow easy dialing using the NISSAN Voice  
Recognition system. For more information,  
see “NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in  
this section.  
3. Select the “Download Handset Phonebook”  
key.  
Once the handset phonebook is transferred to  
the vehicle, it can be accessed by pressing  
the  
button on the steering wheel, then  
selecting the “Handset Phonebook” key.  
To delete an entry, select the “Delete” key at step  
3.  
Whether the handset phonebook is transferred  
manually or automatically, the process can take  
up to five minutes to complete, depending on the  
size of the handset phonebook. See the cellular  
phone’s owner’s manual for more details.  
HANDSET PHONEBOOK  
Many phones will support an automatic down-  
load of the cellular phone’s phonebook. Since  
this method allows for up to 1000 numbers to be  
stored and entries are automatically assigned  
voice tags by the system, this is a useful function  
for easy dialing supported by the Voice Recogni-  
tion system.  
LHA1319  
Transferring the handset phonebook  
If your cellular phone supports automatic down-  
loading, the system transfers the handset phone-  
book automatically by default. To ensure that this  
feature is activated, press the SETTING button  
on the instrument panel and select the “Phone”  
key. The “Auto Downloaded” selection should  
have the amber indicator next to the word ON  
activated. Select the “Auto Downloaded” key to  
toggle this feature on or off.  
To transfer the handset phonebook to the vehicle  
manually, follow these steps:  
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-  
ment panel.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
Call History: Select the name from the in-  
coming or outgoing call history.  
Dial Number: Input the phone number manu-  
ally using a keypad displayed on the screen.  
For information on how to use the touch-  
screen, see “How to use the touch screen”  
in this section.  
3. For all of the methods listed in Step 2 except  
“Dial Number”, dialing commences when the  
listed name is selected. Dialing commences  
when “OK”is selected if the number is input-  
ted manually. The screen changes to the  
“Call in Progress” screen.  
LHA1322  
LHA1323  
4. After the call is over, perform one of the  
following to finish the call:  
RECEIVING A CALL  
MAKING A CALL  
a. Select the “Hang up” key on the Call in  
Progress screen.  
When you hear a phone ring, the display will  
change to phone mode. To receive a call, follow  
one of the procedures listed below.  
To make a call, follow the procedure below:  
1. Press the button on the steering  
b. Press the  
wheel.  
switch on the steering  
wheel. The “Phone” screen will appear on  
the display.  
a. Select the “Answer” key on the display.  
b. Press the phone  
wheel switches.  
button on the steering  
2. Select one of the following options to make a  
call:  
There are some options available when receiving  
a call. Select one of the following displayed on  
the screen.  
●
Vehicle Phonebook: Select the name from  
an entry stored in the vehicle phonebook.  
●
Handset Phonebook: Select the name from  
an entry stored in the handset phonebook.  
4-112 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Answer:  
Accept an incoming call to talk.  
Keypad:  
Brings up a keypad; enter digits when needed.  
For example, entering your PIN number for voice-  
mail.  
Hold Call:  
Put an incoming call on hold.  
NOTE:  
Reject Call:  
Reject an incoming call.  
Pushing the TALK  
switch on the  
To finish the call, follow one of the procedures  
listed below:  
steering wheel during a call allows num-  
bers and digits to be sent using Voice Rec-  
ognition.  
a. Select the “Reject Call” key on the display.  
Cancel Mute:  
This will appear after the “Mute” key is selected.  
Mute will be cancelled.  
b. Press and hold the phone  
steering wheel switches.  
button on the  
LHA1324  
To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or  
quieter, press the volume control switch located  
on the steering wheel switches or turn the volume  
control knob on the instrument panel while talking  
on the phone. This adjustment is also available in  
the SETTING mode.  
DURING A CALL  
There are some options available during a call.  
Select one of the following displayed on the  
screen, if necessary:  
Hang up:  
Finish the call.  
Use Handset:  
Transfer the call to the cellular phone.  
Mute:  
Mute your voice to the person.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download Handset Phonebook:  
See “Handset Phonebook” in this section for  
adding, editing and deleting contacts in the  
handset phonebook.  
LHA1324  
LHA1319  
ENDING A CALL  
PHONE SETTINGS  
To finish the call, perform one of the following  
procedures:  
To set up the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone  
System to your preferred settings, press the SET-  
TING button on the instrument panel and select  
the “Phone” key on the display.  
●
Select the “Hang up” key on the “Call in  
Progress” display.  
Edit Vehicle Phonebook:  
●
Push the  
wheel.  
switch on the steering  
See “Vehicle Phonebook” in this section for add-  
ing, editing and deleting contacts in the vehicle  
phonebook.  
Delete Phonebook:  
Delete a phonebook stored on the system.  
4-114 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Edit Bluetooth Info:  
Check information about the device name, device  
address and device PIN.  
Replace Connected Phone:  
Replace the phone currently connected to the  
system. This option allows you to keep any voic-  
etags that were recorded using the previous  
phone.  
LHA1325  
LHA1316  
Volume & Ringtone:  
BLUETOOTH SETTINGS  
Adjust the volume level of the ringtone, incoming  
call sound and outgoing call sound. When the  
“Automatic Hold” option is turned on, an incom-  
ing call will be placed on hold automatically after  
several rings. When the “Vehicle Ringtone” op-  
tion is turned on, a specific ringtone that is differ-  
ent from the cellular phone’s will sound when  
receiving a call.  
To set up the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone  
System to your preferred settings, press the SET-  
TING button on the instrument panel and select  
the “Bluetooth” key on the display.  
Bluetooth:  
Turn the Bluetoothா system on or off.  
Connect Bluetooth:  
See “Connecting procedure” in this section for  
more information about connecting a phone.  
Auto Downloaded:  
See “Handset Phonebook” in this section for  
information about automatically downloading the  
handset phonebook.  
Connected Devices:  
Display a list of the Bluetoothா devices con-  
nected to the system.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION  
SYSTEM (if so equipped)  
You can also adjust the volume of an incoming  
voice during a call by pushing the volume control  
switch on the steering wheel or by turning the  
volume control knob on the instrument panel.  
NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands-free  
operation of the systems equipped on this ve-  
hicle, such as phone and vehicle information.  
There are two voice recognition modes of opera-  
tion available. They are:  
●
●
Standard Mode  
Alternate Command Mode  
In Standard Mode (the factory default setting),  
commands that are available are always shown  
on the display and announced by the system. You  
can complete your desired operation by simply  
following the prompts given by the system. Not all  
NISSAN Voice Recognition options are available  
while in Standard Mode.  
LHA1253  
CALL VOLUME  
For advanced operation, you can change to an  
Alternate Command Mode that enables the op-  
eration of the display, audio, and climate control  
through NISSAN Voice Recognition. When this  
mode is active, an expanded list of commands  
can be spoken after pushing the TALK  
switch on the steering wheel, and the voice com-  
mand menu prompts are turned off.  
Adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volume  
may improve clarity if reception between callers is  
unclear.  
●
Incoming call — adjusting this setting allows  
you to hear a difference in volume.  
●
Outgoing call — adjusting this setting allows  
the person you are talking with to hear a  
difference in volume.  
In Alternate Command Mode the recognition  
success rate may be affected because the num-  
ber of available commands and the ways of  
speaking each command are increased. See  
“NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate Com-  
mand Mode” in this section.  
To access the settings, press the SETTING but-  
ton, then select “Volume & Beeps”.  
4-116 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To improve the recognition success rate when  
Alternate Command Mode is active, try using the  
Speaker Adaptation Function available in that  
mode. See “Speaker Adaptation Function” in this  
section. Otherwise, it is recommended that Alter-  
nate Command Mode be turned off and Standard  
Mode be used for the best recognition perfor-  
mance.  
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION  
STANDARD MODE  
The Standard Mode enables control of naviga-  
tion, phone and vehicle information. With this  
setting active, commands that are available are  
always shown on the display and announced by  
the system.  
While using the NISSAN Voice Recognition sys-  
tem for certain Phone and Navigation features,  
you can switch to using manual controls (touch-  
screen, steering wheel controls) and the informa-  
tion you have already entered by voice control will  
be retained. To switch to manual controls, select  
the “Manual Controls” key on the display when it  
appears. The system will respond by speaking  
“Changing to manual operation. Please use  
manual controls to continue.”  
Displaying user guide  
If you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition system  
for the first time or you do not know how to  
operate it, you can display the User Guide for  
confirmation.  
LHA1326  
You can confirm how to use voice commands by  
accessing a simplified User Guide, which con-  
tains basic instructions and tutorials for several  
voice commands.  
1. Press the INFO button on the instrument  
panel.  
2. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.  
For the voice commands for the navigation sys-  
tem, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s  
Manual of your vehicle.  
NOTE:  
You can skip steps 1 and 2 by pressing  
For vehicles in the U.S., the factory default setting  
is the Standard Mode. See “NISSAN Voice Rec-  
ognition Standard Mode” in this section. For ve-  
hicles in Canada, the factory default setting is the  
Alternate Command Mode. See “NISSAN Voice  
Recognition Alternate Command Mode” in this  
section.  
the  
switch and saying “Help”.  
3. Select the “User Guide” key.  
4. Select an item.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Available items:  
Tutorials on the operation of the Voice Rec-  
ognition system  
●
Getting Started  
If you choose “Finding a Street Address”, “Using  
the Address Book” or “Placing Calls”, you can  
view tutorials on how to perform these operations  
using Voice Recognition.  
Describes the basics of how to operate the  
Voice Recognition system.  
●
Let’s Practice  
Initiates a practice session that demon-  
strates how to improve voice recognition by  
the system.  
●
●
Using the Address Book  
Tutorial for using the Address Book  
Finding a Street Address  
LHA1329  
Tutorial for entering a destination by street  
address.  
Getting started  
Before using the Voice Recognition system for  
the first time, you can confirm how to use com-  
mands by viewing the Getting Started section of  
the User Guide.  
●
●
Placing Calls  
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice  
command operation.  
1. Select the “Getting Started” key.  
Help on Speaking  
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the  
screen.  
Displays useful tips of speaking for correct  
command recognition by the system.  
4-118 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LHA1327  
LHA1328  
LHA1330  
To initiate a practice session, access the User  
Guide and select the “Let’s Practice” key. Follow  
the on-screen prompts until the session is com-  
plete. After the session is completed, a screen  
will be displayed that shows an analysis of differ-  
ent elements of your speech. Select the “Try  
Again” to repeat the session if improvement is  
needed. Select the “Done” key to return to the  
User Guide screen.  
Let’s Practice  
Useful tips for correct operation  
The system is equipped with a tutorial that allows  
you to practice saying commands and receive  
feedback on the volume, speed and timing of your  
speech.  
You can display useful speaking tips to help the  
system recognize your voice commands cor-  
rectly.  
1. Select “Help on Speaking”.  
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the  
screen.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USING THE SYSTEM  
Initialization  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,  
which takes a few seconds. When completed,  
the system is ready to accept voice commands. If  
the  
switch is pressed before the initializa-  
tion completes, voice commands will not be ac-  
cepted. Please wait until the NISSAN Voice Rec-  
ognition initialization is completed.  
BEFORE STARTING  
To get the best recognition performance from  
Voice Recognition, observe the following:  
LHA1331  
LHA0768  
Voice recognition settings  
GIVING VOICE COMMANDS  
●
The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet  
as possible. Close the windows to eliminate  
the surrounding noises (traffic noise and vi-  
bration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the  
system from correctly recognizing the voice  
commands.  
The available settings of the NISSAN Voice Rec-  
ognition system are described.  
1. Press the  
ing wheel.  
switch located on the steer-  
1. Select “Voice Recognition”.  
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the  
screen.  
●
●
●
Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a  
command.  
Speak in a natural conversational voice with-  
out pausing between words.  
If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fan  
speed is automatically lowered so that your  
commands can be recognized more easily.  
4-120 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operating tips  
How to speak numbers  
●
Say a command after the tone. Voice com-  
mands cannot be accepted when the icon  
is  
Voice Recognition requires a certain way to  
speak numbers when giving voice commands.  
Refer to the following examples.  
.
General rule:  
●
Commands that are available are always  
shown on the display and spoken through  
voice menu prompts. Commands other than  
those that are displayed are not accepted.  
Please follow the prompts given by the sys-  
tem.  
●
●
Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.  
When saying the phone number 800-662-  
6200, the system will accept “eight-  
hundred” in addition to “eight zero zero” or  
“eight oh oh”. 500, 700, and 900 are also  
supported.  
●
If the command is not recognized, the sys-  
tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the  
command in a clear voice.  
Examples:  
1-800-662-6200  
LHA1333  
●
2. A list of commands appears on the screen,  
and the system announces, “Would you like  
to access Phone, Navigation, Information,  
Audio or Help?”  
●
●
Press the  
switch on the steering  
wheel to return to the previous screen.  
– “One eight zero zero six six two six two  
zero zero”  
If you want to cancel the command, press  
and hold the  
“Voice cancelled” will be announced.  
switch. The message,  
– “One eight hundred six six two six two  
zero zero”  
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the  
screen changes from  
a command.  
to  
, speak  
●
If you want to adjust the volume of the sys-  
tem feedback, push the volume control  
switch on the steering wheel or use the  
audio system volume knob while the system  
is making an announcement.  
4. Continue to follow the voice menu prompts  
and speak after the tone sounds until your  
desired operation is completed.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:  
You can improve the recognition of phone num-  
bers by saying the phone number in three groups  
of numbers. For example, when you try to call  
800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, and  
the system will then ask you for the next three  
digits. Then, say “six six two”. After recognition,  
the system will then ask for the last four digits.  
Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this method of  
phone digit entry can improve recognition perfor-  
mance.  
NOTE:  
When speaking a house number, speak the  
number “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter  
“O” is included in the house number, it will  
not be recognized as “0” even if you speak  
“oh” instead of “zero”.  
4-122 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Standard Mode command list  
Category Command:  
COMMAND  
Phone  
ACTION  
Displays Phone function commands.  
Displays Navigation function commands.  
Displays Vehicle Information.  
Displays Audio commands.  
Navigation  
Information  
Audio  
Help  
Displays User Guide.  
Phone Command:  
COMMAND  
ACTION  
Dial Number  
Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.  
Change Number  
Vehicle Phonebook  
Handset Phonebook  
Call History  
Corrects the phone number when it is not recognized (available during phone number entry).  
Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the vehicle phonebook.  
Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the handset phonebook.  
Makes a call to a number in the incoming or outgoing call logs.  
Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).  
International Call  
Navigation Command:  
COMMAND  
Home  
ACTION  
Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.  
Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental US and Canada only).  
Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.  
Searches for a location stored in the Address Book.  
Sets a route to a previous destination.  
Address  
Places  
Address Book  
Previous Destinations  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information Command:  
COMMAND  
Traffic Info.  
ACTION  
Turns the traffic information system on and off.  
Displays current vehicle location.  
Where am I?  
Audio Command:  
COMMAND  
AM  
ACTION  
Changes the audio system mode to AM radio.  
Changes the audio system mode to FM radio.  
Changes the audio system mode to satellite radio.  
Changes the audio system mode to Music Box.  
Changes the audio system mode to CD.  
FM  
XM  
Music Box  
CD  
4-124 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Voice command examples  
Some basic voice command examples are de-  
scribed here.  
For navigation system commands, see the sepa-  
rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.  
LHA0768  
LHA1333  
Example 1 — Placing a call to the phone  
number 800-662-6200:  
2. The system announces, “Would you like to  
access Phone, Navigation, Information, Au-  
dio or Help?”  
1. Press the  
ing wheel.  
switch located on the steer-  
3. Say “Phone”.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LHA1334  
LHA1335  
LHA1336  
4. Say “Dial Number”.  
5. Say “800”.  
6. The system announces, “Please say the next  
three digits or dial, or say change number.”  
7. Say “662”.  
4-126 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
●
You can only say a phone number using the  
3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10 digits using  
this command. Please use the “International  
Call” command for all other formats, and  
when special characters such as star (*),  
pound (#), and plus (+) need to be entered.  
If you say “Change Number” during phone  
number entry, the system will automatically  
request that you repeat the number using  
the 3-3-4 format. In this case please say the  
area code first and then follow the prompts.  
●
●
Do not add a “1” in front of the area code  
when speaking phone numbers.  
LHA1337  
LHA1338  
If the system does not recognize your com-  
mand, please try repeating the command  
using a natural voice. Speaking too slowly or  
too loudly may further decrease recognition  
performance.  
8. The system announces, “Please say the last  
four digits or say change number.”  
10. The system announces, “Dial or Change  
Number?”  
9. Say “6200”.  
11. Say “Dial”.  
12. The system makes a call to 800-662- 6200.  
NOTE:  
●
You can also speak “800-662-6200” (10  
continuous digits) or “662-6200” (7 con-  
tinuous digits), if the area code is not nec-  
essary. However, the 3-3-4 digit grouping is  
recommended for improved recognition.  
See “How to speak numbers”in this section.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LHA0768  
LHA1333  
LHA1334  
Example 2 — Placing an international call  
to the phone number 011-81-111-222-3333:  
2. The system announces, “Would you like to  
access Phone, Navigation, Information, Au-  
dio or Help?”  
4. Say “International Call”.  
1. Press the  
ing wheel.  
switch located on the steer-  
3. Say “Phone”.  
4-128 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION  
ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE  
The Alternate Command Mode enables control  
of the Audio, Climate Control and Display sys-  
tems as well as additional commands for the  
Vehicle Information, Phone and Navigation sys-  
tems. With this setting active, the system does  
not announce or display the available commands  
at each step.  
When Alternate Command Mode is activated, an  
expanded list of commands can be used after  
pushing the TALK  
switch. Under this  
mode, the screen for Standard Mode commands  
is not available on the display. Please review the  
expanded command list, available when this  
mode is active, as some Standard Mode com-  
mands are replaced. Please see examples of  
Alternate Command Mode screens.  
LHA1339  
LHA1340  
5. Say “011811112223333”.  
6. Say “Dial”.  
7. The system makes a call to 011-81-111-  
222-3333.  
NOTE:  
Please note that in this mode the recognition  
success rate may be affected as the number of  
available commands and ways of speaking each  
command are increased. You can turn this mode  
ON or OFF. When this mode is activated, the  
Voice Recognition Settings will change to show  
more options.  
Any digit input format is available in the  
International Number input process, as  
well as the special characters such as star  
(*), pound (#), and plus (+).  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LHA1403  
LHA1331  
LHA1341  
4. Select the “Alternate Command Mode” key.  
6. Alternate Command Mode is activated and  
the setting menu is expanded to include the  
Alternate Command Mode options. See  
“Settings menu” in this section for an expla-  
nation of the options.  
Activating Alternate Command Mode  
5. The confirmation message is displayed on  
the screen. Select the “OK” key to activate  
the Alternate Command Mode.  
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-  
ment panel.  
2. Select the “Others” key on the display.  
3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.  
Displaying the command list  
If you are controlling the system by voice com-  
mands for the first time or do not know the  
appropriate voice command, perform the follow-  
ing procedure for displaying the voice command  
list (available only in Alternate Command Mode).  
Press the  
switch, listen for the tone and  
say, “Help”. The system will respond by display-  
ing the command list main menu.  
4-130 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LHA1342  
LHA1402  
LHA1342  
Only manual controls such as the touchscreen  
can navigate the command list menu.  
1. Press the INFO button on the instrument  
panel.  
4. Select a category. The command list for the  
category selected is shown.  
As an alternative to the voice command “Help”,  
you may access the command list using the fol-  
lowing steps:  
2. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.  
5. If necessary, scroll the screen to view the  
entire list.  
NOTE:  
6. Select the “Back” key to return to the previ-  
ous screen.  
You can skip steps 1 and 2 if you say “Help”.  
3. Select the “Command List” key.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alternate Command Mode command list  
Phone Command:  
COMMAND  
ACTION  
Dial Number  
Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.  
Makes a call to a contact in the vehicle phonebook.  
Makes a call to a contact in the handset phonebook.  
Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).  
Shows the last 5 incoming phone calls.  
Vehicle Phonebook  
Handset Phonebook  
International Call  
Incoming Calls  
Outgoing Calls  
Missed Calls  
Shows the last 5 outgoing phone calls.  
Shows the last 5 missed phone calls.  
Navigation Command:  
COMMAND  
ACTION  
Home  
Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.  
Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental US and Canada only).  
Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.  
Displays the first 5 entries of the Address Book.  
Address  
Places  
Address Book  
Previous Destinations  
Previous Start Point  
Minimize Freeway Route  
Fastest Route  
Shortest Route  
Cancel Route  
Delete Destination  
Birdview Map  
Planview Map  
North Up  
Sets a route to a previous destination.  
Calculates a route to your previous starting point of the last route.  
Recalculates a route to the current destination while minimizing freeway usage.  
Recalculates a route to the current destination using the fastest estimated time.  
Recalculates a route to the current destination using the shortest distance.  
Cancels the current route.  
Deletes the current destination.  
Changes the Map display to Birdview.  
Changes the Map display to a 2-dimensional view.  
Changes the Map display to keep north pointing up on the screen.  
4-132 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMMAND  
ACTION  
Heading Up  
Changes the Map display to keep the direction of the vehicle pointing up on the screen.  
Changes the map scale to a smaller number.  
Changes the map scale to a larger number.  
Turns the navigation voice guidance on or off.  
Repeats the last navigation voice guidance.  
Zoom In <1 to 13>  
Zoom Out <1 to 13>  
Guidance Voice ON/OFF  
Guide Voice Repeat  
Information Command:  
COMMAND  
ACTION  
Traffic Information  
Where am I?  
Turns the traffic information system on and off.  
Displays the current vehicle location.  
Displays weather information.  
Displays the current weather map.  
Weather Information  
Weather Map  
Audio Command:  
COMMAND  
ACTION  
AM  
Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.  
Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.  
Turns to the SAT band, selecting the station last played.  
Turns to the Music Box hard-disk drive audio system.  
Starts to play a CD.  
FM  
XM  
Music Box  
CD  
USB  
Turns to the USB audio input.  
Bluetooth Audio  
AUX  
Turns to the Bluetoothா audio system.  
Turns to the AUX input.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
●
Finding a Street Address  
Tutorial for Finding a Street Address.  
Placing Calls  
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice  
command operation.  
●
Help on Speaking  
Displays useful tips for how to correctly  
speak commands in order for them to be  
properly recognized by the system.  
●
●
Voice Recognition Settings  
LHA1343  
LHA1344  
Describes the available Voice Recognition  
settings.  
4. Select an item.  
Displaying user guide  
Adapting the System to Your Voice  
Available items:  
You can confirm how to use voice commands by  
accessing a simplified User Guide, which con-  
tains basic instructions and tutorials for several  
voice commands.  
Tutorial for adapting the system to your  
voice.  
●
Getting Started  
Describes the basics of how to operate the  
Voice Recognition system.  
USING THE SYSTEM  
Initialization  
1. Press the INFO button on the instrument  
panel.  
●
Let’s Practice  
2. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.  
3. Select the “User Guide” key.  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,  
which takes a few seconds. When completed,  
the system is ready to accept voice commands. If  
Initiates a practice session that demon-  
strates how to improve recognition by the  
system.  
●
Using the Address Book  
the  
switch is pressed before the initializa-  
tion completes, the display will show the mes-  
sage: “System not ready.” or a beep sounds.  
Tutorial for using the Address Book.  
4-134 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Before starting  
To get the best performance from NISSAN Voice  
Recognition, observe the following:  
●
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as  
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the  
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration  
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system  
from recognizing the voice commands cor-  
rectly.  
●
When the climate control is in the AUTO  
mode, the fan speed decreases automati-  
cally for easy recognition.  
LHA0768  
LHA1345  
●
●
Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a  
command.  
2. A list of commands appears on the screen,  
and the system announces, “Please say a  
command from the displayed list or say Help  
to show all commands.”  
Giving voice commands  
Speak in a natural voice without pausing  
between words.  
1. Press and release the  
on the steering wheel.  
switch located  
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the  
screen changes from  
a command.  
to  
, speak  
4. Once a command is recognized, the system  
will announce the recognized command and  
perform the requested action.  
If the command is not recognized, the sys-  
tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the  
command in a clear voice after the tone.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this method of  
phone digit entry can improve recognition perfor-  
mance.  
Operating tips  
How to speak numbers  
●
Say a command after the tone. Voice com-  
mands cannot be accepted when the icon  
is  
Voice Recognition requires a certain way to  
speak numbers when giving voice commands.  
Refer to the following examples.  
.
NOTE:  
●
If the command is not recognized, the sys-  
tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the  
command in a clear voice.  
General rule:  
When speaking a house number, speak the  
number “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter  
“O” is included in the house number, it will  
not be recognized as “0” even if you speak  
“oh” instead of “zero”.  
●
●
Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.  
When saying the phone number 800-662-  
6200, the system will accept “eight-  
hundred” in addition to “eight zero zero” or  
“eight oh oh”. 500, 700, and 900 are also  
supported.  
●
●
Press the  
switch on the steering  
wheel to return to the previous screen.  
Settings menu  
If you want to cancel the command, press  
The content of the Settings Menu differs when  
the system is in the Alternate Command Mode.  
and hold the  
switch. The message,  
“Voice cancelled” will be announced.  
Examples:  
1-800-662-6200  
Command List:  
●
●
If you want to adjust the volume of the sys-  
tem feedback, push the volume control  
switch on the steering wheel or use the  
audio system volume knob while the system  
is making an announcement.  
●
Displays the command list for Alternate Com-  
mand Mode.  
– “One eight zero zero six six two six two  
zero zero”  
User Guide:  
– “One eight hundred six six two six two  
zero zero”  
To minimize the amount of prompts spoken  
by the system in Alternate Command Mode,  
use the Minimize Voice Feedback function.  
To access the Minimize Voice Feedback  
function press the SETTING button, then  
select the “Others” key. Then select the  
“Voice Recognition” key.  
The user guide provides basic instructions for  
using Voice Recognition and accessing some  
voice commands.  
Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:  
You can improve the recognition of phone num-  
bers by saying the phone number in three groups  
of numbers. For example, when you try to call  
800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, and  
the system will then ask you for the next three  
digits. Then, say “six six two”. After recognition,  
the system will then ask for the last four digits.  
NOTE:  
The user guide can also be accessed from  
within the INFO menu after pressing the  
INFO button.  
4-136 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Speaker Adaptation:  
Starts a system training procedure to learn the  
specific sounds of your voice. See “Speaker ad-  
aptation function” in this section.  
Alternate Command Mode:  
For advanced operation, an Alternate Command  
Mode is provided. This setting enables control of  
the Audio and Climate Control systems in addi-  
tion to additional commands for the Phone and  
Navigation systems. With this setting active, the  
system does not announce or display the avail-  
able commands at each step. When this mode is  
activated, the Voice Recognition Settings will  
change to show more options.  
LHA1341  
LHA1346  
4. Select the user whose voice is to be memo-  
rized by the system.  
SPEAKER ADAPTATION FUNCTION  
Minimize Voice Feedback:  
The Voice Recognition system has a function to  
learn the user’s voice for better voice recognition  
performance. The system can memorize the  
voices of up to three persons.  
Reduces the amount of the information spoken  
for each voice instruction.  
Having the system learn the user’s  
voice  
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-  
ment panel, select the “Others” key on the  
display.  
2. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.  
3. Select the “Speaker Adaptation” key.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LHA1347  
LHA1348  
LHA1349  
Speaker Adaptation function settings  
Edit Name:  
5. Select a category to be learned by the sys-  
tem from the following list:  
7. The system requests that you repeat a com-  
mand after a tone. This command is also  
displayed on the screen.  
● Phone  
Edit the user name using the keypad displayed on  
the screen.  
8. After the tone sounds and the icon on the  
● Navigation  
● Information  
● Audio  
screen changes from  
to  
, speak  
Reset Result:  
the command that the system requested.  
Resets the user’s voice that the Voice Recogni-  
tion system has learned.  
9. When the system has recognized the voice  
command, the voice of the user is learned.  
● Help  
Continuous Learning:  
Press the  
to return to the previous screen.  
switch or select the “Back” key  
The voice commands in the category are  
displayed.  
When this item is turned to ON, you can have the  
system learn the voice commands in succession,  
without selecting commands one by one.  
If the system has learned the command correctly,  
the voice command indicator on the screen turns  
on.  
6. Select a voice command to train.  
The Voice Recognition system starts.  
4-138 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE  
The system should respond correctly to all voice  
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-  
countered, follow the solutions given in this guide  
for the appropriate error.  
Where the solutions are listed by number, try  
each solution in turn, starting with number one,  
until the problem is resolved.  
Symptom/error message  
Solution  
Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOG-  
NIZED” or the system fails to interpret  
the command correctly.  
1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Standard Mode command list” or “Alternate Command Mode command list” in this  
section.  
2. Speak clearly using your normal speech pattern and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.  
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.  
NOTE:  
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.  
The system consistently selects the  
wrong voicetag in the phonebook.  
1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. See “Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation  
System” in this section.  
2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MEMO  
4-140 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Starting and driving  
Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20  
Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20  
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21  
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22  
Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23  
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24  
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24  
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24  
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25  
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26  
Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27  
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27  
Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27  
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27  
Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28  
Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28  
Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28  
Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28  
Engine block heater (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29  
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
Avoiding collision and rollover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
Rapid air pressure loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Push-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8  
NISSAN Intelligent key™ battery discharge . . . . . . . . 5-8  
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9  
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10  
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11  
Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17  
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19  
Cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING  
AND DRIVING  
● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are  
entering the vehicle, drive with all win-  
dows fully open, and have the vehicle  
inspected immediately.  
a. The vehicle is raised for service.  
WARNING  
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are  
● Do not leave children or adults who  
would normally require the assistance  
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets  
should also not be left alone. They  
could accidentally injure themselves or  
others through inadvertent operation of  
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,  
temperatures in a closed vehicle could  
quickly become high enough to cause  
severe or possibly fatal injuries to  
people or animals.  
entering  
into  
the  
passenger  
compartment.  
● Do not run the engine in closed spaces  
such as a garage.  
c. You notice a change in the sound of  
the exhaust system.  
● Do not park the vehicle with the engine  
running for any extended length of time.  
d. You have had an accident involving  
damage to the exhaust system, un-  
derbody, or rear of the vehicle.  
● Keep the trunk lid closed while driving,  
otherwise exhaust gases could be  
drawn into the passenger compart-  
ment. If you must drive with the trunk lid  
open, follow these precautions:  
THREE-WAY CATALYST  
The three-way catalyst is an emission control  
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust  
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at  
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.  
● Closely supervise children when they  
are around cars to prevent them from  
playing and becoming locked in the  
trunk where they could be seriously in-  
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear  
seatback and trunk lid securely latched  
when not in use, and prevent children’s  
access to car keys.  
1. Open all the windows.  
2. Set the  
air recirculation but-  
ton to off and the fan control dial to  
high to circulate the air.  
WARNING  
● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-  
tem are very hot. Keep people, animals  
or flammable materials away from the  
exhaust system components.  
● If electrical wiring or other cable con-  
nections must pass to a trailer through  
the seal on the trunk lid or the body,  
follow the manufacturer’s recommen-  
dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-  
try into the vehicle.  
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)  
WARNING  
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over  
flammable materials such as dry grass,  
waste paper or rags. They may ignite  
and cause a fire.  
● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they  
contain colorless and odorless carbon  
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-  
ous. It can cause unconsciousness or  
death.  
● The exhaust system and body should be  
inspected by  
whenever:  
a
qualified mechanic  
5-2 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to  
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure  
telltale.  
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING  
SYSTEM (TPMS)  
CAUTION  
● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits  
from leaded gasoline will seriously re-  
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to  
help reduce exhaust pollutants.  
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),  
should be checked monthly when cold and in-  
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by  
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard  
or tire inflation pressure label, located in the  
driver’s door opening.  
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a  
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the  
system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-  
function indicator is combined with the low tire  
pressure telltale. When the system detects a  
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-  
mately one minute and then remain continuously  
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon  
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-  
function exists. When the malfunction indicator is  
illuminated, the system may not be able to detect  
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS  
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,  
including the installation of replacement or alter-  
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent  
the TPMS from functioning properly. Always  
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-  
ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to  
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and  
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function  
properly.  
● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-  
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or  
electrical systems can cause overrich  
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,  
causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-  
ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-  
able loss of performance or other un-  
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the  
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla-  
tion pressure label, you should determine the  
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)  
usual  
operating  
conditions  
are  
detected. Have the vehicle inspected  
promptly by a NISSAN dealer.  
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been  
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system  
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale  
when one or more of your tires is significantly  
under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire  
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and  
check all 4 tires as soon as possible, and inflate  
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-  
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-  
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation  
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and  
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping  
ability.  
● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel  
level. Running out of fuel could cause  
the engine to misfire, damaging the  
three-way catalyst.  
● Do not race the engine while warming it  
up.  
● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start  
the engine.  
Additional information:  
●
The TPMS does not monitor the tire  
pressure of the spare tire.  
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for  
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s  
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,  
Starting and driving 5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle  
is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25  
km/h). Also, this system may not detect a  
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a  
flat tire while driving).  
For additional information, see “Low tire pressure  
warning light” in the “Instruments and controls”  
section and “Tire pressure monitoring system  
(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.  
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel  
is replaced, tire pressure will not be  
indicated, the TPMS will not function  
and the low tire pressure warning light  
will flash for approximately 1 minute.  
The light will remain on after 1 minute.  
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible for tire replacement and/or  
system resetting.  
WARNING  
The low tire pressure warning light does not  
automatically turn off when the tire pressure  
is adjusted. After all 4 tires are inflated to the  
recommended pressure, the vehicle must be  
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)  
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire  
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure  
gauge to check the tire pressure.  
● If the low tire pressure warning light  
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden  
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,  
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road  
to a safe location and stop the vehicle  
as soon as possible. Driving with under-  
inflated tires may permanently damage  
the tires and increase the likelihood of  
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage  
could occur and may lead to an acci-  
dent and could result in serious per-  
sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for  
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to  
the recommended COLD tire pressure  
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-  
tion label to turn the low tire pressure  
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,  
replace it with a spare tire as soon as  
possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case  
of emergency” section for changing a  
flat tire.)  
● Replacing tires with those not originally  
specified by NISSAN could affect the  
proper operation of the TPMS.  
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol  
tire sealant into the tires, as this may  
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure  
sensors.  
●
Tire pressure rises and falls depending on  
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation  
and the outside temperature. Low outside  
temperature can lower the temperature of  
the air inside the tire which can cause a  
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause  
the low tire pressure warning light to illumi-  
nate. If the warning light illuminates in low  
ambient temperature, check the tire pres-  
sure for all four tires.  
CAUTION  
Do not place metalized film or any metal  
parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This  
may cause poor reception of the signals  
from the tire pressure sensors, and the  
TPMS will not function properly.  
●
The Tire and Loading Information label (also  
referred to as the vehicle placard or tire  
inflation pressure label) is located in the  
driver’s door opening.  
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily  
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and  
cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-  
minate.  
5-4 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Some examples are:  
AVOIDING COLLISION AND  
ROLLOVER  
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY  
– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio  
frequencies are near the vehicle.  
While driving, the right side or left side wheels  
may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this  
occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-  
ing the procedure below. Please note that this  
procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle  
must be driven as appropriate based on the con-  
ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.  
WARNING  
– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is  
being used in or near the vehicle.  
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe  
and prudent manner may result in loss of  
control or an accident.  
– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a  
DC/AC converter is being used in or near the  
vehicle.  
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey  
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,  
high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-  
neuvers, because these driving practices could  
cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with  
any vehicle, loss of control could result in a  
collision with other vehicles or objects or  
cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if  
the loss of control causes the vehicle to  
slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and  
avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under  
the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-  
scription or over-the-counter drugs which may  
cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as  
outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and  
supplemental restraint system” section of this  
manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.  
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.  
2. Do not apply the brakes.  
FCC Notice:  
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-  
proved by the party responsible for compli-  
ance could void the user’s authority to op-  
erate the equipment.  
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel  
with both hands and try to hold a straight  
course.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry  
Canada.  
4. When appropriate , slowly release the accel-  
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.  
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-  
hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed  
is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-  
hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle  
speed is reduced.  
Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions: (1) This device may not cause  
harmful interference, and (2) this device  
must accept any interference received, in-  
cluding interference that may cause undes-  
ired operation of the device.  
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the  
steering wheel until both tires return to the  
road surface. When all tires are on the road  
surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-  
propriate driving lane.  
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions  
and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted  
or improperly belted person is significantly  
more likely to be injured or killed than a  
person properly wearing a seat belt.  
Starting and driving 5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
If you decide that it is not safe to return the  
vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,  
road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the  
vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.  
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND  
DRIVING  
WARNING  
The following actions can increase the  
chance of losing control of the vehicle if  
there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.  
Losing control of the vehicle may cause a  
collision and result in personal injury.  
WARNING  
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS  
Never drive under the influence of alcohol  
or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-  
duces coordination, delays reaction time  
and impairs judgement. Driving after  
drinking alcohol increases the likelihood  
of being involved in an accident injuring  
yourself and others. Additionally, if you  
are injured in an accident, alcohol can  
increase the severity of the injury.  
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur  
if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to  
hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss  
can also be caused by driving on under-inflated  
tires.  
● The vehicle generally moves or pulls in  
the direction of the flat tire.  
● Do not rapidly apply the brakes.  
● Do not rapidly release the accelerator  
pedal.  
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling  
and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway  
speeds.  
● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.  
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,  
you must choose not to drive under the influence  
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are  
injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-  
though the local laws vary on what is considered  
to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol  
affects all people differently and most people  
underestimate the effects of alcohol.  
1. Remain calm and do not over react.  
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-  
ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect  
the tires for wear and damage. See “Wheels and  
tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”  
section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air  
pressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintain  
control of the vehicle by following the procedure  
below. Please note that this procedure is only a  
general guide. The vehicle must be driven as  
appropriate based on the conditions of the ve-  
hicle, road and traffic.  
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel  
with both hands and try to hold a straight  
course.  
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-  
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.  
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location  
off the road and away from traffic if possible.  
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And  
that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-  
scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your  
ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-  
hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.  
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually  
stop the vehicle.  
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and  
either contact a roadside emergency service  
to change the tire or see “Changing a flat  
tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of  
this manual.  
5-6 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH  
WARNING  
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition  
switch position cannot be switched to OFF until  
the shift selector is moved to the P (Park) position  
(CVT) or N (Neutral) position (MT).  
Do not operate the push-button ignition  
switch while driving the vehicle except in  
an emergency. (The engine will stop when  
the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecu-  
tive times in quick succession or the igni-  
tion switch is pushed and held for more  
than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while  
the vehicle is being driven, this could lead  
to a crash and serious injury.  
When the ignition switch cannot be pushed to-  
ward the OFF position, proceed as follows:  
1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park)  
position (CVT) or N (Neutral) position (MT).  
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch  
position will change to the ON position.  
3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFF  
position.  
LSD0237  
The shift selector can be moved from the P  
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in  
the ON position and the brake pedal is  
depressed.  
When the ignition switch is pushed without de-  
pressing the brake pedal (CVT) or the clutch  
pedal (MT), the ignition switch position will illu-  
minate as follows:  
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,  
the push-button ignition switch cannot be  
moved from the LOCK position.  
Push center  
●
●
●
once to change to ACC.  
two times to change to ON.  
three times to return to OFF.  
Some indicators and warnings for operation are  
displayed on the vehicle information display. See  
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments  
and controls” section.  
The ignition switch will automatically return to the  
LOCK position when any door is either opened or  
closed with the switch in the OFF position.  
Starting and driving 5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any  
of the following occur:  
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH  
POSITIONS  
●
●
●
any door is opened.  
LOCK (Normal parking position):  
shift selector is moved out of the P (Park).  
ignition switch changes position.  
The ignition switch can only be locked in this  
position.  
ON (Normal operating position):  
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is  
pushed to the ACC position while carrying the  
Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key inserted  
in the port.  
This position turns on the ignition system and  
electrical accessories.  
CAUTION  
The ignition switch will lock when any door is  
opened or closed with the ignition switched off.  
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition  
switch in ACC or ON positions when the  
engine is not running for an extended pe-  
riod. This can discharge the battery.  
WSD0232  
OFF:  
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™  
BATTERY DISCHARGE  
The ignition switch is in the OFF position when  
the engine is turned off using the ignition switch.  
No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.  
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is almost dis-  
A
charged, the guide light  
of the Intelligent Key  
᭺
ACC (Accessories):  
port blinks and the indicator appears on the ve-  
hicle information display. See “Vehicle informa-  
tion display” in the “Instruments and controls”  
section.  
This position activates electrical accessories,  
such as the radio, when the engine is not running.  
ACC has a battery saver feature that will turn the  
ignition switch to the OFF position after 1 hour  
under the following conditions:  
In this case, inserting the Intelligent Key into the  
B
port  
allows you to start the engine. Make sure  
᭺
the Intelligent Key is placed in the correct direc-  
tion: The front side faces upward and the key ring  
side faces downward as illustrated.  
●
●
all doors are closed.  
shift selector is in P (Park).  
5-8 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE  
NOTE:  
●
●
Make sure the area around the vehicle is  
clear.  
The Intelligent Key port does not charge  
the Intelligent Key battery. If you see the  
low battery indicator, replace the battery as  
soon as possible. See “Battery replace-  
ment” in the “Maintenance and do-it-  
yourself” section.  
Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-  
ant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluid  
as frequently as possible, or at least when-  
ever you refuel.  
●
●
Check that all windows and lights are clean.  
Visually inspect tires for their appearance  
and condition. Also check tires for proper  
inflation.  
CAUTION  
● Never place anything except the Intelli-  
gent Key in the Intelligent Key port. Do-  
ing so may cause damage to the  
equipment.  
●
●
●
●
Lock all doors.  
Position seat and adjust head restraints.  
Adjust inside and outside mirrors.  
WSD0233  
● Make sure the Intelligent Key is in the  
correct direction when inserting it to  
the Intelligent Key port. The engine may  
not start if it is in the wrong direction.  
To remove the Intelligent Key from the port, push  
the ignition switch to the LOCK position and pull  
Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to  
do likewise.  
C
the Intelligent Key out of the port  
.
᭺
● Remove the Intelligent Key from the  
Intelligent Key port after the ignition  
switch is pushed to the LOCK position.  
●
Check the operation of warning lights when  
the ignition switch is pushed to the ON  
position. See “Warning/indicator lights and  
audible reminders” in the “Instruments and  
controls” section of this manual.  
Starting and driving 5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING THE ENGINE  
1. Apply the parking brake.  
● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-  
tremely cold weather or when restarting,  
depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-  
proximately 1/3 to the floor) and while  
holding, crank the engine. Release the  
accelerator pedal when the engine starts.  
4. Warm-up  
2. Continuously Variable Transmission  
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-  
onds after starting. Do not race the engine  
while warming it up. Drive at moderate  
speed for a short distance first, especially in  
cold weather. In cold weather, keep the en-  
gine running for a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes  
before shutting it off. Starting and stopping  
the engine over a short period of time may  
make the vehicle more difficult to start.  
(CVT) model:  
Move the shift selector to P (Park) or N  
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.  
● If the engine is very hard to start because  
it is flooded, depress the accelerator  
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.  
Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-  
tion to start cranking the engine. After 5 or  
6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the  
ignition switch to LOCK. After cranking  
the engine, release the accelerator pedal.  
Crank the engine with your foot off the  
accelerator pedal by depressing the  
brake pedal and pushing the push-button  
ignition switch to start the engine. If the  
engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the  
above procedure.  
The starter is designed not to operate if  
the shift selector is in any of the driving  
positions.  
Manual transmission (M/T):  
5. To stop the engine, shift the selector to the P  
(Park) position (CVT) or to N (Neutral) and  
apply the parking brake (M/T) and push the  
ignition switch to the OFF position.  
Move the shift selector to N (Neutral). De-  
press the clutch pedal to the floor.  
The starter is designed not to operate  
unless the clutch pedal is fully de-  
pressed.  
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.  
Depress the brake pedal and the clutch  
pedal (if so equipped) and push the ignition  
switch to start the engine.  
CAUTION  
To start the engine immediately, push and  
release the ignition switch while depressing  
the brake pedal with the ignition switch in  
any position.  
Do not operate the starter for more than  
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does  
not start, push the ignition switch to the  
OFF position and wait 10 seconds before  
cranking again, otherwise the starter  
could be damaged.  
5-10 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DRIVING THE VEHICLE  
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE  
TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so  
equipped)  
WARNING  
● Do not depress the accelerator pedal  
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-  
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), Ds (Drive  
Sport) or (M) Manual shift mode. Al-  
ways depress the brake pedal until  
shifting is completed. Failure to do so  
could cause you to lose control and  
have an accident.  
● Cold engine idle speed is high, so use  
caution when shifting into a forward or  
reverse gear before the engine has  
warmed up.  
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery  
roads. This may cause a loss of control.  
● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)  
while the vehicle is moving. This could  
cause an accident.  
CAUTION  
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill  
grade, do not hold the vehicle by depress-  
ing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake  
should be used for this purpose.  
WSD0247  
The CVT in your vehicle is electronically con-  
trolled to produce maximum power and smooth  
operation.  
Starting and driving 5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The CVT can operate in two different automatic  
drive modes:  
The CVT can operate in a manual drive mode:  
The CVT is designed so the foot brake  
pedal MUST be depressed before shifting  
from P (Park) to any drive position while  
the ignition switch is in the ON position.  
●
M (Manual) mode - With the shift selector in  
the manual shift gate Ds (Drive Sport) mode,  
M (Manual) mode can be selected by mov-  
ing the shift selector up (+) or down (–). In M  
mode, the transmission will produce notice-  
able upshifts and downshifts. The position  
indicator in the meter shows a “M”.  
●
D (Drive) mode - Move the shift selector to D  
(Drive), the transmission is in the normal  
forward automatic driving mode. The posi-  
tion indicator in the meter shows a “D”. The  
D (Drive) mode does not produce a gear  
change sensation like a traditional automatic  
transmission.  
The shift selector cannot be moved out of P  
(Park) and into any of the other gear posi-  
tions if the ignition switch is pushed to the  
LOCK or ACC position.  
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle  
performance and driving enjoyment.  
●
Ds (Drive Sport) mode - Move the shift se-  
lector over from D (Drive) to the left into the  
manual shift gate. The position indicator in  
the meter shows a “Ds”. In Ds (Drive Sport)  
mode, transmission operation changes to  
ЉSporty” driving shift operation, creating a  
more aggressive acceleration feeling than  
the D (Drive) mode and a gear change sen-  
sation when the driver accelerates quickly.  
When the driver selects M (Manual) mode  
ratio with shift selector during Ds (Drive  
Sport) mode operation, the driver must move  
the shift selector from Ds mode to D mode  
and back again to re-select Ds (Drive Sport)  
mode.  
NOTE:  
Engine power may be automatically re-  
duced to protect the CVT if the engine  
speed increases quickly when driving on  
slippery roads or while being tested on  
some dynamometers.  
Starting the vehicle  
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the  
foot brake pedal before moving the shift  
selector out of the P (Park) position.  
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and  
move the shift selector into a driving gear.  
●
To cancel the Ds mode, return the shift se-  
lector to the D (Drive) position. The trans-  
mission returns to the automatic drive mode.  
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start  
the vehicle in motion.  
4. Stop the vehicle completely before shifting  
the shift selector to the P (Park) position.  
5-12 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R (Reverse):  
WARNING  
Apply the parking brake if the shift selec-  
tor is in any position while the engine is  
not running. Failure to do so could cause  
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll  
away and result in serious personal injury  
or property damage.  
CAUTION  
To prevent transmission damage, use the  
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when  
the vehicle is completely stopped.  
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make  
sure the vehicle is completely stopped before  
selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake  
pedal must be depressed to move the shift  
selector from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any  
drive position to R (Reverse).  
P (Park):  
CAUTION  
To prevent transmission damage, use the  
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when  
the vehicle is completely stopped.  
N (Neutral):  
WSD0248  
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The  
engine can be started in this position. You may  
shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine  
while the vehicle is moving.  
To move the shift selector:  
Use the P (Park) shift selector position when the  
vehicle is parked or when starting the engine.  
Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.  
The brake pedal should be depressed to  
move the shift selector from N (Neutral) or  
any drive position to P (Park). Apply the  
parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the  
parking brake first, then move the shift selector  
into the P (Park) position.  
Push the button while depressing the brake  
pedal  
D (Drive):  
Push the button to shift  
Use this position for all normal forward driving.  
Shift without pushing button  
Shifting  
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake  
pedal and move the shift selector from P (Park) to  
any of the desired shift positions.  
Starting and driving 5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ds (Drive sport):  
in the meter. When shifting the shift selector to  
the manual shift gate, the position indicator dis-  
plays 1 (first) up to 6 (sixth) depending on vehicle  
speed.  
When the shift selector is shifted from the D  
(Drive) position to the manual shift gate, the  
transmission enters the Ds (Drive Sport) mode.  
Moving the shift selector to the Ds (Drive Sport)  
position allows smooth acceleration or decelera-  
tion on a hilly road by moving into a lower gear  
automatically. When canceling the Ds mode, re-  
turn the shift selector to the D (Drive) position.  
The transmission returns to the normal driving  
mode.  
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:  
1⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5 ⇔ 6  
M6 (6th):  
Use this position for all normal forward driving at  
highway speeds.  
M5 (5th):  
Use this position when driving up long slopes, or  
for engine braking when driving down long  
slopes.  
WSD0249  
Manual shift mode  
M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd):  
When the shift selector is in the Ds (Drive Sport)  
position, the transmission is ready for the manual  
shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manu-  
ally by moving the shift selector up (+) or down  
(–). To cancel the Ds mode, return shift selector  
to the D (Drive) position. The transmission returns  
to automatic driving mode.  
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill  
grades.  
M1 (1st):  
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly  
or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or  
mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep  
downhill grades.  
When the shift selector is shifted from D (Drive)  
A
to the manual shift gate  
with the vehicle  
᭺
●
Remember not to drive at high speeds for  
extended periods of time in lower than 6  
range. This reduces fuel economy.  
stopped or while driving, the transmission enters  
the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be se-  
lected manually. In the manual shift mode, the  
shift range is displayed on the position indicator  
5-14 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When shifting up:  
●
In the manual shift mode, the transmis-  
sion may shift up automatically to a  
higher range than selected if the en-  
gine speed is too high. When the ve-  
hicle speed decreases, the transmis-  
sion automatically shifts down and  
shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle  
comes to a stop.  
Move the shift selector to the + (up) side. (Shifts  
to higher range.)  
When shifting down:  
Move the shift selector to the Ϫ (down) side.  
(Shifts to lower range.)  
●
The transmission will automatically down-  
shift the gears. (For example, if you select the  
3rd range, the transmission will shift down  
between the 3rd and 1st gears.)  
●
●
CVT operation is limited to automatic drive  
mode when CVT fluid temperature is ex-  
tremely low even if manual shift mode is  
selected. This is not a malfunction. When  
CVT fluid warms up, manual mode can be  
selected.  
●
Moving the shift selector rapidly to the same  
side twice will shift the ranges in succession.  
WSD0250  
When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the  
shift range may upshift in lower rpm than  
usual. This is not a malfunction.  
Shift lock release  
When canceling the manual shift mode:  
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the  
shift selector may not be moved from the P (Park)  
position even with the brake pedal depressed  
and the shift selector button pushed.  
Return the shift selector to the D (Drive) position  
to return the transmission to the normal driving  
mode.  
●
In the manual shift mode, the transmis-  
sion may not shift to the selected gear.  
This helps maintain driving perfor-  
mance and reduces the chance of ve-  
hicle damage or loss of control.  
It will be necessary to jump start or have your  
battery charged, see “Jump starting” in the “In  
case of emergency” section. Contact your  
NISSAN dealer or a professional towing service.  
To move the shift selector, complete the following  
procedure:  
1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-  
tion.  
Starting and driving 5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Apply the parking brake.  
Fail-safe  
WARNING  
3. For cap removal it must be used or if it is  
available a plastic trim tool can be used  
If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-  
ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning  
and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe  
system may be activated. The MIL may  
come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is  
activated, see “Malfunction indicator light  
(MIL)”in the “Instrument and controls”sec-  
tion. This will occur even if all electrical  
circuits are functioning properly. In this  
case, place the ignition switch in the OFF  
position and wait for 10 seconds. Then  
push the switch back to the ON position.  
The vehicle should return to its normal op-  
erating condition. If it does not return to its  
If the shift selector cannot be moved from  
the P (Park) position while the engine is  
running and the brake pedal is depressed,  
the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-  
ing stop lights could cause an accident  
injuring yourself and others.  
4. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a 3 mm  
screwdriver, remove the shift lock release  
cover.  
● If available, a plastic trim tool can also be  
used.  
Accelerator downshift  
— in D position —  
5. Insert the small screwdriver in the shift lock  
release slot and push down.  
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-  
erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-  
sion down into a lower gear, depending on the  
vehicle speed.  
6. Move the shift selector to the N (Neutral)  
position while holding down the shift lock  
release.  
normal operating condition, have  
NISSAN dealer check the transmission and  
repair if necessary.  
a
High fluid temperature protection  
mode  
7. Push the ignition switch to the ON position  
to unlock the steering wheel. Now the ve-  
hicle may be moved to the desired location.  
This transmission has a high fluid temperature  
protection mode. If the fluid temperature be-  
comes too high (for example, when climbing  
steep grades in high temperature with heavy  
loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine  
power and, under some conditions, vehicle  
speed will be decreased automatically to reduce  
the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle  
speed can be controlled with the accelerator  
pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be  
limited.  
If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P  
(Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the trans-  
mission as soon as possible.  
5-16 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
When the high fluid temperature protec-  
tion mode or fail-safe operation occurs,  
vehicle speed may be gradually reduced.  
The reduced speed may be lower than  
other traffic, which could increase the  
chance of a collision. Be especially care-  
ful when driving. If necessary, pull to the  
side of the road at a safe place and allow  
the transmission to return to normal op-  
eration, or have it repaired if necessary.  
● Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal  
while driving. This may cause clutch  
damage.  
● Fully depress the clutch pedal before  
shifting to help prevent transmission  
damage.  
● Stop your vehicle completely before  
shifting into R (Reverse).  
● When the vehicle is stopped with the  
engine running (for example, at a stop  
light), shift to N (Neutral) and release  
the clutch pedal with the foot brake  
applied.  
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so  
equipped)  
LSD0180  
Shifting  
WARNING  
To change gears or when upshifting or down-  
shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into  
the appropriate gear, then release the clutch  
slowly and smoothly.  
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery  
roads. This may cause a loss of control.  
● Do not over-rev the engine when shift-  
ing to a lower gear. This may cause a  
loss of control or engine damage.  
To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress  
the clutch pedal before operating the shift selec-  
tor. If the clutch pedal is not fully depressed  
before the transmission is shifted, a gear noise  
may be heard. Transmission damage may occur.  
Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd,  
4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence according  
to vehicle speed.  
Starting and driving 5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
To back up, lift up on the shift selector ring  
and  
For VQ35DE:  
᭺
Suggested maximum speed in each  
gear  
then move it to the R (Reverse) position after  
stopping the vehicle completely.  
GEAR CHANGE  
MPH (km/h)  
9 (14)  
1st to 2nd  
2nd to 3rd  
3rd to 4th  
4th to 5th  
5th to 6th  
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not  
running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.  
1
The shift selector ring  
returns to its original  
position when the shift selector is moved to the N  
(Neutral) position.  
19 (30)  
26 (42)  
31 (50)  
37 (59)  
᭺
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed  
(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,  
use the highest gear suggested for that speed.  
Always observe posted speed limits, and drive  
according to the road conditions, which will en-  
sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine  
when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause  
engine damage or loss of vehicle control.  
If it is difficult to move the shift selector into R  
(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then  
release the clutch pedal. Depress the clutch  
pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st).  
For acceleration in high altitude areas (over  
4,000 ft [1219 m]):  
For QR25DE:  
Suggested upshift speeds  
Gear change  
1st to 2nd  
2nd to 3rd  
3rd to 4th  
4th to 5th  
5th to 6th  
MPH (km/h)  
8 (13)  
The following are suggested vehicle speeds for  
shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions  
relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.  
Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road  
conditions, the weather and individual driving  
habits.  
GEAR  
QR25DE  
VQ35DE  
17 (27)  
25 (40)  
36 (58)  
51 (82)  
MPH (km/h)  
MPH (km/h)  
1st  
2nd  
3rd  
4th  
5th  
6th  
32 (53)  
59 (95)  
82 (133)  
—
36 (58)  
58 (93)  
81 (131)  
—
For VQ35DE:  
—
—
For normal acceleration in low altitude areas (less  
than 4,000 ft [1219 m]):  
Gear change  
1st to 2nd  
2nd to 3rd  
3rd to 4th  
4th to 5th  
5th to 6th  
MPH (km/h)  
15 (24)  
25 (40)  
40 (64)  
45 (72)  
50 (80)  
—
—
For QR25DE:  
GEAR CHANGE  
1st to 2nd  
2nd to 3rd  
3rd to 4th  
MPH (km/h)  
8 (24)  
17 (27)  
25 (40)  
36 (58)  
51 (82)  
4th to 5th  
5th to 6th  
5-18 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PARKING BRAKE  
WARNING  
● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-  
leased before driving. Failure to do so  
can cause brake failure and lead to an  
accident.  
● Do not release the parking brake from  
outside the vehicle.  
● Do not use the shift selector in place of  
the parking brake. When parking, be  
sure the parking brake is fully engaged.  
● Do not leave children unattended in a  
vehicle. They could release the parking  
brake and cause an accident.  
LSD0158  
WSD0169  
Type A  
To engage: Type A, firmly depress the parking  
Type B  
3. Type A, firmly depress the parking brake  
pedal and it will release. Type B, while pulling  
up on the parking brake lever slightly, push  
B
A
brake. Type B, pull the lever up  
.
᭺
To release:  
the button and lower completely  
.
᭺
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.  
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning  
light goes out.  
2. Manual transmission models:  
Place the shift selector in the N (Neutral)  
position.  
CVT models:  
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-  
tion.  
Starting and driving 5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CRUISE CONTROL  
●
The SET indicator light may blink when the  
cruise control switch is turned ON while  
pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or  
CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise  
control system, use the following proce-  
dures.  
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to  
the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch  
and release it. The SET indicator light in the  
instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the  
accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set  
speed.  
●
To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-  
celerator pedal. When you release the  
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously  
set speed.  
WARNING  
Do not use the cruise control when driving  
under the following conditions:  
●
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed  
when going up or down steep hills. If this  
happens, drive without the cruise control.  
● When it is not possible to keep the  
vehicle at a set speed.  
● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in  
speed.  
LSD0184  
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the  
following three methods.  
1. CANCEL switch  
2. ACCEL/RES switch  
3. COAST/SET switch  
4. ON/OFF switch  
● On winding or hilly roads.  
● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).  
● In very windy areas.  
●
●
●
Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator  
light in the instrument panel goes out.  
Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light  
goes out.  
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE  
CONTROL  
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle  
control and result in an accident.  
Push the ON·OFF switch off. Both the  
CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator  
light in the instrument panel go out.  
●
If the cruise control system malfunctions, it  
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS  
cancels automatically. The SET indicator  
light in the instrument panel then blinks to  
warn the driver.  
The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-  
tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without  
keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.  
●
If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the  
cruise control switch off and have the sys-  
tem checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
To turn on the cruise control, push the  
ON·OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light in  
the instrument panel comes on.  
5-20 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE  
The cruise control is automatically canceled and  
the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:  
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one  
of the following three methods.  
CAUTION  
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),  
follow these recommendations to obtain  
maximum engine performance and en-  
sure the future reliability and economy of  
your new vehicle. Failure to follow these  
recommendations may result in short-  
ened engine life and reduced engine  
performance.  
●
you depress the brake or clutch pedal while  
pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST  
switch. The preset speed is deleted from  
memory.  
●
●
●
Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-  
hicle attains the desired speed, push the  
COAST/SET switch and release it.  
Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-  
lease the switch when the vehicle slows to  
the desired speed.  
●
●
the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH  
(13 km/h) below the set speed.  
you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-  
mission), or move the shift selector to N  
(Neutral) (CVT).  
Push and release the COAST/SET switch.  
Each time you do this, the set speed de-  
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).  
●
Avoid driving for long periods at constant  
speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the  
engine over 4,000 rpm.  
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one  
of the following three methods.  
To resume the preset speed, push and re-  
lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-  
turns to the last set cruising speed when the  
vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).  
●
●
●
●
Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.  
Avoid quick starts.  
●
●
●
Depress the accelerator pedal. When the  
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and  
release the COAST/SET switch.  
Avoid hard braking as much as possible.  
Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles  
(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts  
could be damaged.  
Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.  
When the vehicle attains the speed you de-  
sire, release the switch.  
Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.  
Each time you do this, the set speed in-  
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).  
Starting and driving 5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY  
●
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain  
cruising speeds with a constant accelerator  
position.  
●
●
When cruising at highway speeds, it is more  
economical to use the air conditioner and  
leave the windows closed to reduce drag.  
Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.  
See “Capacities and recommended  
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-  
sumer information” section of this manual.  
●
●
Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.  
Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.  
Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.  
Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-  
hicles.  
●
Use a proper gear range which suits road  
conditions. On level roads, shift into high  
gear as soon as possible.  
●
●
●
Avoid unnecessary engine idling.  
Keep your engine tuned up.  
Follow the recommended periodic mainte-  
nance schedule.  
●
●
●
Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-  
sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear  
and lowers fuel economy.  
Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-  
proper alignment increases tire wear and  
lowers fuel economy.  
Air conditioner operation lowers fuel  
economy. Use the air conditioner only when  
necessary.  
5-22 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS  
2. Manual transmission models:  
Place the shift selector in the R (Reverse)  
position. When parking on an uphill grade,  
place the shift selector in 1st gear.  
Continuously Variable Transmission  
(CVT) models:  
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position.  
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into  
traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good  
practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.  
1
●
●
●
HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:  
᭺
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the  
vehicle forward until the curb side wheel  
gently touches the curb.  
SSD0488  
selector has been pushed as far for-  
ward as it can go and cannot be moved  
without depressing the foot brake  
pedal.  
WARNING  
2
HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:  
᭺
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over  
flammable materials such as dry grass,  
waste paper or rags. They may ignite  
and cause a fire.  
Turn the wheels away from the curb and  
move the vehicle back until the curb side  
wheel gently touches the curb.  
● Never leave the engine running while  
the vehicle is unattended.  
● Safe parking procedures require that  
both the parking brake be set and the  
transmission placed into P (Park) for  
CVT models or in an appropriate gear  
for manual transmission models. Fail-  
ure to do so could cause the vehicle to  
move unexpectedly or roll away and re-  
sult in an accident. Make sure the shift  
HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO  
● Do not leave children unattended inside  
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-  
tivate switches or controls. Unattended  
children could become involved in seri-  
ous accidents.  
3
CURB:  
᭺
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road  
so the vehicle will move away from the cen-  
ter of the road if it moves.  
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-  
tion and remove the key.  
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.  
Starting and driving 5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
POWER STEERING  
BRAKE SYSTEM  
The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic  
pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.  
The brake system has two separate hydraulic  
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still  
have braking at 2 wheels.  
WARNING  
● While driving on a slippery surface, be  
careful when braking, accelerating or  
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-  
erating could cause the wheels to skid  
and result in an accident.  
If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you  
will still have control of the vehicle. However,  
much greater steering effort is needed, especially  
in sharp turns and at low speeds.  
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS  
Vacuum assisted brakes  
The brake booster aids braking by using engine  
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the  
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,  
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be  
required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-  
tance will be longer.  
● If the engine is not running or is turned  
off while driving, the power assist for  
the brakes will not work. Braking will be  
harder.  
WARNING  
If the engine is not running or is turned off  
while driving, the power assist for the  
steering will not work. Steering will be  
harder to operate.  
Parking brake break-in  
Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the  
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened  
or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or  
drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the  
best brake performance.  
Using the brakes  
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while  
driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the  
brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.  
This procedure is described in the vehicle service  
manual and can be performed by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the  
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and  
downshift to a lower gear before going down a  
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may  
reduce braking performance and could result in  
loss of vehicle control.  
Wet brakes  
When the vehicle is washed or driven through  
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your  
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle  
may pull to one side during braking.  
5-24 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe  
speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to  
heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return  
to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high  
speeds until the brakes function correctly.  
ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer  
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.  
– When replacing tires, install the  
specified size of tires on all four  
wheels.  
WARNING  
– When installing a spare tire, make  
sure that it is the proper size and type  
as specified on the Tire and Loading  
Information label. See “Tire and  
Loading Information label” in the  
“Technical and consumer informa-  
tion” section of this manual.  
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so  
may result in increased stopping  
distances.  
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM  
(ABS)  
Self-test feature  
WARNING  
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric  
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The  
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that  
tests the system each time you start the engine  
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or  
reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear  
a “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake  
pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a  
malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-  
tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the  
ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The  
brake system then operates normally, but without  
anti-lock assistance.  
● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a  
sophisticated device, but it cannot pre-  
vent accidents resulting from careless  
or dangerous driving techniques. It can  
help maintain vehicle control during  
braking on slippery surfaces. Remem-  
ber that stopping distances on slippery  
surfaces will be longer than on normal  
surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-  
tances may also be longer on rough,  
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you  
are using tire chains. Always maintain a  
safe distance from the vehicle in front  
of you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-  
sible for safety.  
– For detailed information, see  
“Wheels and tires” in the Mainte-  
nance and do-it-yourself” section of  
this manual.  
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the  
brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard  
braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.  
The system detects the rotation speed at each  
wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-  
vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By  
preventing each wheel from locking, the system  
helps the driver maintain steering control and  
helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-  
pery surfaces.  
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the  
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle  
checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
● Tire type and condition may also affect  
braking effectiveness.  
Using the system  
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-  
press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,  
but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-  
Starting and driving 5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)  
SYSTEM  
The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses  
various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve-  
hicle motion. Under certain driving situations, the  
system will control braking and engine output to  
help keep the vehicle on its steered path.  
When the VDC system is operating, you may feel  
a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or  
vibration from under the hood. This is normal and  
indicates that the VDC system is working prop-  
erly.  
Normal operation  
The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5  
- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road  
conditions.  
When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are  
close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies  
and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is  
similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You  
may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a  
noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from  
the actuator when it is operating. This is normal  
and indicates that the ABS is operating properly.  
However, the pulsation may indicate that road  
conditions are hazardous and extra care is re-  
quired while driving.  
●
When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)  
system is operating, the SLIP indicator in  
the instrument panel blinks.  
The computer has a built in diagnostic feature  
that tests the system each time you start the  
engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse  
at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you  
may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in  
the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an  
indication of a malfunction.  
●
If the SLIP indicator blinks, the road condi-  
tions may be slippery. Be sure to adjust your  
speed and driving to these conditions. See  
“Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle Dynamic  
Control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “In-  
struments and controls” section.  
WARNING  
●
Indicator light  
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the  
● The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is  
designed to help improve driving stabil-  
ity but does not prevent accidents due  
to abrupt steering operation at high  
speeds or by careless or dangerous  
driving techniques. Reduce vehicle  
speed and be especially careful when  
driving and cornering on slippery sur-  
faces and always drive carefully.  
SLIP and  
indicator lights come on in  
the instrument panel.  
As long as these indicator lights are on, the  
traction control function is canceled.  
If the vehicle is operated with the Vehicle Dy-  
namic Control system off using the VDC OFF  
switch, VDC and the Traction Control System  
(TCS) functions will be turned off. The SLIP  
indicator will flash if wheel spin is detected. The  
ABS will still operate with the VDC system off.  
5-26 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COLD WEATHER DRIVING  
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK  
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.  
If suspension parts such as shock ab-  
sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,  
bushings and wheels are not NISSAN  
approved for your vehicle or are ex-  
tremely deteriorated the Vehicle Dy-  
namic Control system may not operate  
properly. This could adversely affect ve-  
hicle handling performance, and the  
VDC OFF indicator light may come on.  
● If wheels or tires other than the recom-  
mended ones are used, the Vehicle Dy-  
namic Control system may not operate  
properly and the Vehicle Dynamic Con-  
trol off indicator light may come on.  
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-  
icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes  
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key  
hole or use the remote keyless entry function on  
the intelligent key.  
● The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is  
not a substitute for winter tires or tire  
chains on a snow covered road.  
ANTI-FREEZE  
In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-  
perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the  
anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.  
For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the  
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this  
manual.  
● If brake related parts such as brake  
pads, rotors and calipers are not stan-  
dard equipment or are extremely dete-  
riorated, the Vehicle Dynamic Control  
system may not operate properly and  
the Vehicle Dynamic Control off indica-  
tor light may come on.  
BATTERY  
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely  
cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may  
freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-  
mum efficiency, the battery should be checked  
regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-  
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this  
manual.  
● When driving on extremely inclined sur-  
faces such as higher banked corners,  
the Vehicle Dynamic Control system  
may not operate properly and the VDC  
OFF indicator light may come on. Do  
not drive on these types of roads.  
● When driving on an unstable surface  
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or  
ramp, the Vehicle Dynamic Control off  
indicator light may illuminate. This is  
not a malfunction. Restart the engine  
after driving onto a stable surface.  
Starting and driving 5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Tire chains may be used. For details see  
“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-  
yourself” section of this manual.  
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER  
● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-  
tion. Accelerate and slow down with  
care. If accelerating or downshifting too  
fast, the drive wheels will lose even  
more traction.  
If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-  
freeze, drain the cooling system, including the  
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.  
For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the  
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this  
manual.  
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT  
It is recommended that the following items be  
carried in the vehicle during winter:  
● Allow more stopping distance under  
these conditions. Braking should be  
started sooner than on dry pavement.  
●
●
A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove  
ice and snow from the windows and wiper  
blades.  
TIRE EQUIPMENT  
● Allow greater following distances on  
slippery roads.  
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to  
provide superior performance on dry pave-  
ment. However, the performance of these  
tires will be substantially reduced in snowy  
and icy conditions. If you operate your ve-  
hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-  
mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL  
SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please  
consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,  
size, speed rating and availability informa-  
tion.  
A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the  
jack to give it firm support.  
● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).  
These may appear on an otherwise  
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of  
ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-  
ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,  
and avoid any sudden steering  
maneuvers.  
●
●
A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.  
Extra windshield-washer fluid to refill the  
reservoir tank.  
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE  
● Do not use the cruise control on slip-  
pery roads.  
WARNING  
● Snow can trap dangerous exhaust  
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow  
clear of the exhaust pipe and from  
around your vehicle.  
● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),  
very cold snow or ice can be slick and  
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will  
have much less traction or “grip” under  
these conditions. Try to avoid driving on  
wet ice until the road is salted or  
sanded.  
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded  
tires may be used. However, some U.S.  
states and Canadian provinces prohibit their  
use. Check local, state and provincial laws  
before installing studded tires.  
Skid and traction capabilities of studded  
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be  
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.  
5-28 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To use the engine block heater:  
1. Turn the engine off.  
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so  
equipped)  
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block  
heater cord.  
WARNING  
● Do not use your engine block heater  
with an ungrounded electrical system  
or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-  
riously injured by an electrical shock if  
you use an ungrounded connection.  
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a  
grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension  
cord.  
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault  
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-  
volt AC (VAC) outlet.  
● Disconnect and properly store the en-  
gine block heater cord before starting  
the engine. Damage to the cord could  
result in an electrical shock and can  
cause serious injury.  
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in  
for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside  
temperatures, to properly warm the engine  
coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the  
engine block heater on.  
● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-  
tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug  
the extension cord into a Ground Fault  
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded  
110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the  
proper extension cord or a grounded  
outlet can result in a fire or electrical  
shock and cause serious personal  
injury.  
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-  
erly store the cord to keep it away from  
moving parts.  
Engine block heaters are available through  
NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature  
starting. The engine block heater should be used  
when the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) or  
lower.  
Starting and driving 5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MEMO  
5-30 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 In case of emergency  
Flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8  
Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10  
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10  
Towing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11  
Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12  
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle). . . . . . . . .6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FLAT TIRE  
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING  
SYSTEM (TPMS)  
● Replacing tires with those not originally  
specified by NISSAN could affect the  
proper operation of the TPMS.  
WARNING  
● If the low tire pressure warning light  
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden  
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,  
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road  
to a safe location and stop the vehicle  
as soon as possible. Driving with under-  
inflated tires may permanently damage  
the tires and increase the likelihood of  
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage  
could occur and may lead to an acci-  
dent and could result in serious per-  
sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for  
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to  
the recommended COLD tire pressure  
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-  
tion label to turn the low tire pressure  
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,  
replace it with a spare tire as soon as  
possible.  
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure  
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-  
sure of all tires except the spare. When the low  
tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of  
your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the  
vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the  
TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low  
tire pressure warning light. This system will acti-  
vate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds  
above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more details, refer  
to “Warning/indicator lights and audible remind-  
ers” in the “Instruments and controls” section,  
and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”  
in the “Starting and driving” section.  
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol  
tire sealant into the tires, as this may  
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure  
sensors.  
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE  
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-  
low:  
Stopping the vehicle  
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and  
away from traffic.  
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.  
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking  
brake. Shift the manual transmission into R  
(Reverse), or the CVT into P (Park).  
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel  
is replaced, the TPMS will not function  
and the low tire pressure warning light  
will flash for approximately 1 minute.  
The light will remain on after 1 minute.  
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible for tire replacement and/or  
system resetting.  
4. Turn off the engine.  
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to  
signal professional road assistance person-  
nel that you need assistance.  
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle  
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic  
and clear of the vehicle.  
6-2 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WARNING  
● Make sure the parking brake is securely  
applied and the manual transmission is  
shifted into R (Reverse), or the CVT is  
shifted into P (Park).  
● Never change tires when the vehicle is  
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is  
hazardous.  
● Never change tires if oncoming traffic is  
close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-  
sional road assistance.  
LCE0137  
WCE0044  
Sedan  
Blocking wheels  
Getting the spare tire and tools  
1
Place suitable blocks  
at both the front and  
᭺
Open the trunk. Lift the trunk floor carpeting and  
spare tire cover. Remove the jack  
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire  
1
2
and wheel  
to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is  
᭺
᭺
2
nut wrench  
from the tool box.  
jacked up.  
᭺
WARNING  
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle  
may move and result in personal injury.  
In case of emergency 6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WCE0200  
WCE0193  
WCE0201  
Coupe  
Sedan  
Coupe  
Turn the clamp to remove the spare tire. Remove  
the spare tire.  
6-4 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WCE0147  
LCE0183  
Jack-up point coupe  
A
Apply cloth  
between the wheel and jack rod to  
᭺
Removing the bolt-on wheel cover (if  
so equipped)  
prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.  
Jacking up vehicle and removing the  
damaged tire  
Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or  
wheel surface.  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel  
caps or wheel covers. Doing so could re-  
sult in personal injury.  
● Never get under the vehicle while it is  
supported only by the jack. If it is nec-  
essary to work under the vehicle, sup-  
port it with safety stands.  
The wheel covers are held on by the wheel nuts.  
The wheel cover will be removed along with the  
wheel when the nuts are removed.  
● Use only the jack provided with your  
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the  
jack provided with your vehicle on other  
vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting  
only your vehicle during a tire change.  
B
To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod  
᭺
as illustrated.  
In case of emergency 6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
● Do not allow passengers to stay in the  
vehicle while it is on the jack.  
● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off  
the ground. It may cause the vehicle to  
move.  
WCE0160  
Jack-up point sedan  
● Use the correct jack-up points. Never  
use any other part of the vehicle for jack  
support.  
● Never jack up the vehicle more than  
necessary.  
● Never use blocks on or under the jack.  
● Do not start or run the engine while  
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the  
vehicle to move. This is especially true  
for  
vehicles  
with  
limited  
slip  
differentials.  
6-6 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LCE0020  
WCE0056  
notches in the front or the rear as shown.  
Also fit the groove of the jack head between  
the notches as shown.  
Always refer to the proper illustrations for the  
correct placement and jack-up points for your  
specific vehicle model and jack type.  
Installing the spare tire  
The spare tire is designed for emergency  
use. See specific instructions under the  
heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-  
nance and do-it-yourself” section of this  
manual.  
The jack should be used on firm and  
level ground.  
Carefully read the caution label attached to  
the jack body and the following instruc-  
tions.  
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever  
and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the  
vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-  
move the wheel nuts, and then remove the  
tire.  
1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by  
turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut  
wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts  
until the tire is off the ground.  
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-  
tween the wheel and hub.  
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten  
the wheel nuts finger tight.  
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up  
point as illustrated so the top of the jack  
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.  
Align the jack head between the two  
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel  
nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until  
they are tight.  
In case of emergency 6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JUMP STARTING  
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire  
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel  
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely  
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.  
To start your engine with a booster battery, the  
instructions and precautions below must be fol-  
lowed.  
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been  
parked for three hours or more or driven  
less than 1 mile (1.6 km).  
A
B
C
D
in the sequence illustrated (  
,
,
,
᭺ ᭺ ᭺ ᭺  
,
E
). Lower the vehicle completely.  
WARNING  
᭺
COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire  
and loading information label affixed to the  
driver side center pillar.  
● If done incorrectly, jump starting can  
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in  
severe injury or death. It could also  
damage your vehicle.  
WARNING  
● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly  
tightened wheel nuts can cause the  
wheel to become loose or come off.  
This could cause an accident.  
5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-  
ment in the vehicle.  
● Explosive hydrogen gas is always  
present in the vicinity of the battery.  
Keep all sparks and flames away from  
the battery.  
6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor  
carpeting over the damaged tire.  
● Do not use oil or grease on the wheel  
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts  
to become loose.  
7. Close the trunk.  
● Do not allow battery fluid to come into  
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or  
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-  
rosive sulfuric acid solution which can  
cause severe burns. If the fluid should  
come into contact with anything, imme-  
diately flush the contacted area with  
water.  
● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-  
hicle has been driven for 600 miles  
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,  
etc.).  
WARNING  
● Always make sure that the spare tire  
and jacking equipment are properly se-  
cured after use. Such items can become  
dangerous projectiles in an accident or  
sudden stop.  
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts  
to the specified torque with  
wrench.  
a
torque  
● The spare tire is designed for emer-  
gency use. See specific instructions un-  
der the heading “Wheels and tires” in  
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”  
section of this manual.  
● Keep battery out of the reach of  
children.  
Wheel nut tightening torque:  
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)  
● The booster battery must be rated at 12  
volts. Use of an improperly rated battery  
can damage your vehicle.  
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to  
specification at all times. It is recom-  
mended that wheel nuts be tightened to  
specifications at each lubrication interval.  
6-8 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● Whenever working on or near a battery,  
always wear suitable eye protectors (for  
example, goggles or industrial safety  
spectacles) and remove rings, metal  
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean  
over the battery when jump starting.  
● Do not attempt to jump start a frozen  
battery. It could explode and cause se-  
rious injury.  
● Your vehicle has an automatic engine  
cooling fan. It could come on at any  
time. Keep hands and other objects  
away from it.  
WCE0054  
mission). Switch off all unnecessary electri-  
cal systems (lights, heater, air conditioner,  
etc.).  
WARNING  
Always follow the instructions below.  
Failure to do so could result in damage to  
the charging system and cause personal  
injury.  
3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so  
equipped). Cover the battery with an old  
cloth to reduce explosion hazard.  
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,  
position the two vehicles to bring their bat-  
teries near each other.  
4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-  
A
B
C
D
᭺ ᭺ ᭺ ᭺  
lustrated (  
,
,
,
).  
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.  
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-  
lector to N (Neutral) (manual transmission)  
or to P (Park) (Continuously Variable Trans-  
In case of emergency 6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PUSH STARTING  
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS  
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an  
extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if  
you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal  
noise, etc., take the following steps.  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
● Always connect positive (ϩ) to positive  
(ϩ) and negative (Ϫ) to body ground (for  
example, strut mounting bolt, engine  
lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.  
● Do not push start this vehicle. The  
three-way catalyst may be damaged.  
● Continuously Variable Transmission  
(CVT) models cannot be push-started or  
tow-started. Attempting to do so may  
cause transmission damage.  
WARNING  
● Make sure the jumper cables do not  
touch moving parts in the engine com-  
partment and that the cable clamps do  
not contact any other metal.  
● Do not continue to drive if your vehicle  
overheats. Doing so could cause engine  
damage or a vehicle fire.  
● For manual transmission models, never  
try to start the vehicle by towing it.  
When the engine starts, the forward  
surge could cause the vehicle to collide  
with the tow vehicle.  
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,  
never remove the radiator cap while the  
engine is still hot. When the radiator  
cap is removed, pressurized hot water  
will spurt out, possibly causing serious  
injury.  
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and  
let it run for a few minutes.  
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-  
hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-  
gine of the vehicle being jump started.  
● Do not open the hood if steam is com-  
ing out.  
CAUTION  
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for  
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does  
not start right away, turn the key off and  
wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.  
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply  
the parking brake and move the shift selector  
to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P  
(Park) (CVT).  
7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-  
nect the negative cable and then the positive  
cable.  
Do not stop the engine.  
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the  
windows, move the heater or air conditioner  
temperature control to maximum hot and fan  
control to high speed.  
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be  
sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover  
the vent holes as it may be contaminated  
with corrosive acid.  
6-10 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE  
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for  
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator  
before opening the hood. (If steam or cool-  
ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not  
open the hood further until no steam or  
coolant can be seen.  
6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-  
ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank  
with the engine running. Add coolant to the  
engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.  
Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN  
dealer.  
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in  
Canada) and local regulations for towing must be  
followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-  
age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-  
able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-  
tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws  
and procedures for towing. To assure proper  
towing and to prevent accidental damage to your  
vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service  
operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have  
the service operator carefully read the following  
precautions:  
4. Open the engine hood.  
WARNING  
If steam or water is coming from the en-  
gine, stand clear to prevent getting  
burned.  
WARNING  
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or  
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is  
running. The radiator hoses and radiator  
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,  
the water pump belt is missing or loose, or  
the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-  
gine.  
● Never ride in a vehicle that is being  
towed.  
● Never get under your vehicle after it has  
been lifted by a tow truck.  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
● When towing, make sure that the trans-  
mission, axles, steering system and  
powertrain are in working condition. If  
any of these conditions apply, dollies or  
a flatbed tow truck must be used.  
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,  
jewelry or clothing to come into contact  
with, or get caught in, engine belts or the  
engine cooling fan. The engine cooling  
fan can start at any time.  
● Always attach safety chains before  
towing.  
In case of emergency 6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For information about towing your vehicle behind  
a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”  
in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-  
tion of this manual.  
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY  
NISSAN  
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed  
with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or  
place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.  
WCE0194  
A
(CVT)  
(M/T)  
᭺
B
᭺
6-12 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● Observe the following restricted towing  
speeds and distances for manual trans-  
missions (M/T) only:  
CAUTION  
● Never tow Continuously Variable Trans-  
mission (CVT) models with the front  
wheels on the ground or four wheels on  
the ground (forward or backward), as  
this may cause serious and expensive  
damage to the transmission. If it is nec-  
essary to tow the vehicle with the rear  
wheels raised always use towing dollies  
under the front wheels.  
– Speed: Below 50 MPH (80 km/h)  
– Distance: Less than 50 miles (80 km)  
● When towing Continuously Variable  
Transmission (CVT) models with the  
front wheels on towing dollies, or when  
towing manual transmission (M/T)  
models with the front wheels on the  
ground:  
– Place the ignition switch in the OFF  
position, and secure the steering  
wheel in a straight-ahead position  
with a rope or similar device.  
– Move the shift selector to the N (Neu-  
tral) position.  
WCE0195  
A
(CVT)  
(M/T)  
᭺
● When towing Continuously Variable  
Transmission (CVT) or manual trans-  
mission models (M/T) with the rear  
wheels on the ground (if you do not use  
towing dollies): Always release the  
parking brake.  
B
᭺
In case of emergency 6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rocking a stuck vehicle  
● Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow  
or free a stuck vehicle.  
WARNING  
● Only use devices specifically designed  
for vehicle recovery and follow the  
manufacturer’s instructions.  
● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.  
● Do not spin your tires at high speed.  
This could cause them to explode and  
result in serious injury. Parts of your  
vehicle could also overheat and be  
damaged.  
● Always pull the recovery device straight  
out from the front of the vehicle. Never  
pull at an angle.  
● Route recovery devices so they do not  
touch any part of the vehicle except the  
attachment point.  
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,  
use the following procedure:  
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,  
use a tow strap or other device designed specifi-  
cally for vehicle recovery. Always follow the  
manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery de-  
vice.  
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control Sys-  
tem.  
LCE0138  
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck  
vehicle)  
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the  
vehicle is clear of obstructions.  
Pulling a stuck vehicle  
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear  
an area around the front tires.  
Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing or  
vehicle recovery.  
WARNING  
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-  
ward.  
To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-  
sonal injury or death when recovering a  
stuck vehicle:  
● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)  
and D (Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low)  
and R (Reverse) (M/T models).  
● Contact a professional towing service  
to recover the vehicle if you have any  
questions regarding the recovery  
procedure.  
● Apply the accelerator as little as possible  
to maintain the rocking motion.  
6-14 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● Release the accelerator pedal before  
shifting between R (Reverse) and D  
(Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low) and R  
(Reverse) (M/T models).  
● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55  
km/h).  
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few  
tries, contact a professional towing service  
to remove the vehicle.  
In case of emergency 6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
6-16 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Appearance and care  
Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2  
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2  
Waxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2  
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Tire dressings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5  
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5  
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
Corrosion protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
Most common factors contributing to vehicle  
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
Environmental factors influence the rate of  
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CLEANING EXTERIOR  
In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-  
hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.  
the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas  
must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the  
drain holes in the lower edge of the door are  
open. Spray water under the body and in the  
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away  
road salt.  
CAUTION  
● Do not use car washes that use acid in  
the detergent. Some car washes, espe-  
cially brushless ones, use some acid for  
cleaning. The acid may react with some  
plastic vehicle components, causing  
them to crack. This could affect their  
appearance, and also could cause them  
not to function properly. Always check  
with your car wash to confirm that acid  
is not used.  
To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your  
vehicle as soon as you can:  
●
after a rainfall to prevent possible damage  
from acid rain.  
A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to  
avoid water spots.  
●
●
after driving on coastal roads.  
WAXING  
when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-  
pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get  
on the paint surface.  
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and  
helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is  
recommended to remove built-up wax residue  
and to avoid a weathered appearance before  
re-applying wax.  
● Do not wash the vehicle with strong  
household soap, strong chemical deter-  
gents, gasoline or solvents.  
●
when dust or mud builds up on the surface.  
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle  
inside a garage or in a covered area.  
● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-  
light or while the vehicle body is hot, as  
the surface may become water-spotted.  
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the  
proper product.  
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a  
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body  
cover.  
●
Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-  
ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the  
wax.  
● Avoid using tight-napped or rough  
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care  
must be taken when removing  
caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-  
stances so the paint surface is not  
scratched or damaged.  
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface  
when putting on or removing the body  
cover.  
●
Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,  
cutting compounds or cleaners that may  
damage the vehicle finish.  
WASHING  
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing  
on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the  
finish or leave swirl marks.  
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean  
water.  
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of  
water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild  
soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose  
dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm  
(never hot) water.  
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,  
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to  
7-2 Appearance and care  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film  
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to  
become coated with a film after the vehicle is  
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft  
cloth will easily remove this film.  
REMOVING SPOTS  
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,  
and tree sap as quickly as possible from the  
surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or  
staining. Special cleaning products are available  
at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory  
store.  
CAUTION  
When cleaning the inside of the windows,  
do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive  
cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant  
cleaners. They could damage the electri-  
cal conductors, radio antenna elements or  
rear window defroster elements.  
UNDERBODY  
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is  
necessary to clean the underbody regularly in  
order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and  
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-  
derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-  
riod and again in the spring, the underseal must  
be checked and, if necessary, retreated.  
WAI0005  
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so  
equipped)  
GLASS  
When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier  
to clean if the high-mounted stop light (if so  
equipped) is removed first.  
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-  
ened in a mild soap solution, especially during  
winter months in areas where road salt is used. If  
not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.  
Be careful when removing the high-mounted  
stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the  
high-mounted stop light wires.  
CAUTION  
Follow the directions below to avoid  
staining or discoloring the wheels:  
To remove the high-mounted stop light:  
1
Push toward rear of vehicle.  
᭺
● Do not use a cleaner that uses strong  
acid or alkali contents to clean the  
wheels.  
2
Lift to remove.  
᭺
The high-mounted stop light must be properly  
reinstalled before driving your vehicle.  
Appearance and care 7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CLEANING INTERIOR  
●
Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help  
prevent it from entering the tire  
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to  
remove).  
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior  
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum  
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and  
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-  
ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a  
dry, soft cloth.  
● Do not apply wheel cleaners to the  
wheels when they are hot. The wheel  
temperature should be the same as am-  
bient temperature.  
●
●
Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry  
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-  
pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.  
● Rinse the wheel to completely remove  
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the  
cleaner is applied.  
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to  
maintain the appearance of the leather.  
Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-  
mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.  
CHROME PARTS  
Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-  
facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-  
tectors contain chemicals that may stain or  
bleach the seat material.  
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-  
abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.  
TIRE DRESSINGS  
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean  
the meter and gauge lens.  
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire  
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to  
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-  
ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may  
react with the coating and form a compound. This  
compound may come off the tire while driving and  
stain the vehicle paint.  
WARNING  
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot  
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can  
damage the seat or occupant classifica-  
tion sensor. This can also affect the opera-  
tion of the air bag system and result in  
serious personal injury.  
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the  
following precautions:  
●
Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-  
ing on the tire dissolves more easily than  
with an oil-based tire dressing.  
7-4 Appearance and care  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on  
the vents. These products can cause imme-  
diate damage and discoloration when  
spilled on interior surfaces.  
CAUTION  
● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-  
lar material.  
● Small dirt particles can be abrasive and  
damaging to leather surfaces and  
should be removed promptly. Do not  
use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,  
oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-  
gents or ammonia-based cleaners as  
they may damage the leather’s natural  
finish.  
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-  
structions before using the air fresheners.  
FLOOR MATS  
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-  
tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it  
easier to clean the interior. No matter what  
mats are used, be sure they are fitted for  
your vehicle and are properly positioned in  
the footwell to prevent interference with  
pedal operation. Mats should be maintained  
with regular cleaning and replaced if they be-  
come excessively worn.  
● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-  
ommended by the manufacturer.  
LPD0477  
● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on  
meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-  
age the lens cover.  
Floor mat positioning aid  
This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to  
act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor  
mats have been specially designed for your ve-  
hicle model. The driver’s and passenger’s side  
floor mats have a grommet hole incorporated in  
them. Position the mat by placing the floor mat  
bracket hook through the floor mat grommet hole  
while centering the mat in the footwell.  
AIR FRESHENERS  
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect  
the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,  
take the following precautions:  
●
Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-  
manent discoloration when they contact ve-  
hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-  
ener in a location that allows it to hang free  
and not contact an interior surface.  
Periodically check to make certain the mats are  
properly positioned.  
Appearance and care 7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CORROSION PROTECTION  
SEAT BELTS  
MOST COMMON FACTORS  
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE  
CORROSION  
Temperature  
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them  
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.  
Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade  
before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”  
in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-  
tal restraint system” section of this manual.  
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-  
sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.  
●
The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt  
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,  
and other areas.  
Air pollution  
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air  
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-  
ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-  
erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.  
●
Damage to paint and other protective coat-  
ings caused by gravel and stone chips or  
minor traffic accidents.  
WARNING  
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the  
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or  
chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,  
since these materials may severely  
weaken the seat belt webbing.  
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE  
FROM CORROSION  
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS  
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF  
CORROSION  
●
●
●
●
Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the  
vehicle clean.  
Always check for minor damage to the paint  
and repair it as soon as possible.  
Moisture  
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-  
hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.  
Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside  
the vehicle and should be removed for drying to  
avoid floor panel corrosion.  
Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors  
open to avoid water accumulation.  
Check the underbody for accumulation of  
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water  
as soon as possible.  
Relative humidity  
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high  
relative humidity, especially those areas where  
the temperatures stay above freezing and where  
atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is  
used.  
7-6 Appearance and care  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION  
● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-  
bris from the passenger compartment  
by washing it out with a hose. Remove  
dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.  
● Never allow water or other liquids to  
come in contact with electronic compo-  
nents inside the vehicle as this may  
damage them.  
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are  
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion  
and deterioration of underbody components  
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,  
brake cables, floor pan and fenders.  
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned  
periodically.  
For additional protection against rust and corro-  
sion, which may be required in some areas, con-  
sult a NISSAN dealer.  
Appearance and care 7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
7-8 Appearance and care  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19  
Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5  
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6  
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8  
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8  
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9  
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9  
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9  
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10  
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . .8-13  
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13  
Brake and clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14  
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14  
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14  
Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15  
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15  
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15  
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17  
Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17  
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18  
Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19  
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19  
In-cabin microfilter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20  
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20  
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20  
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21  
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22  
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22  
Brake pad wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22  
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22  
Engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23  
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24  
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26  
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27  
Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27  
Front park/turn/sidemarker light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28  
Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28  
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34  
Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34  
Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38  
Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41  
Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42  
Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS  
GENERAL MAINTENANCE  
Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini-  
mum maintenance requirements with long ser-  
vice intervals to save you both time and money.  
However, some day-to-day and regular mainte-  
nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’s  
good mechanical condition, as well as its emis-  
sions and engine performance.  
Performing general maintenance checks requires  
minimal mechanical skill and only a few general  
automotive tools.  
During the normal day-to-day operation of the  
vehicle, general maintenance should be per-  
formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If  
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or  
smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a  
NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you  
should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that  
repairs are required.  
These checks or inspections can be done by you,  
a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN  
dealer.  
Where to go for service  
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that  
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general  
maintenance, is performed.  
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle  
appears to malfunction, have the systems  
checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.  
When performing any checks or maintenance  
work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-  
tions” later in this section.  
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who  
can ensure that your vehicle receives proper  
maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-  
nance chain.  
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists  
who are kept up-to-date with the latest service  
information through technical bulletins, service  
tips, and in-dealership training programs. They  
are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-  
hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather  
than after they have worked on it.  
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL  
MAINTENANCE ITEMS  
Additional information on the following  
items with “ * ”is found later in this section.  
Scheduled maintenance  
For your convenience, both required and optional  
scheduled maintenance items are described and  
listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance  
Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure  
that necessary maintenance is performed on your  
NISSAN at regular intervals.  
Outside the vehicle  
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s  
service department performs the best job to meet  
the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —  
in a reliable and economical way.  
The maintenance items listed here should be  
performed from time to time, unless otherwise  
specified.  
Doors and engine hood Check that the doors  
and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure  
that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,  
latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.  
Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the  
hood from opening when the primary latch is  
released.  
General maintenance  
General maintenance includes those items which  
should be checked during normal day-to-day op-  
eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-  
eration. It is your responsibility to perform these  
maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.  
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When driving in areas using road salt or other  
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.  
alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at  
normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be  
needed.  
Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-  
tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-  
ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the  
vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a  
NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat  
away from the pedal.  
Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.  
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail  
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all  
operating properly and installed securely. Also  
check headlight aim.  
●
For additional information regarding tires,  
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”  
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in  
the Warranty Information Booklet.  
Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the  
vehicle to one side when applied.  
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking  
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,  
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if  
necessary.  
Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular  
basis. Check the windshield at least every six  
months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-  
aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair  
facility.  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)  
P (Park) position mechanism On a fairly  
steep hill, check that the vehicle is held securely  
with the shift selector in the P (Park) position  
without applying any brakes.  
Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every  
7,500 miles (12,000 km).  
Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or  
wear if they do not wipe properly.  
Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-  
tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held  
on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake  
applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,  
see a NISSAN dealer.  
Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often  
and always prior to long distance trips. If neces-  
sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the  
spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully  
for damage, cuts or excessive wear.  
Inside the vehicle  
The maintenance items listed here should be  
checked on a regular basis, such as when per-  
forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-  
hicle, etc.  
Seats Check seat position controls such as seat  
adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure they  
operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in  
every position. Check that the head restraints  
move up and down smoothly and the lock knobs  
(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched posi-  
tions.  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)  
transmitter components Replace the TPMS  
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap  
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.  
Additional information on the following  
items with an “*” is found later in this sec-  
tion.  
Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle  
should pull to either side while driving on a  
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or  
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel  
Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth  
operation and make sure the pedal does not bind  
or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away  
from the pedal.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt  
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters  
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,  
and are installed securely. Check the belt web-  
bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.  
Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure that  
the brake and clutch fluid level is between the  
MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.  
Power steering fluid level* and lines Check  
the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine  
off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,  
cracks, etc.  
Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level  
when the engine is cold.  
Radiator and hoses Check the front of the  
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,  
etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the  
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose  
connections.  
Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-  
ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard  
steering or strange noises.  
Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts  
are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.  
Engine oil level* Check the level after parking  
the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.  
Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain  
back into the oil pan.  
Warning lights and chimes Make sure all  
warning lights and chimes are operating properly.  
Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-  
posed to corrosive substances such as those  
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very  
important to remove these substances from the  
underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor  
pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the  
end of winter, the underbody should be thor-  
oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas  
where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See  
the “Appearance and care” section of this  
manual.  
Windshield wiper and washer* Check that  
the wipers and washer operate properly and that  
the wipers do not streak.  
Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose  
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the  
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of  
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust  
system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the  
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)Љ in the “Starting  
and driving” section of this manual.  
Windshield defroster Check that the air  
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in  
sufficient quantity when operating the heater or  
air conditioner.  
Under the hood and vehicle  
Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,  
water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has  
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the  
air conditioner after use is normal. If you should  
notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,  
check for the cause and have it corrected imme-  
diately.  
Windshield–washer fluid* Check that there is  
adequate fluid in the reservoir.  
The maintenance items listed here should be  
checked periodically (for example, each time you  
check the engine oil or refuel).  
Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It  
should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-  
hicles operated in high temperatures or under  
severe conditions require frequent checks of the  
battery fluid level.  
8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS  
When performing any inspection or maintenance  
work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent  
serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to  
the vehicle. The following are general precau-  
tions which should be closely observed.  
● If you must run the engine in an en-  
closed space such as a garage, be sure  
there is proper ventilation for exhaust  
gases to escape.  
● Never leave the engine or the CVT re-  
lated component harness connector  
disconnected while the ignition switch  
is in the ON position.  
● Never get under the vehicle while it is  
supported only by a jack. If it is neces-  
sary to work under the vehicle, support  
it with safety stands.  
● Never connect or disconnect the battery  
or any transistorized component while  
the ignition switch is in the ON position.  
WARNING  
● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-  
ply the parking brake securely and  
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle  
from moving. For manual transmission  
models, move the shift selector to N  
(Neutral). For CVT models, move the  
shift selector to P (Park).  
● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-  
matic engine cooling fan. It may come  
on at any time without warning, even if  
the ignition key is in the OFF position  
and the engine is not running. To avoid  
injury, always disconnect the negative  
battery cable before working near the  
fan.  
● Keep smoking materials, flame and  
sparks away from the fuel tank and  
battery.  
● On gasoline engine models, the fuel  
filter or fuel lines should be serviced by  
a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines  
are under high pressure even when the  
engine is off.  
● Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF  
or LOCK position when performing any  
parts replacement or repairs.  
This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section  
gives instructions regarding only those items  
which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.  
● If you must work with the engine run-  
ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair  
and tools away from moving fans, belts  
and any other moving parts.  
CAUTION  
A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-  
able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-  
der information” in the “Technical and consumer  
information” section of this manual.  
● Do not work under the hood while the  
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and  
wait until it cools down.  
● It is advisable to secure or remove any  
loose clothing and remove any jewelry,  
such as rings, watches, etc. before  
working on your vehicle.  
● Avoid contact with used engine oil and  
coolant. Improperly disposed engine  
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle  
fluids can damage the environment. Al-  
ways conform to local regulations for  
disposal of vehicle fluid.  
You should be aware that incomplete or improper  
servicing may result in operating difficulties or  
excessive emissions, and could affect warranty  
coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,  
have it done by a NISSAN dealer.  
● Always wear eye protection whenever  
you work on your vehicle.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK  
LOCATIONS  
QR25DE engine  
1. Power steering fluid reservoir  
2. Engine oil filler cap  
3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid  
reservoir (M/T model)  
4. Air cleaner  
5. Fuse block  
6. Battery  
7. Fuse/Fusible link box  
8. Engine oil dipstick  
9. Radiator cap  
10. Drive belt location  
11. Engine coolant reservoir  
12. Windshield–washer fluid reservoir  
LDI0553  
8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VQ35DE engine  
1. Power steering fluid reservoir  
2. Engine oil filler cap  
3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid  
reservoir (M/T model)  
4. Air cleaner  
5. Fuse block  
6. Battery  
7. Fuse/Fusible link box  
8. Engine oil dipstick  
9. Radiator cap  
10. Drive belt location  
11. Engine coolant reservoir  
12. Windshield–washer fluid reservoir  
LDI0552  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM  
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory  
with Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant to provide  
year-round anti-freeze and coolant protection.  
The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corro-  
sion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system  
additives are not necessary.  
CAUTION  
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure  
to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life  
Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent with the  
proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze  
and 50% demineralized or distilled water.  
The use of other types of coolant solu-  
tions other than Genuine NISSAN Long  
Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent,  
may damage the engine cooling system.  
WARNING  
● Never remove the radiator or coolant  
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.  
Wait until the engine and radiator cool  
down. Serious burns could be caused  
by high pressure fluid escaping from  
the radiator. See precautions in “If your  
vehicle overheats” found in the “In case  
of emergency” section of this manual.  
Outside temperature  
down to  
Genuine  
NISSAN  
Demineral-  
ized or dis-  
tilled water  
Long Life  
Antifreeze/  
Coolant or  
equivalent  
LDI0554  
°C  
°F  
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT  
LEVEL  
● The radiator is equipped with a pres-  
-35  
-30  
50%  
50%  
sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-  
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when  
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below  
gine damage, use only  
NISSAN radiator cap.  
a
genuine  
B
the MIN level  
᭺
, add coolant to the MAX level  
᭺
A
. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant  
level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If  
there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the  
radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and  
A
also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level  
.
᭺
If the cooling system frequently requires  
coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ENGINE OIL  
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT  
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.  
The service procedure can be found in the  
NISSAN Service Manual.  
Improper servicing can result in reduced  
heater performance and engine overheat-  
ing.  
WARNING  
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,  
never change the coolant when the en-  
gine is hot.  
LDI0555  
LDI0556  
● Never remove the radiator cap when the  
engine is hot. Serious burns could be  
caused by high pressure fluid escaping  
from the radiator.  
QR25DE engine  
VQ35DE engine  
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL  
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply  
the parking brake.  
● Avoid direct skin contact with used  
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash  
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner  
as soon as possible.  
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches  
operating temperature.  
● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-  
dren and pets.  
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10  
minutes for the oil to drain back into  
the oil pan.  
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.  
Check your local regulations.  
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-  
insert it all the way.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION  
Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-  
erating the engine with an insufficient  
amount of oil can damage the engine, and  
such damage is not covered by warranty.  
WDI0492  
WDI0214  
QR25DE  
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil  
level. It should be between the H (High) and  
CHANGING ENGINE OIL  
B
L (Low) marks  
ating oil level range. If the oil level is below  
the L (Low) mark , remove the oil filler cap  
and pour recommended oil through the  
. This is the normal oper-  
᭺
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply  
the parking brake.  
A
᭺
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches  
operating temperature, then turn it off.  
C
opening. Do not overfill  
.
᭺
A
3. Remove the oil filler  
counterclockwise.  
cap by turning it  
᭺
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.  
It is normal to add some oil between oil  
maintenance intervals or during the  
break-in period, depending on the severity  
of operating conditions.  
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug  
B
.
᭺
8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The drain and refill capacity depends on the  
oil temperature and drain time. Use these  
specifications for reference only. Always use  
the dipstick to determine when the proper  
amount of oil is in the engine.  
WARNING  
● Prolonged and repeated contact with  
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.  
● Try to avoid direct skin contact with  
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash  
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner  
as soon as possible.  
8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around  
the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-  
quired.  
● Keep used engine oil out of reach of  
children.  
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10  
minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.  
Add engine oil if necessary.  
CAUTION  
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine  
oil may be hot.  
WDI0493  
VQ35DE  
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new  
washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with  
a wrench. Do not use excessive force.  
B
5. Remove the drain plug  
with a wrench by  
᭺
turning it counterclockwise and completely  
drain the oil.  
Drain plug tightening torque:  
22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)  
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and  
replace it at this time. See “Changing engine  
oil filter” later in this section.  
7. Refill engine with recommended oil through  
the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler  
cap securely.  
●
●
Waste oil must be disposed of prop-  
erly.  
See “Capacities and recommended  
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-  
sumer information”section of this manual for  
drain and refill capacity.  
Check your local regulations.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean  
engine oil.  
7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance  
is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.  
8. Start the engine and check for leakage  
around the oil filter. Correct as required.  
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10  
minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if  
necessary.  
WDI0494  
WDI0495  
QR25DE  
VQ35DE  
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER  
CAUTION  
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply  
the parking brake.  
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine  
oil may be hot.  
2. Turn the engine off.  
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with  
a clean rag.  
A
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter  
.
᭺
A
4. Loosen the oil filter  
with an oil filter  
᭺
CAUTION  
wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then  
remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.  
Be sure to remove any old gasket material  
remaining on the sealing surface of the  
engine. Failure to do so could lead to  
engine damage.  
8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE  
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID  
POWER STEERING FLUID  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
● DO NOT OVERFILL.  
● Recommended fluid  
NISSAN PSF or equivalent.  
● Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid  
NS-2. Do not mix with other fluids.  
is  
Genuine  
● Using transmission fluid other than  
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will  
damage the CVT, which is not covered  
by the NISSAN new vehicle limited  
warranty.  
When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is  
required, we recommend your NISSAN dealer for  
servicing.  
LDI0557  
The fluid level should be checked using the HOT  
MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir  
at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -  
80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the  
power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-  
tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).  
If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, add Genu-  
ine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAX  
depending on system fluid temperature. Remove  
the cap and fill through the opening.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID  
For further brake and clutch fluid specification  
information, refer to “Capacities and recom-  
mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and  
consumer information” section of this manual.  
WARNING  
● Use only new fluid from a sealed con-  
tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated  
fluid may damage the brake and clutch  
systems. The use of improper fluids can  
damage the brake system and affect  
the vehicle’s stopping ability.  
● Clean the filler cap before removing.  
LDI0558  
LDI0558  
● Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous and  
should be stored carefully in marked  
containers out of reach of children.  
BRAKE FLUID  
CLUTCH FLUID  
Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the  
fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake  
warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN  
Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT  
3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added  
frequently, the system should be checked by a  
NISSAN dealer.  
Check the clutch fluid level in the reservoir  
(manual transmissions only). If the fluid level is  
below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN Super  
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid  
up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added fre-  
quently, the system should be checked by a  
NISSAN dealer.  
CAUTION  
Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-  
faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is  
spilled, immediately wash the surface  
with water.  
For further brake and clutch fluid specification  
information, refer to “Capacities and recom-  
mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and  
consumer information” section of this manual.  
8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID  
BATTERY  
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving  
conditions require an increased amount of  
windshield-washer fluid.  
●
Keep the battery surface clean and dry.  
Clean the battery with a solution of baking  
soda and water.  
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-  
shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-  
freeze or equivalent.  
●
●
Make certain the terminal connections are  
clean and securely tightened.  
If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or  
longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery  
terminal cable to prevent discharge.  
CAUTION  
● Do not substitute engine anti-freeze  
coolant for windshield-washer solution.  
This may result in damage to the paint.  
WARNING  
● Do not expose the battery to flames, an  
electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydro-  
gen gas generated by the battery is ex-  
plosive. Explosive gases can cause  
blindness or injury. Do not allow battery  
fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics  
or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can  
cause blindness or injury. After touch-  
ing a battery or battery cap, do not  
touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly  
wash your hands. If the acid contacts  
your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately  
flush with water for at least 15 minutes  
and seek medical attention.  
● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid  
reservoir tank with washer fluid con-  
centrates at full strength. Some methyl  
alcohol based washer fluid concen-  
trates may permanently stain the grille  
if spilled while filling the windshield-  
washer fluid reservoir tank.  
LDI0559  
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID  
RESERVOIR  
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi-  
cally. Add windshield-washer fluid when the low  
windshield-washer fluid warning light comes on  
(if so equipped).  
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with  
water to the manufacturer’s recom-  
mended levels before pouring the fluid  
into the windshield-washer fluid reser-  
voir tank. Do not use the windshield-  
washer reservoir tank to mix the washer  
fluid concentrate and water.  
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift  
the cap off the reservoir tank and pour the  
windshield-washer fluid into the tank opening.  
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better  
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield-  
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-  
structions for the mixture ratio.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in  
the battery is low. Low battery fluid can  
cause a higher load on the battery  
which can generate heat, reduce bat-  
tery life, and in some cases lead to an  
explosion.  
● When working on or near a battery, al-  
ways wear suitable eye protection and  
remove all jewelry.  
● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-  
cessories contain lead and lead com-  
pounds. Wash hands after handling.  
● Keep battery out of the reach of  
children.  
WDI0224  
1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as  
shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery  
case.  
● Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent  
caps tight and the battery level.  
WDI0529  
2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is  
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled  
water to bring the level up to the bottom of  
the filler opening. Do not overfill. . Reinstall  
the vent caps.  
8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL  
SYSTEM  
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under  
severe conditions require frequent checks of the  
battery fluid level.  
CAUTION  
● Do not ground accessories directly to  
the battery terminal. Doing so will by-  
pass the variable voltage control sys-  
tem and the vehicle battery may not  
charge completely.  
JUMP STARTING  
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”  
in the “In case of emergency” section of this  
manual. If the engine does not start by jump  
starting, the battery may have to be replaced.  
Contact a NISSAN dealer.  
● Use electrical accessories with the en-  
gine running to avoid discharging the  
vehicle battery.  
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage  
control system. This system measures the  
amount of electrical discharge from the battery  
and controls voltage generated by the generator.  
A
The current sensor  
is located near the battery  
᭺
along the negative battery cable. If you add elec-  
trical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to  
ground them to a suitable body ground such as  
the frame or engine block area.  
LDI0694  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DRIVE BELT  
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual  
wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is  
in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced  
or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.  
2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-  
tion and tension in accordance with the  
maintenance schedule found in the  
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.  
WDI0673  
WDI0721  
QR25DE engine  
VQ35DE engine  
1. Power steering fluid pump pulley  
2. Water pump pulley  
3. Generator  
1. Power steering fluid pump pulley  
2. Idler pulley  
3. Generator  
4. Air conditioner  
4. Air conditioner  
5. Crankshaft pulley  
5. Idler pulley  
6. Drive belt Automatic tensioner  
6. Crankshaft pulley  
7. Drive belt Automatic tensioner  
WARNING  
Be sure the ignition switch is placed in the  
OFF or LOCK position before servicing  
drive belt. The engine could rotate  
unexpectedly.  
8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SPARK PLUGS  
AIR CLEANER  
WARNING  
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are  
off and that the parking brake is engaged  
securely.  
CAUTION  
Be sure to use the correct socket to re-  
move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket  
can damage the spark plugs.  
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN  
dealer for assistance.  
LDI0563  
SDI1895  
QR25DE  
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS  
Iridium-tipped spark plugs  
NOTE:  
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned  
and reused.  
A
It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped  
᭺
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type  
spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-  
low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN  
Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service  
iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap-  
ping.  
Replace the air cleaner filter according to the  
maintenance log shown in the “Warranty Informa-  
tion and Maintenance Booklet.”  
To remove the air cleaner filter:  
1
Unlatch the clips and move the air cleaner  
᭺
●
Always replace spark plugs with rec-  
ommended or equivalent ones.  
cover upward.  
2
Remove the air cleaner filter.  
᭺
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES  
CLEANING  
WARNING  
If your windshield is not clear after using the  
windshield-washer or if a wiper blade chatters  
when running, wax or other material may be on  
the blade or windshield.  
● Operating the engine with the air  
cleaner removed can cause you or oth-  
ers to be burned. The air cleaner not  
only cleans the air, it stops the flame if  
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and  
the engine backfires, you could be  
burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner  
removed, and be careful when working  
on the engine with the air cleaner  
removed.  
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer  
solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is  
clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear  
water.  
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked  
in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then  
rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-  
shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades  
and using the wiper, install new windshield wiper  
blades.  
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body or  
attempt to start the engine with the air  
cleaner removed. Doing so could result  
in serious injury.  
LDI0562  
VQ35DE  
3
Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter hous-  
ing and the cover with a damp cloth.  
᭺
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER  
CAUTION  
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-  
borne dust and pollen particles and reduces  
some objectionable outside odors. The filter is  
located behind the glove box. Refer to the  
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for  
change intervals.  
Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-  
age the windshield and impair driver  
vision.  
NOTE:  
After installing a new air cleaner, make  
sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the  
housing and latch the clips.  
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN  
dealer.  
8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Return the wiper to its original position and  
release it until it has made contact with the  
windshield.  
CAUTION  
● After wiper blade replacement, return  
the wiper arm to its original position;  
otherwise it may be damaged when the  
hood is opened.  
● Make sure the wiper blades contact the  
glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-  
aged from wind pressure.  
WDI0594  
REPLACING  
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.  
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.  
2
Push the release tab, then move the wiper  
blade down the wiper arm to remove.  
᭺
3
Remove the wiper blade.  
WDI0570  
᭺
If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not  
to let wax get into the windshield-washer nozzle  
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper  
arm until it clicks into place.  
A
.
This may cause clogging or improper  
᭺
5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in the  
groove.  
windshield-washer operation. If wax gets into the  
nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin  
B
.
᭺
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BRAKES  
FUSES  
If the brakes do not operate properly, have the  
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
Proper brake inspection intervals should  
be followed. For more information regarding  
brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-  
nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-  
vice and Maintenance Guide”.  
SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES  
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting  
brakes.  
The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust  
every time the brake pedal is applied.  
WARNING  
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system  
check if the brake pedal height does not  
return to normal.  
LDI0455  
A
Two types of fuses are used. Type  
is used in  
BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATORS  
᭺
the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type  
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible  
wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-  
placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-  
ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in  
motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the  
brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes  
checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator  
sound is heard.  
B
is used in the passenger compartment fuse  
᭺
box.  
Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They  
are stored in the passenger compartment fuse  
box.  
Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-  
partment and passenger compartment fuse  
boxes.  
Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-  
sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may  
be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to  
moderate stops is normal and does not affect the  
function or performance of the brake system.  
8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the  
tab and lifting the cover up.  
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The  
fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse  
block in the passenger compartment.  
LDI0457  
LDI0560  
If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,  
the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse  
pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not  
affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the  
fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.  
ENGINE COMPARTMENT  
CAUTION  
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower  
amperage rating than specified on the  
fuse box cover. This could damage the  
electrical system or cause a fire.  
Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-  
hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in the  
underhood fuse boxes.  
If any electrical equipment does not come on,  
check for an open fuse.  
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight  
switch are OFF.  
2. Open the engine hood.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WDI0452  
WDI0402  
A
5. If the fuse is open  
, replace it with a new  
᭺
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT  
B
fuse  
.
᭺
CAUTION  
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical  
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower  
amperage rating than specified on the  
fuse box cover. This could damage the  
electrical system or cause a fire.  
Fusible links  
If the electrical equipment does not operate and  
fuses are in good condition, check the fusible  
links. If any of these fusible links are melted,  
replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.  
If any electrical equipment does not operate,  
check for an open fuse.  
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight  
switch are OFF.  
2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.  
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.  
8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BATTERY REPLACEMENT  
CAUTION  
Be careful not to allow children to swallow  
the battery or removed parts.  
WDI0452  
LDI0456  
Type A  
A
Type B  
4. If the fuse is open  
, replace it with an  
.
᭺
B
equivalent good fuse  
᭺
5. Push the fuse box cover to install.  
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical  
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™  
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-  
lows:  
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-  
gent Key.  
A
B
2. Insert a small screwdriver  
into the slit  
᭺
᭺
of the corner and twist it to separate the  
upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to  
protect the casing.  
3. Replace the battery with a new one.  
Recommended battery: CR2032 or equiva-  
lent.  
WDI0568  
● Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-  
tric terminals as doing so could cause a  
malfunction.  
C
D
᭺ ᭺  
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated  
.
5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.  
See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for  
replacement.  
● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding  
the battery across the contact points will  
seriously deplete the storage capacity.  
FCC Notice:  
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-  
proved by the party responsible for compli-  
ance could void the user’s authority to op-  
erate the equipment.  
● Make sure that the + side faces the bot-  
tom of the case.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry  
Canada.  
WDI0567  
8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LIGHTS  
Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions: (1) This device may not cause  
harmful interference, and (2) this device  
must accept any interference received, in-  
cluding interference that may cause undes-  
ired operation of the device.  
HEADLIGHTS  
Replacing the xenon headlight bulb (if  
so equipped)  
● Do not leave the headlight assembly  
open without a bulb installed for a long  
period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,  
etc. entering the headlight body may  
affect bulb performance. Remove the  
bulb from the headlight assembly just  
before a replacement bulb is installed.  
WARNING  
HIGH VOLTAGE  
Ꮨ
● Only touch the base when handling the  
bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.  
Touching the glass could significantly  
affect bulb life and/or headlight  
performance.  
When xenon headlights are on, they pro-  
duce a high voltage. To prevent an electric  
shock, never attempt to modify or disas-  
semble. Always have your xenon head-  
lights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. For  
additional information, see “Headlight  
and turn signal switch” in the “Instru-  
ments and controls” section.  
● High pressure halogen gas is sealed  
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may  
break if the glass envelope is scratched  
or the bulb is dropped.  
Replacing the halogen headlight bulb  
● Use the same number and wattage as  
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which  
uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be-  
cause the headlight assembly must be removed  
from the vehicle for bulb replacement, see your  
NISSAN dealer.  
shown in the chart.  
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the  
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A  
temperature difference between the inside and  
the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not  
a malfunction. If large drops of water collect  
inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.  
CAUTION  
● Aiming is not necessary after replacing  
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is  
necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FRONT PARK/TURN/SIDEMARKER  
LIGHT  
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS  
Item  
Wattage (W)  
Bulb No.*1  
Headlight assembly *2  
Low (Halogen)  
Low (Xenon)  
Bulb replacement requires the removal of the  
headlight assembly. If replacement is required,  
see your NISSAN dealer.  
55  
35  
65  
H11  
D2R  
H9  
High  
Park  
Park/Turn  
5
8/27  
WY5W  
3457NAK  
Sidemarker  
Sedan  
Coupe  
5
5
55  
—
WY5W  
W5W  
H11  
Front fog light (if so equipped) *2  
Step light  
194  
Rear combination light  
Tail/Stop  
8/27  
27  
3157K  
3156  
Turn  
Backup (reversing)  
Sedan  
16  
13  
5
921LF  
912  
W5W  
Coupe  
License plate light *2  
High-mounted stop light *2  
Inside (coupe)  
Inside (sedan)  
Spoiler (if so equipped)  
Front map light  
Rear personal light  
Trunk light  
—
18  
—
8
LED  
921  
LED  
U89  
U88  
158  
HTU–14v  
—
8
3.4  
—
—
Vanity mirror light  
Glove box light *2  
*1 Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.  
*2 See a NISSAN dealer for assistance.  
8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Coupe  
1. Mirror-mounted turn signal light  
(if so equipped)  
2. Interior light  
3. Map light  
4. Headlamp assembly  
5. Fog light (if so equipped)  
6. Step light  
7. High-mount stoplight  
8. Trunk light  
9. License plate light  
10. Rear combination light  
WDI0626  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sedan  
1. Rear map light  
2. Front map light  
3. Step light  
4. Headlamp assembly  
5. Fog light (if so equipped)  
6. High-mount stoplight (if so equipped)  
7. Trunk light  
8. Spoiler mounted stoplight  
(if so equipped)  
9. Rear combination light  
10. License plate light  
11. Mirror-mounted turn signal light  
(if so equipped)  
WDI0680  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Indicates bulb installation  
LDI0341  
Step light  
1
Use a cloth  
to protect the housing.  
᭺
WDI0306  
Replacement procedures  
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When  
replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, light  
and/or cover.  
Indicates bulb removal  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WDI0723  
WDI0670  
WDI0632  
Personal light (if so equipped)  
Interior light  
Map light  
1
1
Use a cloth  
to protect the housing.  
Use a cloth  
to protect the housing.  
Use a cloth to protect the housing.  
᭺
᭺
8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear combination light  
To access the bulbs in the rear combination light:  
1
Remove the fasteners. Carefully push back  
the carpet.  
᭺
2
Remove the 2 nuts and pull out the rear  
combination light.  
᭺
3
Rotate the bulb(s) counterclockwise and  
pull out to remove:  
᭺
A
Turn signal light  
᭺
B
Sidemarker light  
᭺
C
Tail/stop light  
᭺
D
Backup light  
᭺
WDI0635  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHEELS AND TIRES  
If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the  
“In case of emergency” section of this  
manual.  
TIRE PRESSURE  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System  
(TPMS)  
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire  
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It  
monitors tire pressure of all tires except  
the spare. When the low tire pressure  
warning light is lit, one or more of your  
tires is significantly under-inflated.  
WDI0343  
WDI0320  
Trunk light  
High-mounted stoplight (rear window)  
The TPMS will activate only when the  
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH  
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-  
tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for  
example a flat tire while driving).  
For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-  
sure warning light”in the “Instruments and  
controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitor-  
ing System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and  
driving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In  
case of emergency” section.  
8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Incorrect tire pressure, including un-  
der inflation, may adversely affect  
tire life and vehicle handling.  
Tire inflation pressure  
● Before taking a long trip, or  
whenever you heavily load your  
vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge  
to ensure that the tire pressures  
are at the specified level.  
Check the tire pressures (including the  
spare) often and always prior to long dis-  
tance trips. The recommended tire pres-  
sure specifications are shown on the  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label  
or the Tire and Loading Information label  
under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.  
The Tire and Loading Information label is  
affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire  
pressures should be checked regularly  
because:  
WARNING  
● Improperly inflated tires can fail  
● For additional information re-  
garding tires, refer to “Important  
Tire Safety Information” (US) or  
suddenly and cause an accident.  
● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating  
(GVWR) is located on the  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-  
tion label. The vehicle weight ca-  
pacity is indicated on the Tire and  
Loading Information label (if so  
equipped). Do not load your ve-  
hicle beyond this capacity. Over-  
loading your vehicle may result in  
reduced tire life, unsafe operat-  
ing conditions due to premature  
tire failure, or unfavorable han-  
dling characteristics and could  
also lead to a serious accident.  
Loading beyond the specified ca-  
pacity may also result in failure of  
other vehicle components.  
“Tire  
Safety  
Information”  
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-  
mation Booklet.  
● Most tires naturally lose air over time.  
● Tires can lose air suddenly when  
driven over potholes or other objects  
or if the vehicle strikes a curb while  
parking.  
The tire pressures should be checked  
when the tires are cold. The tires are  
considered COLD after the vehicle has  
been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven  
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate  
speeds.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
᭺
Spare tire size.  
WDI0730  
4
Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to  
this pressure when the tires are cold.  
Tires are considered COLD after the  
vehicle has been parked for 3 or more  
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6  
km) at moderate speeds. The recom-  
mended cold tire inflation is set by the  
manufacturer to provide the best bal-  
ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,  
driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the  
vehicle’s GVWR.  
Tire and loading information label  
᭺
1
᭺
Seating capacity: The maximum num-  
ber of occupants that can be seated  
in the vehicle.  
2
᭺
Vehicle load limit: See “Vehicle load-  
ing information” in the “Technical and  
consumer information” section.  
3
᭺
Original tire size: The size of the tires  
originally installed on the vehicle at  
the factory.  
5
᭺
Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” later  
in this section.  
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge  
stem and compare to the specifica-  
tion shown on the Tire and Loading  
Information label.  
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too  
much air is added, press the core of  
the valve stem briefly with the tip of  
the gauge stem to release pressure.  
Recheck the pressure and add or  
release air as needed.  
6. Install the valve stem cap.  
LDI0393  
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,  
including the spare.  
Checking tire pressure  
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the  
tire.  
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely  
onto the valve stem. Do not press too  
hard or force the valve stem side-  
ways, or air will escape. If the hissing  
sound of air escaping from the tire is  
heard while checking the pressure,  
reposition the gauge to eliminate this  
leakage.  
3. Remove the gauge.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Size  
Cold Tire Inflation Pres-  
sure  
Front Original Tire  
Rear Original Tire  
Spare Tire  
P215/60/R16  
P215/55R17  
P235/45R18  
P215/60R16  
P215/55R17  
P235/45R18  
T135/90R16  
220 kPa, 32 PSI  
230 kPa, 33 PSI  
220 kPa, 32 PSI  
230 kPa, 33 PSI  
420 kPa, 60 PSI  
WDI0394  
Example  
TIRE LABELING  
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to  
place standardized information on the  
sidewall of all tires. This information iden-  
tifies and describes the fundamental  
characteristics of the tire and also pro-  
vides the tire identification number (TIN)  
for safety standard certification. The TIN  
can be used to identify the tire in case of a  
recall.  
8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not  
drive the vehicle faster than the tire  
speed rating.  
WDI0395  
Example  
1
᭺
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.  
Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)  
5. Two-digit number (15): This number  
is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.  
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-  
signed for passenger vehicles (not all  
tires have this information).  
6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This  
number is the tire’s load index. It is a  
measurement of how much weight  
each tire can support. You may not  
find this information on all tires be-  
cause it is not required by law.  
2. Three-digit number (215): This num-  
ber gives the width in millimeters of  
the tire from sidewall edge to side-  
wall edge.  
3. Two-digit number (65): This number,  
known as the aspect ratio, gives the  
tire’s ratio of height to width.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
᭺
Tire ply composition and material  
The number of layers or plies of rubber-  
coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-  
ers also must indicate the materials in the  
tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,  
and others.  
4
sure  
Maximum permissible inflation pres-  
᭺
This number is the greatest amount of air  
pressure that should be put in the tire. Do  
not exceed the maximum permissible in-  
flation pressure.  
WDI0396  
Example  
5
᭺
Maximum load rating  
2
᭺
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code  
(Optional).  
TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a  
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX  
XXXX)  
This number indicates the maximum load  
in kilograms and pounds that can be car-  
ried by the tire. When replacing the tires  
on the vehicle, always use a tire that has  
the same load rating as the factory in-  
stalled tire.  
5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-  
ture.  
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-  
ment Of Transportation”. The symbol  
can be placed above, below or to the  
left or right of the Tire Identification  
Number.  
6. Four numbers represent the week  
and year the tire was built. For ex-  
ample, the numbers 3103 means the  
31st week of 2003. If these numbers  
are missing, then look on the other  
sidewall of the tire.  
6
᭺
Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”  
Indicates whether the tire requires an in-  
ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).  
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s  
identification mark.  
3. Two-digit code: Tire size.  
8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
᭺
The word “radial”  
TYPES OF TIRES  
Summer tires  
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models  
to provide superior performance on dry roads.  
Summer tire performance is substantially re-  
duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have  
the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.  
The word “radial” is shown if the tire has  
radial structure.  
WARNING  
● When changing or replacing tires, be  
sure all four tires are of the same type  
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and  
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be  
able to help you with information about  
tire type, size, speed rating and  
availability.  
8
᭺
Manufacturer or brand name  
Manufacturer or brand name is shown.  
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy  
conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of  
SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four  
wheels.  
Other Tire-related Terminology  
In addition to the many terms that are  
defined throughout this section, Intended  
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that  
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering  
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or  
model name molding that is higher or  
deeper than the same molding on the  
other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-  
ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical  
tire that has a particular side that must  
always face outward when mounted on a  
vehicle.  
● Replacement tires may have a lower  
speed rating than the factory equipped  
tires, and may not match the potential  
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed  
the maximum speed rating of the tire.  
Snow tires  
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select  
tires equivalent in size and load rating to the  
original equipment tires. If you do not, it can  
adversely affect the safety and handling of your  
vehicle.  
● For additional information regarding  
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-  
formation”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-  
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-  
tion Booklet.  
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings  
than factory equipped tires and may not match  
the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-  
ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.  
All season tires  
If you install snow tires, they must be the same  
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all  
four wheels.  
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-  
els to provide good performance all year, includ-  
ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season  
tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S  
on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow  
traction than All Season tires and may be more  
appropriate in some areas.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires  
may be used. However, some U.S. states and  
Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check  
local, state and provincial laws before installing  
studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of  
studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be  
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.  
A tire chain that provides the specified amount of  
space will provide the necessary clearance be-  
tween the tire and the closest vehicle suspension  
or body component. The minimum clearances are  
determined using the factory-equipped tires.  
Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain  
tensioners when recommended by the tire chain  
manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links  
of the tire chain must be secured or removed to  
prevent the possibility of whipping action dam-  
age to the fenders or underbody. If possible,  
avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire  
chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed.  
Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or  
vehicle handling and performance may be ad-  
versely affected.  
TIRE CHAINS  
CAUTION  
Only certain SAE class “S” tire chains can  
be used on this vehicle. Using the wrong  
Class “S” chains on this vehicle will cause  
damage to the vehicle. If you plan to use  
tire chains/cables, you should use a tire  
chain that meets the minimum clearances  
for your vehicle.  
LDI0574  
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to  
location. Check the local laws before installing  
tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure  
they are the proper size for the tires on your  
vehicle and are installed according to the chain  
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use a tire chain that  
Tire chains must be installed only on the  
front wheels and not on the rear wheels.  
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE  
ONLY spare tire.  
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with  
tire chains in such conditions can cause damage  
to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to  
some overstress.  
A
is designed to provide the specified space  
᭺
1
between the installed tire chain  
and where the  
᭺
2
tire meets the rim  
as shown on the chart.  
᭺
Wheel size  
16 in  
Minimum space required  
.7 in (17 mm)  
17 in  
.2 in (4 mm)  
18 in  
.2 in (4 mm)  
8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Wheel nut tightening torque:  
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)  
The wheel nuts must be kept tight-  
ened to specifications at all times. It  
is recommended that wheel nuts be  
tightened to specification at each  
tire rotation interval.  
WARNING  
● After rotating the tires, check and  
adjust the tire pressure.  
● Retighten the wheel nuts when  
the vehicle has been driven for  
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in  
cases of a flat tire, etc.).  
WDI0258  
WDI0259  
1. Wear indicator  
2. Location mark  
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES  
Tire rotation  
Tire wear and damage  
● Do not include the spare tire in  
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires  
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).  
the tire rotation.  
WARNING  
● For additional information re-  
garding tires, refer to “Important  
Tire Safety Information” (US) or  
● Tires should be periodically in-  
spected for wear, cracking, bulg-  
ing or objects caught in the tread.  
If excessive wear, cracks, bulging  
or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)  
should be replaced.  
See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-  
gency” section of this manual for tire re-  
placing procedures.  
“Tire  
Safety  
Information”  
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-  
mation Booklet.  
As soon as possible, tighten the  
wheel nuts to the specified torque  
with a torque wrench.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Replacing wheels and tires  
● If the wheels are changed for any rea-  
son, always replace with wheels which  
have the same off-set dimension.  
Wheels of a different off-set could  
cause premature tire wear, degrade ve-  
hicle handling characteristics, affect  
the VDC system (if so equipped) and/or  
● The original tires have built-in  
tread wear indicators. When the  
wear indicators are visible, the  
tire(s) should be replaced.  
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread  
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity  
as originally equipped. Recommended types and  
sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the  
“Technical and consumer information” section of  
this manual.  
● Tires degrade with age and use.  
Have tires, including the spare,  
over 6 years old checked by a  
qualified technician because  
some tire damage may not be ob-  
vious. Replace the tires as neces-  
sary to prevent tire failure and  
possible personal injury.  
interference  
with  
the  
brake  
discs/drums. Such interference can  
lead to decreased braking efficiency  
and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Re-  
fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Techni-  
cal and consumer information” section  
of this manual for wheel off-set  
dimensions.  
WARNING  
● The use of tires other than those recom-  
mended or the mixed use of tires of  
different brands, construction (bias,  
bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns  
can adversely affect the ride, braking,  
handling, VDC system (if so equipped),  
ground clearance, body-to-tire clear-  
ance, tire chain clearance, speedom-  
eter calibration, headlight aim and  
bumper height. Some of these effects  
may lead to accidents and could result  
in serious personal injury.  
● Improper service of the spare tire  
may result in serious personal in-  
jury. If it is necessary to repair the  
spare tire, contact a NISSAN  
dealer.  
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel  
is replaced, the TPMS (if so equipped)  
will not function and the low tire pres-  
sure warning light will flash for approxi-  
mately 1 minute. The light will remain  
on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN  
dealer as soon as possible for tire re-  
placement and/or system resetting.  
● For additional information re-  
garding tires, refer to “Important  
Tire Safety Information” (US) or  
● If your vehicle was originally equipped  
with 4 tires that were the same size and  
you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires ,  
install the new tires on the rear axle.  
Placing new tires on the front axle may  
cause loss of vehicle control in some  
driving conditions and cause an acci-  
dent and personal injury.  
“Tire  
Safety  
Information”  
● Replacing tires with those not originally  
specified by NISSAN could affect the  
proper operation of the TPMS (if so  
equipped).  
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-  
mation Booklet.  
8-44 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Care of wheels  
● Do not install a damaged or deformed  
wheel or tire even if it has been re-  
paired. Such wheels or tires could have  
structural damage and could fail with-  
out warning.  
WARNING  
●
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle  
to maintain their appearance.  
● The spare tire should be used for emer-  
gency use only. It should be replaced  
with the standard tire at the first oppor-  
tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-  
tial damage.  
●
Clean the inner side of the wheels when the  
wheel is changed or the underside of the  
vehicle is washed.  
● The use of retread tires is not  
recommended.  
● Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY  
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid  
sharp turns and abrupt braking while  
driving.  
●
●
Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing  
the wheels.  
● For additional information regarding  
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-  
formation”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-  
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-  
tion Booklet.  
Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or  
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of  
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.  
● Periodically check spare tire inflation  
pressure. Always keep the pressure of  
the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire  
at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).  
Wheel balance  
●
NISSAN recommends waxing the road  
wheels to protect against road salt in areas  
where it is used during winter.  
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling  
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get  
out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-  
anced as required.  
● With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare  
tire installed do not drive the vehicle at  
speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).  
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY  
spare tire)  
● When driving on roads covered with  
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE  
ONLY spare tire should be used on the  
rear wheels and the original tire used  
on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use  
tire chains only on the front (original)  
tires.  
Wheel balance service should be per-  
formed with the wheels off the vehicle.  
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle  
could lead to mechanical damage.  
Observe the following precautions if the TEM-  
PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.  
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or  
involved in an accident:  
●
For additional information regarding  
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety  
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-  
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-  
formation Booklet.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
● Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE  
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate  
than the standard tire. Replace the  
spare tire as soon as the tread wear  
indicators appear.  
● Do not use the spare tire on other  
vehicles.  
● Do not use more than one spare tire at  
the same time.  
● Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-  
RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.  
CAUTION  
● Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-  
RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains  
will not fit properly and may cause dam-  
age to the vehicle.  
● Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY  
spare tire is smaller than the original  
tire, ground clearance is reduced. To  
avoid damage to the vehicle, do not  
drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive  
the vehicle through an automatic car  
wash since it may get caught.  
8-46 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9 Technical and consumer information  
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-5  
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil  
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6  
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7  
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7  
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8  
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8  
When traveling or registering your vehicle in  
another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
Vehicle identification number (chassis  
Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12  
Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12  
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13  
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13  
Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13  
Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15  
Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16  
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16  
Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16  
Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19  
Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19  
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23  
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24  
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25  
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25  
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . .9-26  
Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27  
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . .9-27  
In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28  
number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10  
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11  
Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED  
FUEL/LUBRICANTS  
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure  
described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.  
Capacity (Approximate)  
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants  
US measure  
20 gal  
Imp measure  
16-5/8 gal  
Liter  
75.6  
Fuel  
See “Fuel recommendation” later in this section.  
Engine oil *7  
Drain and Refill  
With oil filter change  
QR25DE  
VQ35DE  
QR25DE  
VQ35DE  
4-7/8 qt  
5-1/8 qt  
4-1/2 qt  
4-3/4 qt  
4 qt  
4.6  
4.8  
4.3  
4.5  
4-1/4 qt  
3-3/4 qt  
4 qt  
• Engine oil with API Certification Mark *1, *2  
• Viscosity SAE 5W-30 *1, *2  
Without oil filter  
change  
Cooling system  
With reservoir  
QR25DE  
VQ35DE  
2 gal  
2-3/8 gal  
—
1-3/4 gal  
2 gal  
7.7  
9.0  
50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent  
50% Demineralized or distilled water  
Manual transmission gear oil  
—
—
Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 or  
API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid  
Power steering fluid (PSF)  
Brake and clutch fluid  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 *3  
Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*4  
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *5 or equivalent DOT 3  
NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)  
HFC-134a (R-134a) *6  
NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *6  
Multi-purpose grease  
Air conditioning system refrigerant  
Air conditioning system oil  
Windshield-washer fluid  
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze  
fluid or equivalent  
*1: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations.”  
*2: NISSAN recommends for the VQ35DE engine, Genuine NISSAN Ester Engine Oil available at your NISSAN dealer.  
*3: Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by  
the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.  
*4: DEXRON™ VI type ATF may also be used.  
*5: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.  
*6: For further details, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations.”  
*7: For further details, see “Engine Oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.  
9-2 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
If an oxygenate-blend other than  
methanol blend is used, it should con-  
tain no more than 10% oxygenate.  
(MTBE may, however, be added up to  
15%.)  
FUEL RECOMMENDATION  
Reformulated gasoline  
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane  
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-  
ber (Research octane number 91).  
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-  
lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially  
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN  
supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-  
gests that you use reformulated gasoline when  
available.  
If a methanol blend is used, it should  
contain no more than 5% methanol  
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It  
should also contain a suitable amount  
of appropriate cosolvents and corro-  
sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-  
lated with appropriate cosolvents and  
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol  
blends may cause fuel system damage  
and/or vehicle performance problems.  
At this time, sufficient data is not avail-  
able to ensure that all methanol blends  
are suitable for use in NISSAN ve-  
hicles.  
CAUTION  
● Using a fuel other than that specified  
could adversely affect the emission  
control system, and may also affect the  
warranty coverage.  
Gasoline containing oxygenates  
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-  
genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol  
with or without advertising their presence.  
NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of  
which the oxygenate content and the fuel com-  
patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-  
termined. If in doubt, ask your service station  
manager.  
● Under no circumstances should  
leaded gasoline be used, because this  
will damage the three-way catalyst.  
a
● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.  
Your vehicle is not designed to run on  
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage  
the fuel system components and is not  
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-  
ited warranty.  
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take  
the following precautions as the usage of such  
fuels may cause vehicle performance problems  
and/or fuel system damage.  
If any driveability problems such as engine stall-  
ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after  
using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately  
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a  
low blend of MTBE.  
Gasoline specifications  
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets  
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-  
cations where it is available. Many of the automo-  
bile manufacturers developed this specification  
to improve emission control system and vehicle  
performance. Ask your service station manager if  
the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.  
●
The fuel should be unleaded and have  
an octane rating no lower than that  
recommended for unleaded gasoline.  
Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-  
eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can  
cause paint damage.  
Technical and consumer information 9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the  
condition. Failure to correct the condition  
is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN  
is not responsible.  
E–85 fuel  
● U.S. government regulations require  
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-  
fied by a small, square, orange and  
black label with the common abbrevia-  
tion or the appropriate percentage for  
that region.  
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel  
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can  
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do  
not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government  
regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing  
pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange  
and black label with the common abbreviation or  
the appropriate percentage for that region.  
Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark  
knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may  
cause excessive fuel consumption or engine  
damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-  
countered, have your vehicle checked at a  
NISSAN dealer.  
Aftermarket fuel additives  
However, now and then you may notice  
light spark knock for a short time while  
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a  
cause for concern, because you get the  
greatest fuel benefit when there is light  
spark knock for a short time under heavy  
engine load.  
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any  
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-  
tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit  
removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.  
Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish  
or deposit removal may contain active solvents or  
similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel  
system and engine.  
CAUTION  
Octane rating tips  
● Your vehicle is not designed to run on  
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehicle  
not specifically designed for E-85 fuel  
can damage fuel system components  
and is not covered by the NISSAN new  
vehicle limited warranty.  
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane  
rating lower than recommended can cause  
persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark  
knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-  
vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you  
detect a persistent heavy spark knock even  
when using gasoline of the stated octane  
rating, or if you hear steady spark knock  
while holding a steady speed on level  
● E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%  
fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded  
gasoline.  
9-4 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Oil viscosity  
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes  
with temperature. Because of this, it is important  
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the  
temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-  
ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil  
viscosity other than that recommended could  
cause serious engine damage.  
Selecting the correct oil filter  
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a  
high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-  
placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its  
equivalent for the reason described in “Change  
intervals.”  
WTI0183  
Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-  
cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-  
tion mark on the front of the container. Oils which  
do not have the specified quality label should not  
be used as they could cause engine damage.  
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER  
RECOMMENDATIONS  
Change intervals  
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your  
engine are based on the use of the specified  
quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters  
that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding  
recommended oil and filter change intervals  
could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine  
caused by improper maintenance or use of incor-  
rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not  
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-  
ranty.  
Selecting the correct oil  
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality  
and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory Oil additives  
engine life and performance. See “Capacities  
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil  
and recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in this  
section. NISSAN recommends the use of an  
energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel  
economy.  
additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-  
sary when the proper oil type is used and main-  
tenance intervals are followed.  
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been  
previously used should not be used.  
Select only engine oils that meet the American  
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-  
tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval  
Technical and consumer information 9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine  
oil when it was built. You do not have to change  
the oil before the first recommended change  
interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend  
upon how you use your vehicle.  
CAUTION  
The use of any other refrigerant or oil will  
cause severe damage to the air condition-  
ing system and will require the replace-  
ment of all air conditioner system  
components.  
Operation under the following conditions may  
require more frequent oil and filter changes:  
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your  
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone  
layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the  
earth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-  
tions require the recovery and recycling of any  
refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-  
tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained  
technicians and equipment needed to recover  
and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-  
ant.  
●
repeated short distance driving at cold out-  
side temperatures  
●
●
●
●
driving in dusty conditions  
extensive idling  
towing a trailer  
stop and go commuting  
Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance  
Guide” for the maintenance schedule.  
Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air  
conditioner system.  
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM  
REFRIGERANT AND OIL  
RECOMMENDATIONS  
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN  
vehicle must be charged with the refriger-  
ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/C  
system oil Type S or the exact equivalents.  
9-6 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SPECIFICATIONS  
ENGINE  
Model  
QR25DE  
VQ35DE  
Type  
Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC  
4-cylinder in-line  
Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC  
6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°  
3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)  
213.45 (3,498)  
Cylinder arrangement  
Bore x Stroke  
Displacement  
Firing order  
in (mm) 3.5 x 3.9 (89.0 x 100.0)  
cu in (cm3) 151.82 (2,488)  
1–3–4–2  
1–2–3–4–5–6  
Idle speed  
M/T  
CVT (in “N” position)  
No adjustment is necessary.  
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle  
speed)  
CO % at idle  
Spark plug  
DILKAR6A-11  
in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)  
Timing chain  
FXE22HR-11  
0.043 (1.1)  
Spark plug gap (Nominal)  
Camshaft operation  
Timing chain  
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.  
Technical and consumer information 9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHEELS AND TIRES  
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS  
Coupe  
Sedan  
Overall length  
Overall width  
Overall height  
Front track  
Rear track  
Wheelbase  
in (mm)  
in (mm)  
in (mm)  
in (mm)  
in (mm)  
in (mm)  
180.9 (4,595)  
70.7 (1,795)  
55.9 (1,421)  
61.0 (1,550)  
61.2 (1,554)  
105.3 (2,675)  
190.7 (4,844)  
70.7 (1,795)  
58.0 (1,473)  
61.0 (1,550)  
61.0 (1,551)  
109.3 (2,775)  
Wheel type  
Aluminum/Steel  
Aluminum  
Size  
Offset in (mm)  
1.77 (45)  
16 x 7JJ  
17 x 7 1/2JJ  
18 x 8.0JJ  
16 x 4T  
1.77 (45)  
Aluminum  
1.77 (45)  
Gross vehicle weight  
rating  
Gross axle weight rating  
Front  
Rear  
lb (kg)  
T type (Spare)  
1.57 (40)  
See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-  
bel” on the center pillar between the driver’s side  
front and rear doors.  
Tire size  
P215/60R16  
P215/55R17  
P235/45R18  
T135/90R16  
lb (kg)  
lb (kg)  
Spare tire  
9-8 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING  
YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER  
COUNTRY  
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION  
When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-  
hicle in another country, you should first find  
out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-  
cle’s engine.  
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low  
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles  
must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-  
fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where  
appropriate fuel is not available.  
When transferring the registration of your  
vehicle to another country, state, province  
or district, it may be necessary to modify the  
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.  
LTI0025  
WTI0037  
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-  
sion control and safety standards vary according  
to the country, state, province or district; there-  
fore, vehicle specifications may differ.  
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER  
(VIN) PLATE  
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER  
(chassis number)  
The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is  
attached as shown. This number is the identifica-  
tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle  
registration.  
The vehicle identification number is located as  
shown.  
When any vehicle is to be taken into an-  
other country, state, province or district  
and registered, its modifications, transpor-  
tation, and registration are the responsibil-  
ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible  
for any inconvenience that may result.  
Technical and consumer information 9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WTI0096  
WTI0049  
LTI0197  
QR25DE  
VQ35DE  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.  
CERTIFICATION LABEL  
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER  
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.  
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-  
bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-  
able vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle  
Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight  
Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review  
it carefully.  
9-10 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LTI0224  
LTI0225  
WTI0189  
Sedan  
Coupe  
EMISSION CONTROL  
INFORMATION LABEL  
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION  
LABEL  
The emission control information label is at-  
tached to the underside of the hood as shown.  
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and  
Loading Information label. The label is located as  
shown.  
Technical and consumer information 9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE  
Use the following steps to mount the front license  
plate:  
1
Make a shallow hole in each plastic finisher  
᭺
at the location mark (small dimple) using a  
0.39 in (10 mm) drill. To avoid damaging the  
threads behind the finisher, apply only light  
pressure to the drill.  
2
Mount the license plate bracket using two 10  
mm slotted Phillip head screws.  
᭺
WTI0178  
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION  
LABEL  
The air conditioner specification label is affixed to  
the underside of the hood as shown.  
WTI0179  
9-12 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION  
WARNING  
● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb  
weight plus the combined weight of  
passengers and cargo.  
● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,  
Total load capacity - maximum total  
weight limit specified of the load  
(passengers and cargo) for the ve-  
hicle. This is the maximum combined  
weight of occupants and cargo that  
can be loaded into the vehicle. If the  
vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the  
trailer tongue weight must be in-  
cluded as part of the cargo load. This  
information is located on the Tire and  
Loading Information label (if so  
equipped).  
● It is extremely dangerous to ride  
in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In  
a collision, people riding in these  
areas are more likely to be seri-  
ously injured or killed.  
● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-  
ing)  
-
maximum total combined  
weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-  
sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer  
tongue load and any other optional  
equipment. This information is lo-  
cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.  
certification label.  
● Do not allow people to ride in any  
area of your vehicle that is not  
equipped with seats and seat  
belts.  
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle  
is in a seat and using a seat belt  
properly.  
● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -  
maximum weight (load) limit specified  
for the front or rear axle. This informa-  
● Cargo capacity - permissible weight  
of cargo, the subtracted weight of  
occupants from the load limit.  
TERMS  
tion  
is  
located  
on  
the  
It is important to familiarize yourself with  
the following terms before loading your  
vehicle:  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification  
label.  
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY  
● GCWR (Gross Combined Weight  
rating) - The maximum total weight  
rating of the vehicle, passengers,  
cargo, and trailer.  
Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-  
hicle shown as “The combined weight of  
occupants and cargo” on the Tire and  
Loading Information label. Do not exceed  
the number of occupants shown as  
“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-  
ing Information label.  
● Curb Weight (actual weight of your  
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:  
standard and optional equipment, flu-  
ids, emergency tools, and spare tire  
assembly. This weight does not in-  
clude passengers and cargo.  
Technical and consumer information 9-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To get “the combined weight of occu-  
pants and cargo”, add the weight of all  
occupants, then add the total luggage  
weight. Examples are shown in the follow-  
ing illustration.  
LTI0152  
Example  
9-14 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Determine the combined weight of  
luggage and cargo being loaded on  
the vehicle. That weight may not  
safely exceed the available cargo and  
luggage load capacity calculated in  
Step 4.  
Steps for determining correct load  
limit  
LOADING TIPS  
● The GVW must not exceed GVWR  
or GAWR as specified on the  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification  
label.  
1. Locate the statement “The combined  
weight of occupants and cargo  
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX  
lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.  
● Do not load the front and rear axle to  
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the  
GVWR.  
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,  
load from your trailer will be trans-  
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this  
manual to determine how this re-  
duces the available cargo and lug-  
gage load capacity of your vehicle.  
2. Determine the combined weight of  
the driver and passengers that will be  
riding in your vehicle.  
WARNING  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the  
driver and passengers from XXX kg  
or XXX lbs.  
● Properly secure all cargo with  
ropes or straps to help prevent it  
from sliding or shifting. Do not  
place cargo higher than the seat-  
backs. In a sudden stop or colli-  
sion, unsecured cargo could  
cause personal injury.  
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm  
4. The resulting figure equals the avail- that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle  
able amount of cargo and luggage Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle  
load capacity. For example, if the Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.  
XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and See “Measurement of Weights” later in  
there will be five 150 lb. passengers this section.  
● Do not load your vehicle any  
heavier than the GVWR or the  
maximum front and rear GAWRs.  
If you do, parts of your vehicle  
can break, tire damage could oc-  
cur, or it can change the way your  
vehicle handles. This could result  
in loss of control and cause per-  
sonal injury.  
in your vehicle, the amount of avail-  
Also check tires for proper inflation pres-  
able cargo and luggage load capac-  
sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-  
ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)  
tion label.  
= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =  
300 kg.)  
Technical and consumer information 9-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TOWING A TRAILER  
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS  
Maximum trailer loads  
WARNING  
● Overloading not only can shorten  
the life of your vehicle and the  
tire, but can also cause unsafe  
vehicle handling and longer brak-  
ing distances. This may cause a  
premature tire failure which  
could result in a serious accident  
and personal injury. Failures  
caused by overloading are not  
Overloading or improper loading of a  
trailer and its cargo can adversely affect  
vehicle handling, braking and perfor-  
mance and may lead to accidents.  
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the  
value  
specified  
in  
the  
“Towing  
Load/Specification” chart found later in this sec-  
tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weight  
plus its cargo weight.  
CAUTION  
●
When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs.  
(454 kg) or more, trailers with a brake  
system must be used.  
● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load  
for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your  
engine, axle or other parts could be  
damaged.  
covered  
by  
the  
vehicle’s  
warranty.  
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS  
● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you  
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph  
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full  
throttle. This helps the engine and other  
parts of your vehicle wear in at the  
heavier loads.  
Secure loose items to prevent weight  
shifts that could affect the balance of your  
vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive  
to a scale and weigh the front and the rear  
wheels separately to determine axle  
loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-  
ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-  
ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads  
should not exceed the gross vehicle  
weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are  
given on the vehicle certification label. If  
weight ratings are exceeded, move or re-  
move items to bring all weights below the  
ratings.  
Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-  
marily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember  
that towing a trailer places additional loads on  
your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-  
ing and other systems.  
A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available  
on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This  
guide includes information on trailer towing ca-  
pability and the special equipment required for  
proper towing.  
9-16 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Temperature conditions can also affect towing.  
For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside  
temperatures on graded roads can affect engine  
performance and cause overheating. The engine  
protection mode, which helps reduce the chance  
of engine damage, could activate and automati-  
cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may  
decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully  
to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather  
and road conditions.  
WARNING  
Overheating can result in reduced engine  
power and vehicle speed. The reduced  
speed may be lower than other traffic,  
which could increase the chance of a col-  
lision. Be especially careful when driving.  
If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-  
ing speed, pull to the side of the road in a  
safe area. Allow the engine to cool and  
return to normal operation. See “If your  
vehicle overheats”in the “In case of emer-  
gency” section of this manual.  
LTI0164  
WTI0160  
The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)  
equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle  
(including passengers and cargo) plus the total  
trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or  
using improper towing equipment could ad-  
versely affect vehicle handling, braking and per-  
formance.  
Tongue load  
Keep the tongue load between 10 - 15 percent of  
the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load  
specified by the trailer manufacturer. The tongue  
load must be within the maximum tongue load  
limits shown in the following “Towing  
Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue load be-  
comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for  
proper tongue load.  
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not  
only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also  
the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-  
priate for level highway driving may have to be  
reduced for low traction situations (for example,  
on slippery boat ramps).  
CAUTION  
Vehicle damage resulting from improper  
towing procedures is not covered by  
NISSAN warranties.  
Technical and consumer information 9-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Towing capacities are calculated assuming a  
base vehicle with driver and any options required  
to achieve the rating. Additional passengers,  
cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the  
trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and  
reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity  
and trailer tongue load.  
To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh  
your trailer on a scale with all equipment and  
cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is  
towed. Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is not  
more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown  
on the trailer and is not more than the calculated  
available maximum towing capacity.  
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to  
confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front  
GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight  
Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.  
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to  
make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear  
Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front  
Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight  
on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.  
The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to  
be moved or removed to meet the specified rat-  
ings.  
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured  
using platform type scales commonly found at  
truck stops, highway weigh stations, building  
supply centers or salvage yards.  
TI1012M  
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight  
(GVW)/Maximum Gross Axle Weight  
(GAW)  
To determine the available payload capacity for  
tongue load, use the following procedure.  
Example:  
●
●
●
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed  
on a scale - including passengers, cargo and  
hitch - 4,103 lb. (1861 kg).  
1. Locate  
the  
GVWR  
on  
the  
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed  
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)  
shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification  
label. The GVW equals the combined weight of  
the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,  
hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional  
equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must  
not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating  
(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.  
certification label.  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.  
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of  
the passengers and cargo that are normally  
in the vehicle when towing a trailer.  
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -  
4,203 lb. (1906 kg).  
3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the  
GVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-  
able maximum tongue load.  
Maximum Towing Load from “Towing  
Load/SpecificationЉ chart - 1,000 lb. (454  
kg).  
9-18 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Always verify that available capacities are within  
the required ratings.  
4,203 lb. (1906 kg)  
GVWR  
GVW  
WARNING  
– 4,103 lb. (1861 kg)  
Trailer hitch components have specific  
weight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-  
pable of towing a trailer heavier than the  
weight rating of the hitch components.  
Never exceed the weight rating of the  
hitch components. Doing so can cause  
serious personal injury or property  
damage.  
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION  
= 100 lb. (45 kg)  
Available for tongue  
weight  
TOWING LOAD / SPECIFICATION  
UNIT: lb (kg)  
1,000 lb. (454 kg) Capacity available for  
towing  
MAXIMUM TOWING  
1,000 (454)  
LOAD  
MAXIMUM TONGUE  
100 (45)  
LOAD  
100 lb. (45 kg) Available tongue weight  
Hitch ball  
/ 1,000 lb. (454 kg)  
=
Available capacity  
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight  
rating for your trailer:  
TOWING SAFETY  
Trailer hitch  
10 % tongue weight  
●
The required hitch ball size is stamped on  
most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also  
have the size printed on the top of the ball.  
The available towing capacity may be less than  
the maximum towing capacity due to the passen-  
ger and cargo load in the vehicle.  
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.  
Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to  
the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or prop-  
erty damage due to sway caused by crosswinds,  
rough road surfaces or passing trucks.  
●
●
Choose the proper class hitch ball based on  
the trailer weight.  
Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-  
tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the  
trailer tongue load specification recommended  
by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load  
becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to ob-  
tain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the  
maximum tongue weight specification shown in  
the “Towing load/specification” chart even if the  
calculated available tongue weight is greater  
than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less  
than 10% , reduce the total trailer weight to  
match the available tongue weight.  
The diameter of the threaded shank of the  
hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount  
hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should  
be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole  
in the ball mount.  
Technical and consumer information 9-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tire pressures  
●
The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be  
long enough to be properly secured to the  
ball mount. There should be at least 2  
threads showing beyond the lock washer  
and nut.  
You may add Class I trailer hitch equipment that  
has a 2,000 lb (909 kg) maximum weight rating to  
the vehicle, but your vehicle is only capable of  
towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the  
Towing Load/Specification chart earlier in this  
section.  
● When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-  
hicle tires to the recommended cold  
tire pressure indicated on the Tire  
and Loading Information label.  
Ball mount  
● Trailer tire condition, size, load rating  
and proper inflation pressure should  
be in accordance with the trailer and  
tire manufacturer’s specifications.  
CAUTION  
The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and  
the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.  
Choose a proper class ball mount based on the  
trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should  
be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the  
ground.  
● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.  
● The hitch should not be attached to or  
affect the operation of the impact-  
absorbing bumper.  
Safety chains  
● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-  
tem, brake system, etc. to install a  
trailer hitch.  
Always use suitable safety chains between your  
vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should  
be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,  
not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave  
enough slack in the chains to permit turning  
corners.  
Sway control device  
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting  
caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han-  
dling. Sway control devices may be used to help  
control these affects. If you choose to use one,  
contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make  
sure the sway control device will work with the  
vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake sys-  
tem. Follow the instructions provided by the  
manufacturer for installing and using the sway  
control device.  
● To reduce the possibility of additional  
damage if your vehicle is struck from  
the rear, where practical, remove the  
receiver when not in use.  
● After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt  
holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water  
or dust from entering the passenger  
compartment.  
● Regularly check that all trailer hitch  
mounting bolts are securely mounted.  
Class I hitch  
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball  
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers  
of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).  
9-20 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
●
Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to  
all federal, state or local regulations. If not,  
install any mirrors required for towing before  
driving the vehicle.  
Trailer lights  
WARNING  
Never connect a trailer brake system di-  
rectly to the vehicle brake system.  
CAUTION  
When splicing into the vehicle electrical  
system, a commercially available power-  
type module/converter must be used to  
provide power for all trailer lighting. This  
unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct  
power source for all trailer lights while  
using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and  
turn signal circuits as a signal source. The  
module/converter must draw no more  
that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail  
lamp circuits. Using a module/converter  
that exceeds these power requirements  
may damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-  
tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-  
tain the proper equipment and to have it  
installed.  
Determine the overall height of the vehicle  
and trailer so the required clearance is  
known.  
Pre-towing tips  
●
Be certain your vehicle maintains a level  
position when a loaded and/or unloaded  
trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it  
has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down  
condition; check for improper tongue load,  
overload, worn suspension or other possible  
causes of either condition.  
Trailer towing tips  
In order to gain skill and an understanding of the  
vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,  
stopping and backing up in an area which is free  
from traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-  
mance will be somewhat different than under  
normal driving conditions.  
●
●
Always secure items in the trailer to prevent  
load shift while driving.  
Keep the cargo load as low as possible in  
the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity  
low.  
●
Always secure items in the trailer to prevent  
load shift while driving.  
●
Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or  
lock to prevent the coupler from inadvert-  
ently becoming unlatched.  
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or  
local regulations. For assistance in hooking up  
trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-  
table trailer dealer.  
●
●
Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the  
trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in  
the back half. Also make sure the load is  
balanced side to side.  
●
●
●
Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.  
Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.  
Trailer brakes  
Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-  
hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and  
trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a  
trailer to the vehicle.  
Always drive your vehicle at a moderate  
speed.  
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,  
make sure it conforms to federal and/or local  
regulations and that it is properly installed.  
Technical and consumer information 9-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
When backing up, hold the bottom of the  
steering wheel with one hand. Move your  
hand in the direction in which you want the  
trailer to go. Make small corrections and  
back up slowly. If possible, have someone  
guide you when you are backing up.  
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.  
3. Shift the transmission into gear.  
4. Release the parking brake.  
●
●
For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do  
tow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).  
Have your vehicle serviced more often than  
at intervals specified in the recommended  
Maintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-  
vice and Maintenance Guide”.  
5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are  
clear from the blocks.  
Always block the wheels on both vehicle and  
trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not  
recommended; however, if you must do so:  
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.  
●
●
When making a turn, your trailer wheels will  
be closer to the inside of the turn than your  
vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,  
make a larger than normal turning radius  
during the turn.  
7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.  
●
While going downhill, the weight of the  
trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may dete-  
riorate overall handling characteristics.  
Therefore, to maintain adequate control, re-  
duce your speed and shift to a lower gear.  
Avoid long or repeated use of the brakes  
when descending a hill, as this reduces their  
effectiveness and could cause overheating.  
Shifting to a lower gear instead provides  
“engine braking” and reduces the need to  
brake as frequently.  
CAUTION  
If you move the shift selector to the P  
(Park) position before blocking the  
wheels and applying the parking brake,  
transmission damage could occur.  
Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely  
affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-  
ing vehicle sway. When being passed by  
larger vehicles, be prepared for possible  
changes in crosswinds that could affect ve-  
hicle handling.  
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.  
2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill  
side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.  
Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:  
3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly  
release the brake pedal until the blocks ab-  
sorb the vehicle load.  
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to  
allow the vehicle to coast and steer as  
straight ahead as the road conditions allow.  
This combination will help stabilize the ve-  
hicle  
●
If the engine coolant temperature rises to a  
high temperature, refer to “If your vehicle  
overheats” in the “In case of emergency”  
section of this owner’s manual.  
4. Apply the parking brake.  
5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).  
6. Turn off the engine.  
●
●
Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal  
circumstances.  
– Do not correct trailer sway by steering or  
applying the brakes.  
To drive away:  
Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first  
500 miles (805 km).  
1. Start the vehicle.  
9-22 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the  
brakes and pull to the side of the road in a  
safe area.  
●
Some states or provinces have specific  
regulations and speed limits for vehicles that  
are towing trailers. Obey the local speed  
limits.  
CAUTION  
● Failure to follow these guidelines can  
result in severe transmission damage.  
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-  
anced as described earlier in this section.  
● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-  
ways tow forward, never backward.  
●
●
●
Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-  
nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50  
miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.  
●
Be careful when passing other vehicles.  
Passing while towing a trailer requires con-  
siderably more distance than normal pass-  
ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must  
also pass the other vehicle before you can  
safely change lanes.  
● DO NOT tow any continuously variable  
transmission vehicle with all four  
wheels on the ground (flat towing). Do-  
ing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmis-  
sion parts due to lack of transmission  
lubrication.  
When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-  
ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or  
rear bumper.  
Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights  
before backing the trailer into the water or  
the trailer lights may burn out.  
●
●
Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans-  
mission to a lower gear for engine braking  
when driving down steep or long hills. This  
will help slow the vehicle without applying  
the brakes.  
● For emergency towing procedures refer  
to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”  
in the “In case of emergency”section of  
this manual.  
When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil  
should be replaced and transmission  
oil/fluid should be changed more fre-  
quently. For additional information, see the  
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section  
earlier in this manual.  
Continuously Variable Transmission  
Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long  
or too frequently. This could cause the  
brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced  
braking efficiency.  
To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously  
variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle  
dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s  
drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufac-  
turer’s recommendations when using their prod-  
uct.  
FLAT TOWING  
●
●
Increase your following distance to allow for  
greater stopping distances while towing a  
trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.  
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the  
ground is sometimes called flat towing. This  
method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle  
behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor  
home.  
NISSAN recommends that the cruise con-  
trol not be used while towing a trailer.  
Technical and consumer information 9-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING  
DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality  
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to  
federal safety requirements in addition to these  
grades.  
Manual Transmission  
WARNING  
●
Always tow with the manual transmission in  
Neutral.  
The traction grade assigned to this tire is  
based on straight-ahead braking traction  
tests, and does not include acceleration,  
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction  
characteristics.  
●
After towing 500 miles (805 km), start and  
idle the engine with the transmission in Neu-  
tral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine  
after every 500 miles (805 km) of towing  
may cause damage to internal transmission  
parts.  
Quality grades can be found where applicable on  
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and  
maximum section width. For example:  
Temperature A, B and C  
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A  
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,  
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the  
generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat  
when tested under controlled conditions on a  
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained  
high temperature can cause the material of the  
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-  
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.  
The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-  
mance which all passenger car tires must meet  
under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.  
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of  
performance on the laboratory test wheel than  
the minimum required by law.  
Treadwear  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating  
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested  
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-  
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded  
150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times  
as well on the government course as a tire graded  
100. The relative performance of tires depends  
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,  
and may depart significantly from the norm due to  
variations in driving habits, service practices and  
differences in road characteristics and climate.  
Traction AA, A, B and C  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are  
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the  
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-  
sured under controlled conditions on specified  
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-  
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction  
performance.  
9-24 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM  
WARRANTY  
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US  
only)  
Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following  
emission warranties:  
If you believe that your vehicle has a de-  
fect which could cause a crash or could  
cause injury or death, you should immedi-  
ately inform the National Highway Traffic  
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-  
tion to notifying NISSAN.  
WARNING  
The temperature grade for this tire is es-  
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated  
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,  
under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-  
ther separately or in combination, can  
cause heat build-up and possible tire  
failure.  
For USA  
1. Emission Defects Warranty  
2. Emissions Performance Warranty  
Details of this warranty may be found with other  
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information  
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.  
If you did not receive a Warranty Information  
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-  
ment by writing to:  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it  
may open an investigation, and if it finds  
that a safety defect exists in a group of  
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy  
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-  
come involved in individual problems be-  
tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.  
●
Nissan North America, Inc.  
Consumer Affairs Department  
P.O. Box 685003  
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-  
hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-  
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go  
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:  
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh  
Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.  
You can also obtain other information  
about motor vehicle safety from  
http://www.safercar.gov.  
Franklin, TN 37068-5003  
For Canada  
Emission Control System Warranty  
Details of this warranty may be found with other  
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information  
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.  
If you did not receive a Warranty Information  
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-  
ment by writing to:  
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our  
Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at  
1-800-NISSAN-1.  
●
Nissan Canada Inc.  
5290 Orbitor Drive  
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5  
Technical and consumer information 9-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/  
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST  
Due to legal requirements in some states and  
Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-  
quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-  
tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of  
the emission control system.  
9. Turn the engine off.  
WARNING  
10. Repeat steps 1 - 8 at least one more time.  
Always drive the vehicle in a safe and  
prudent manner according to traffic con-  
ditions and obey all traffic laws.  
If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat the  
preceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept-  
able between steps. Do not stop the engine until  
step 7 is completed.  
1. Start the engine when the engine coolant  
temperature gauge needle points to C. Al-  
low the engine to idle until the gauge needle  
points between the C and H (normal oper-  
ating temperature).  
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it  
is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,  
the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary  
usage of the vehicle.  
If a powertrain system component is repaired or  
the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be  
reset to a “not ready”condition. Before taking the  
2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88  
km/h), then quickly release the accelerator  
pedal completely and keep it released for at  
least 10 seconds.  
I/M  
test,  
check  
the  
vehicle’s  
inspection/maintenance test readiness condi-  
tion. Place the ignition switch in the ON position  
without starting the engine. If the Malfunction  
Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20  
seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M  
test condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not  
blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is  
“ready”. If the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a “not  
ready” condition, drive the vehicle through the  
following pattern to set the vehicle to the ready  
condition. If you cannot or do not want to perform  
the driving pattern, a NISSAN dealer can con-  
duct it for you.  
3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a  
moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of  
53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 9  
minutes.  
4. Stop the vehicle.  
5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)  
and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.  
6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times.  
7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)  
and maintain the speed for at least 3 min-  
utes.  
8. Stop the vehicle. Place the shift selector in  
the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.  
9-26 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)  
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE  
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION  
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-  
corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to  
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-  
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a  
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-  
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR  
is designed to record data related to vehicle  
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of  
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this  
vehicle is designed to record such data as:  
the type of personally identifying data routinely  
acquired during a crash investigation.  
A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best  
source of service and repair information for your  
vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations  
and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-  
cedures, this manual is the same one used by the  
factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN  
dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN  
Owner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service  
and Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.  
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-  
ment is required and access to the vehicle or the  
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-  
facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such  
as law enforcement, that have the special equip-  
ment, can read the information if they have ac-  
cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only  
be accessed with the consent of the vehicle  
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-  
mitted by law.  
For USA  
●
●
●
How various systems in your vehicle were  
operating;  
For current pricing and availability of genuine  
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model  
year and later contact:  
Whether or not the driver and passenger  
safety belts were buckled/fastened;  
1-800-450-9491  
www.nissan-techinfo.com  
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing  
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,  
For current pricing and availability of genuine  
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model  
year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:  
●
●
How fast the vehicle was traveling.  
Sounds are not recorded.  
1-800-247-5321  
These data can help provide a better understand-  
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and  
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by  
your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation  
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under  
normal driving conditions and no personal data  
(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are  
recorded. However, other parties, such as law  
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with  
For current pricing and availability of genuine  
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model year  
and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:  
1-800-247-5321  
Technical and consumer information 9-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For Canada  
Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN  
collision parts!  
Why should you take a chance?  
To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-  
vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contact  
your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-  
ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area  
call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-  
387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-  
tive will assist you.  
In over 40 states, the law says you must be  
advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair  
your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws  
that restrict insurance companies from authoriz-  
ing the use of non-genuine collision parts during  
the new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro-  
tect you, so you can take action to protect your-  
self.  
If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts  
made to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-  
tions – if you want to help it to last and hold its  
resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your  
insurance agent and your repair shop to  
only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.  
NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,  
nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damage  
caused by a non-genuine part.  
Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and  
Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.  
It’s your right!  
IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION  
If you should need further information visit us at:  
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or  
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers).  
Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect  
your personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-  
tection and maintain the resale value of your  
vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using  
Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-  
necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the  
end of your lease.  
Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely  
event, there is some important information you  
should know.  
Many insurance companies routinely authorize  
the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to  
cut costs, among other reasons.  
NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to  
minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the  
windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-  
genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such  
built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of-  
ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.  
9-28 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10 Index  
FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)  
Bluetoothா hands-free phone  
A
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91, 4-105  
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39  
Brake  
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44  
FM/AM/SAT radio with CD/DVD player. .4-54  
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)  
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48  
Air bag (See supplemental restraint  
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42  
Air bag system  
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-25  
Brake fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14  
Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-28  
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24  
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11  
Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-16, 8-22  
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-19  
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22  
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22  
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21  
Brightness control  
Audio System  
Front (See supplemental front impact  
iPodா Player . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72, 4-74  
Music Box hard-disk drive audio  
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-76  
air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50  
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-57, 2-14  
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19  
Air conditioner  
Audio system  
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28  
Audio System  
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55  
Audio system  
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66, 4-68  
Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30  
Automatic  
Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-43  
Transmission shift selector lock release. .5-15  
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-29  
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5  
AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47, 4-53  
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . .4-21  
Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-28  
Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-12  
Air conditioner system refrigerant and  
oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6  
Heater and air conditioner  
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32  
Brightness/contrast button. . . . . . . . . . .4-12  
Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . .2-10  
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28  
controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19, 4-26  
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-28  
Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22  
Alarm system  
(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-24  
Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28  
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-90  
Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . . . .2-11  
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-25  
Armrests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11  
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16  
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28  
Bluetoothா audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-83  
Compact disc (CD)  
C
Capacities and recommended  
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2  
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-90  
Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-13  
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-86  
CD player  
(See audio system) . . . .4-46, 4-52, 4-58, 4-64  
Child restraint with top tether strap . . . . . .1-28  
Child restraints. . . . . . .1-22, 1-23, 1-24, 1-26  
B
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15  
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11  
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9  
Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18  
Block heater  
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29  
Bluetoothா audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-83  
player . . . . . . . . . .4-46, 4-52, 4-58, 4-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precautions on child  
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-8  
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5  
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6  
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20  
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38, 2-39  
Capacities and recommended  
restraints. . . . . . . . .1-24, 1-30, 1-35, 1-39  
Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-28  
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6  
Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-16  
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . . .7-2  
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45, 4-50  
(models with navigation system) . . . . . . .4-8  
(models without navigation system) . . . .4-45  
Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8, 4-45  
Clutch  
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14  
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10  
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27  
Compact disc (CD)  
player . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46, 4-52, 4-58, 4-64  
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6  
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39  
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). . .5-11  
Continuously Variable Transmission  
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2  
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-9  
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10  
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-12  
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-8  
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-9  
Engine compartment check locations . . . .8-6  
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5  
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8  
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9  
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-5  
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-12  
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5  
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10  
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7  
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10  
Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2  
Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27  
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . .5-2  
Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37  
D
Daytime running light system (Canada only) . .2-31  
Defroster switch  
Rear window and outside mirror defroster  
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27  
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) player . . . . . . .4-63  
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8  
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-32  
Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-2  
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4  
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18  
Driving  
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27  
Driving with Continuously Variable  
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11  
Driving with manual transmission . . . . . .5-17  
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2  
(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13  
Driving with Continuously Variable  
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11  
Transmission shift selector lock release . .5-15  
Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2  
Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . .4-12  
Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2  
Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6  
Controls  
Heater and air conditioner  
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19, 4-26  
Coolant  
F
Flashers  
(See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . . . .2-33  
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2  
Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5  
Fluid  
E
Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22  
Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-11  
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-25  
Engine  
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14  
Capacities and recommended  
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2  
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14  
Continuously Variable Transmission  
(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13  
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . .5-9  
Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29  
Capacities and recommended  
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2  
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-9  
10-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8  
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9  
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13  
F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . . .9-10  
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32  
Front air bag system  
(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . .1-50  
Front seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2  
Fuel  
Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39  
Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39  
Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41  
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . .2-32  
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-8, 2-2  
Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-32  
Intelligent Key system  
Key operating range . . . . . . . . . .3-8, 3-18  
Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9  
Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3  
Remote keyless entry operation . . .3-12, 3-18  
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . .3-16, 3-22  
Warning signals. . . . . . . . . . . .3-16, 3-22  
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46  
Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24  
iPodா Player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72, 4-74  
ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26  
H
Hands-free phone system,  
Bluetoothா . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91, 4-105  
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-33  
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . .2-28  
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29  
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27  
Heated seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34  
Heater  
Capacities and recommended  
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2  
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22  
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6  
Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4  
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3  
Fuel-filler cap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25  
Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-25  
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . . . .3-25  
Fuel-filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25  
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22  
Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24  
Heater and air conditioner  
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19, 4-26  
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . .4-20, 4-27  
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver. . . . . . . .2-49  
Hood release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23  
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33  
J
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8  
K
G
I
Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-25  
Keyless entry  
With Intelligent Key system  
(See Intelligent Key system) . . . . .3-12, 3-18  
Keys, For Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . .3-2  
Garage door opener, HomeLinkா Universal  
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49  
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25  
Gauge  
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5  
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6  
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4  
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4  
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5  
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4  
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2  
Ignition Switch  
Push-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . .5-7  
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25, 3-3  
Important vehicle information label . . . . . . .9-10  
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20  
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22  
Indicator lights and audible reminders  
L
(See warning/indicator lights and audible  
Labels  
reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10  
Inside automatic anti-glare mirror. . . . . . . .3-29  
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28  
Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-12  
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10  
Emission control information label . . . . .9-11  
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10  
F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . .9-10  
Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-11  
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9  
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-56  
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)  
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26  
License plate  
Lock  
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6  
N
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4  
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . . . .3-25  
Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39  
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5  
Trunk lid lock opener lever. . . . . . . . . .3-23  
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-13, 2-23  
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . .2-12  
Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . .2-23  
Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-13  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17  
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . .2-25, 3-3  
NISSAN voice recognition system . . . . . .4-116  
O
Installing the license plate. . . . . . . . . .9-12  
Light  
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . . . . .9-4  
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4  
Oil  
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-57, 2-14  
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-28  
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . .2-10  
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28  
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11  
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47  
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32  
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-28  
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-29  
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27  
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46  
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27  
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-12  
Low windshield-washer fluid warning  
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23  
Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-51  
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48  
Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-15  
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . .2-48  
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48  
Warning/indicator lights and audible  
Capacities and recommended  
M
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2  
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10  
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-12  
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-9  
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9  
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-5  
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5  
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30  
Overheat  
Maintenance  
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2  
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3  
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5  
Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2  
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-21  
Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4  
Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15  
Manual front seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . .1-2  
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48  
Map pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36  
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3  
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-32  
Mirror  
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . . . . .3-29  
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28  
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30  
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28  
Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44  
Music Box hard-disk drive audio system . . . .4-76  
If your vehicle overheats. . . . . . . . . . .6-10  
Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-27  
Owner’s manual/service manual order  
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27  
P
Parking  
reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10  
Lights  
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . .5-19  
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-23  
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48  
Phone, Bluetoothா hands-free  
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48  
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91, 4-105  
10-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power  
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5  
Recorders  
Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27  
Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . . .9-6  
Registering your vehicle in another country . . .9-9  
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . .9-25  
Rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9  
Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15  
Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer  
system), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25, 3-3  
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22  
Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-27  
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28  
Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6  
Shift lock release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15  
Shifting  
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35  
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43  
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13  
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-24  
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42  
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43  
S
Precautions  
Safety  
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5  
Precautions on child  
restraints. . . . . . . . .1-24, 1-30, 1-35, 1-39  
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-15  
Precautions on supplemental restraint  
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6  
Child seat belts . . . . .1-24, 1-30, 1-35, 1-39  
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . .9-25  
Seat adjustment  
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2  
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-4  
Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9  
Seat belt  
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22  
Infants and small children . . . . . . . . . .1-23  
Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18  
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23  
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-15  
Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18  
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21  
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-21  
Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15  
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-20  
Three-point type with retractor . . . . . . .1-18  
Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13  
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36  
Seats  
Continuously Variable Transmission  
(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13  
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17  
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-20  
Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19  
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4  
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . . .2-48  
SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-56  
Starting  
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . .5-9  
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8  
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2  
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10  
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10  
Steering  
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13  
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-24  
Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28  
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36  
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27  
Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37  
Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37  
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44  
Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44  
Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-57, 2-14  
Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-50  
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42  
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2  
Programmable features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6  
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10  
R
Radio  
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-90  
FM-AM radio with compact disc  
(CD) player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44  
FM/AM/SAT radio with CD/DVD player . .4-54  
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc  
(CD) player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48  
Readiness for inspection maintenance  
(I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26  
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43  
Rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9  
Rear window and outside mirror defroster  
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27  
RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13  
Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2  
Front seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2  
Heated seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34  
Manual front seat adjustment. . . . . . . . .1-2  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Supplemental restraint system  
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34  
Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-43  
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41  
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . .9-24  
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34  
Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8  
USB interface  
Audio file operation . . . . . . . . . .4-67, 4-69  
Information and warning labels . . . . . . .1-56  
Precautions on supplemental restraint  
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42  
Supplemental restraint system  
(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . . . .1-42  
Switch  
Video file operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-70  
V
Tire pressure  
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28  
Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . .8-18  
Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . .9-8  
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-34  
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system. . . . .5-26  
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9  
Vehicle identification number (VIN)  
(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9  
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9  
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . .9-13  
Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14  
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24  
Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle  
Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30  
Automatic power window switch . . . . . .2-43  
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32  
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-33  
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-28  
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-29  
Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5  
Rear window and outside mirror defroster  
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27  
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32  
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off  
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-12  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .5-3  
Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-28  
Towing  
Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23  
Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11  
Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . .9-19  
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16  
Transceiver  
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver. . . . . .2-49  
Transmission  
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34  
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-26  
Continuously Variable Transmission  
(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13  
Driving with Continuously Variable  
immobilizer system), engine start . . . . .2-25, 3-3  
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18  
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27  
Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . . .4-116  
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11  
Driving with manual transmission . . . . . .5-17  
Shift selector lock release. . . . . . . . . .5-15  
Travel (See registering your vehicle in another  
country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9  
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4  
Trunk access through the rear seat . . . . . . .1-9  
Trunk lid lock opener lever. . . . . . . . . . . .3-23  
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48  
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32  
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5  
Temperature gauge  
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5  
Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),  
engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25, 3-3  
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2  
Tire  
W
Warning  
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-57, 2-14  
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-11  
Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-11  
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11  
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-12  
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-33  
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . .2-13, 2-23  
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2  
Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 8-45  
Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-11  
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42  
Tire placard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11  
U
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . .9-24  
10-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-12  
Low windshield-washer fluid warning  
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23  
Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-51  
Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-13  
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-24  
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-56  
Warning/indicator lights and audible  
reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10  
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10  
Washer switch  
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-26  
Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . . .9-8  
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34  
Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8  
When traveling or registering your vehicle  
in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9  
Windows  
Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-43  
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43  
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42  
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43  
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-26  
Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15  
Wiper  
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-26  
Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20  
10-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GAS STATION INFORMATION  
RECOMMENDED FUEL:  
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:  
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane  
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-  
ber (Research octane number 91).  
●
Engine oil with API Certification Mark  
Viscosity SAE 5W-30  
●
See “Recommended SAE Viscosity Numbers” in  
the “Technical and consumer information” sec-  
tion of this manual.  
CAUTION  
● Using a fuel other than that specified  
could adversely affect the emission  
control system, and may also affect the  
warranty coverage.  
COLD TIRE PRESSURE:  
See Tire and Loading Information label.  
The label is typically located on the driver side  
center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional  
information, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Main-  
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this  
manual.  
● Under no circumstances should  
leaded gasoline be used, because this  
will damage the three-way catalyst.  
a
● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.  
Your vehicle is not designed to run on  
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage  
the fuel system components and is not  
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-  
ited warranty.  
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE  
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:  
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle  
use, follow the recommendations outlined in the  
“Break-in schedule” information found in the  
“Starting and driving” section of this manual. Fol-  
low these recommendations for the future reli-  
ability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure  
to follow these recommendations may result in  
vehicle damage or shortened engine life.  
For additional information, see “Capacities and  
recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical  
and consumer information” section.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Milwaukee Drill 1680 20 User Manual
Milwaukee Saw 6268 21 User Manual
Moxa Technologies Switch 405A SERIES User Manual
MTD Log Splitter 753 05193 User Manual
Nextar Digital Photo Frame N7 102 User Manual
Nintendo Video Game Console 148Hx210W User Manual
Nostalgia Electrics Griddle FG100 User Manual
Optoma Technology Projector DX623 User Manual
Panasonic Power Supply AM 4PI User Manual
ParaBody Home Gym 950102 User Manual